TW541447B - Editor device and recording medium for storing an editor program - Google Patents

Editor device and recording medium for storing an editor program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW541447B
TW541447B TW89117483A TW89117483A TW541447B TW 541447 B TW541447 B TW 541447B TW 89117483 A TW89117483 A TW 89117483A TW 89117483 A TW89117483 A TW 89117483A TW 541447 B TW541447 B TW 541447B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
editing
program
control
data
display
Prior art date
Application number
TW89117483A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Kenichi Munemoto
Minoru Yoshida
Shunu Tanigawa
Takao Ohtomo
Original Assignee
Digital Electronics Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP24644599A external-priority patent/JP3913414B2/en
Priority claimed from JP24641799A external-priority patent/JP2001075616A/en
Priority claimed from JP24640299A external-priority patent/JP2001075614A/en
Priority claimed from JP24640799A external-priority patent/JP2001075615A/en
Priority claimed from JP24922799A external-priority patent/JP2001075791A/en
Application filed by Digital Electronics Corp filed Critical Digital Electronics Corp
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW541447B publication Critical patent/TW541447B/en

Links

Abstract

The present invention provides an editor device and a recording medium for storing an editor program, for preventing the repetitive input operability for data as in the conventional editor device, and effectively using the database, and easily realizing the data sharing with the external system. The programmable controller 2 controls the control procedures (user program) of the operations for the I/O machine (4), and uses the ladder editor (32a) for the production on the ladder window. In order for the programmable display (1) to display the screen of the status of the I/O machine (4) (user screen), using the screen editor (32b) to produce on the screen production window. For example, when dragging and dropping the symbols onto the screen production window in the ladder graph on the ladder window adjacent to the screen production window, the attribute data associated with the symbols, including the name and address of the I/O machine (4); copying the ladder file (33a) for the registry of the user program to the screen file (33b) for the registry of the user screen; and, displaying the icon corresponding to the attribute data in the screen production window. Thus, it is not necessary to have the common database for registering the attribute data.

Description

541447 五、發明說明α) - 【技術分野】 本發明主要是有關於具有可顯示控制對象機器的狀態 及具有可控制控制對象機器動作之功能的系統中,設計會 依據被控端的狀態而顯示内容及設計控制被控端的控制程 序所使用到之編輯設備及用於儲存編輯程式的記錄媒介。 [背景技術】 被大家所稱為可程式控制器(以下簡稱P L C )的生產事 業用控制裝置,為了實現各種控制的程序控制,則具備了 以中央處理器及記憶體為中心的硬體部份和掌管控制的軟 體部份。軟體部份方面,為了讓可程式控制器依據最初設 計的控制系統進行動作所設計的程序控制流程,包含了其· 控制流程的指令轉換,將指令寫入記憶體等。一般來說, 這一連串的作業都被稱為程式設計。541447 V. Description of the invention α)-[Technical field] The present invention mainly relates to a system having a function capable of displaying the control target machine and a function capable of controlling the control target machine's operation. The design will display the content according to the state of the controlled terminal And design the editing equipment used in the control program of the controlled end and the recording medium used to store the editing program. [Background Art] A control device for production operations, which is called a programmable controller (hereinafter referred to as PLC), is equipped with a central part of a processor and a memory, in order to realize various control program control. And the software part that controls it. In terms of software, the program control flow designed to allow the programmable controller to operate in accordance with the control system originally designed includes the command conversion of the control flow, and the writing of instructions to memory. Generally, this series of operations is called programming.

針對這樣的程式設計’為了讓沒有具備電腦專業知識 的人也可以運用獨特的程式語言簡單的製作程式,因此讓 使用者容易使用的程式設計語言也就陸續被開發出來。現 在,於國際電氣技術標準會議I E C ( I n t e r n a t i ο n a 1 Electrotechnical C〇m m i s s i〇n )貝1J制定了標準白勺程式設 計語言(I E C 6 1 1 3 1 - 1 )。那就是順序式功能圖S F C (Sequential Function Chart ) 、 P白匕梯圖LD ( LadderAiming at such programming 'In order to make it easy for people without computer expertise to use unique programming languages to make programs, programming languages that are easy for users to use have also been developed. Now, at the International Electrotechnical Standards Conference I E C (I n t e r n a t i ο n a 1 Electrotechnical Com s s i 〇n) Bei 1J has developed a standard programming language (I E C 6 1 1 3 1-1). That is S F C (Sequential Function Chart), P White Ladder LD (Ladder

Diagram )、指令集 I L ( I n s "t r u c t i ο n L i s t )、功能方塊 _ 圖FBD (Function Block Diagram)及結構化文字ST (Structured Text )白勺五種言吾言。 上述之因素,利用各種的程式設計語言來開發程式的Diagram), instruction set I L (Ins " t r u c t i ο n L i s t), function block _ diagram FBD (Function Block Diagram) and structured text ST (Structured Text) five words. The above factors use various programming languages to develop programs.

第5頁 541447 五、發明說明(2) - 環境也正在整頓當中。例如,對於階梯圖來說,因運用中 繼符號(r e 1 a y s y m b ο 1 )來設計階梯回路比較簡單,因此 從以前開始就常被廣範的使用,至目前為止也算是最常被 使用的程式設計語言。逆用這樣卞的程式設計語言進行程 式設計作業,其所使用到的程式設計工具階梯編輯器 (1 a d d e r E d i t 〇 r )等的程式設計軟體已漸漸的普及。這 個軟體運用於個人電腦等的電腦裝置上時,制作階梯圖等 可將包含著符號(s y m b ο 1 )的型態一併製作出來,因此可 以簡單的製作或是編輯程式。 另外,對於人機介面HMI (Human Machine Interface )的可程式顯示器來說,是晝素顯示畫面、操作用輸入開_ 關、主控制器(可程式控制器)的界面,並且是具備為了 可從晝面上控制操作輸入等動作所需的程式記憶體的操作 用顯示器。一般來說,可程式顯示器為顯示圖形,除了具 備操作盤、開關、顯示燈等的功能以外,也具備了為了管 理控制對象機器的稼動情形和作業指示等方面可針對螢 眷、機器輸入設定值的輸入端功能。 又,最近幾年,為了與控制對象機器連結而搭載了輸 tB入裝置,因此具備可程式控制器的控制功能之可程式顯 示器也因而登場了。 這樣的可程式顯示器所顯示之控制畫面(顯示内容程φ 式),可由使用者使用晝面製作軟體(畫面編輯)自行製 作◦當使用者自行製作晝面時,於個人電腦等之晝面製作 軟體所提供之開關、數值鍵盤、數值顯示器、圖表顯示器Page 5 541447 V. Description of Invention (2)-The environment is also being rectified. For example, for the ladder diagram, it is relatively simple to design the ladder circuit by using the relay symbol (re 1 aysymb ο 1), so it has been widely used from before, and it is still the most commonly used program so far. Design language. Inversely, such a programming language is used to perform program design operations, and programming software such as a ladder editor (1 a d d e r d i t 〇 r) used by the programming tool has been gradually popularized. When this software is used on a computer device such as a personal computer, a ladder diagram, etc. can be created together with a pattern containing symbols (s y m b ο 1), so it is easy to create or edit programs. In addition, the programmable display of HMI (Human Machine Interface) is an interface for daytime display screen, operation input on / off, and main controller (programmable controller). Operation display for program memory for controlling operations such as operation input on the day. Generally, the programmable display is used to display graphics. In addition to functions such as operation panels, switches, and display lights, it also has settings for managing the target machine's operating situation and operation instructions. It can also set values for the family and the machine. Input function. In recent years, a tB input device has been installed in order to connect to a control target device, so a programmable display having a control function of a programmable controller has also appeared. The control screen (display content range φ type) displayed on such a programmable display can be created by the user using daytime production software (screen editing). ◦ When the user creates the daytime surface, it is produced on the personal computer, etc. Software provided switches, numeric keyboard, numeric display, chart display

541447 五、發明說明(3) · 等元件(圖示)或者是運用繪圖功能等,建構自己想要的 控制畫面。 又,監控用軟體的S電腦輔助設計(C A D ) A (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition )主要是 因為提供人機界面作業環境而普及於市場上。S電腦輔助 tx tf ( C A D ) A (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition )為一種顯示機械的運轉動作和控制盤的操 作面板的高性能圖形監控軟體,與前述的畫面編輯軟體相 同,可利用基本的圖形繪圖功能和軟體中所提供之圖形元 I件自行製作控制晝面。 又,晝面編輯軟體並不是只有上述之單一功能而已,_ 其中也有預先準備好的具有複數功能的複合元件。針對複 合元件來說,可舉複合開關和計數器為例。以複合開關是 由複數的開關所組合的例子來說,須準備依據必要的開關 之動作而連動的燈。又,計數器為顯示設定值和計數值的 數值顯示器,須具備一旦數值達到設定值時就會亮起的燈 和為了重新操作的按鈕等。這樣的複合元件通常來說,已 I* · 事先以圖書館(Library)形式儲存於軟體中,提供使用 者可以在編輯軟體的視窗上自由選擇運用。 所製成之控制晝面,將被視成晝面檔案並被轉送至可 程式顯示器中記憶儲存。當可程式控制器在運作時,會根翁 據可程式顯示器和可程式控制器間所互換的資料,並順應 控制對象機器的動作狀態5於控制晝面上顯示各元件之圖 形。541447 V. Description of the invention (3) · Use the drawing function, etc. to construct the control screen you want. In addition, S Computer Aided Design (C A D) A (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) for monitoring software is popular in the market mainly because it provides a man-machine interface operating environment. S computer-assisted tx tf (CAD) A (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) is a high-performance graphic monitoring software that displays the operation of the machine and the operation panel of the control panel. It is the same as the aforementioned screen editing software, and can use basic graphic drawing The function and the graphic element I provided in the software can be used to control the day surface. In addition, daytime editing software is not only a single function mentioned above, but there are also composite components with multiple functions prepared in advance. For composite components, composite switches and counters are examples. In the case where a composite switch is a combination of a plurality of switches, it is necessary to prepare a lamp that is linked according to the necessary switch operation. In addition, the counter is a numerical display that displays the set value and count value. It must have a lamp that lights up when the value reaches the set value, and a button for re-operation. Generally speaking, such composite components have been stored in the software in the form of a library (Library) in advance, so that users can freely choose and use them in the window of the editing software. The created control daylight surface will be regarded as a daylight file and transferred to a programmable display for memory storage. When the programmable controller is in operation, according to the data exchanged between the programmable display and the programmable controller, it conforms to the operating state of the control target machine. 5 The graphic of each component is displayed on the control day.

第7頁 541447 五、發明說明(4) · 可是,一般來說運用階梯編輯器(1 a d d e r e d i t〇r ) 等製作(程式設計)控制程序程式和運用畫面編輯軟體製 作(晝面製作)顯示内容程式都是各自獨立的被進行。舉 例來說,如根據所製作的控制程序程式而製作顯示内容程 式時,製作控制程序程式時,須將有關各個裝置所輸入之 名稱及位址以表格形式記下來當成設計資料。一面參照此 項設計資料一面進行包含有關定義輸入/輸出(I / 0 )位址等 顯示内容程式的製作作業。又,根據所製作的顯示内容程 式而製作控制程序程式時,也是同樣須參照預先所準備好 的設計資料。 然而,這種方法必須事先準備好與所要製作的程式相_ 互對應的設計資料,也因此就會有降低作業效率之缺點。 又,上述之方法中,程式的製作全部都是依據使用者的輸 入操作所進行,因此,對於上述的程式製作方法來說,將 會出現作業效率低且費時之問題。 程式的製作全都是依據使用者的輸入操作而製成,因 此,一個程式製作完成後再製作另一個程式時,一面參照 設計資料而進行輸入操作,恐怕會發生輸入錯誤之情形。 又,如果發生這樣的錯誤時,將會引發進行移除程式中所 發生之錯誤時的除錯作業會增加且更複雜之問題。 而且,為了製作顯示内容程式所進行之輸入作業和為 _ 了製作控制程序程式所進行之輸入作業兩者須各別進行, 因而需要大量的時間和勞力。 又,對於上述的程式製作方法,盡管兩個程式須連結Page 7 541447 V. Description of the invention (4) · However, generally, a ladder editor (1 adderedit) is used to create (programming) control program programs and screen editing software (day-to-day production) to display content programs. They are all carried out independently. For example, when the display content program is created based on the control program program, the name and address entered by each device must be recorded as design data when the control program program is created. While referring to this design data, we will create a program that contains display contents such as defining input / output (I / 0) addresses. In addition, when creating a control program based on the created display content program, it is also necessary to refer to design data prepared in advance. However, this method must prepare design data corresponding to the program to be produced in advance, and therefore, it has the disadvantage of reducing operating efficiency. In addition, in the above-mentioned method, all programs are created according to the input operation of the user. Therefore, for the above-mentioned program production method, problems of low operation efficiency and time-consuming problems will occur. Programs are created based on user input operations. Therefore, when one program is created and another program is created, input operations are performed while referring to design data. I am afraid that input errors may occur. In addition, if such an error occurs, it will lead to an increased and more complicated debugging operation when removing the error occurred in the program. In addition, both the input operation for producing the display content program and the input operation for producing the control program must be performed separately, which requires a lot of time and labor. Also, for the above programming method, although the two programs must be linked

第8頁 i 541447 五、發明說明(5) · 到共同的裝置,但卻各自進行程式製作◦因各自獨立製作 的因素,需另外增加為了分配裝置的位址(I / 0位址)和階 梯指令及元件而進行的輸入操作。 為解決這方面的缺點,日本國特許公開公報 1 1 - 1 7 5 3 2 6號(1 9 9 9年7月2日公開)中,即公佈出可將製 作階梯圖(階梯程式)的階梯編輯器和製作畫面的晝面編 輯軟體之間的階梯記號(階梯指令)和配置於晝面的元件 (圖示)對應並連結的編輯設備。這樣的編輯設備可將階 梯視窗上所顯示之階梯記號移至晝面編輯視窗。例如,進 行拖曳作業時,對於一個符號(symbo 1 )及對應此符號最( 少一個的記號,其包含共通之控制對象機器的名稱及位址1_ 之屬性資料,將其儲存於共通之資料庫中,而晝面編輯視 窗將會參照屬性資料,並會顯示上述被拖曳之符號相互對 應之記號。又,這個編輯設備也可以進行其相反之動作。 因此先將階梯圖或者是控制畫面任何一方製作完成,使用 者只要進行拖曳等操作即可簡單的製作另一方之程式。 然而’對於上述公報中所公佈之編輯設備’措由資料 共通化來避免階梯編輯器和畫面編輯器間資料的重覆輸入 的儲存屬性資料之共通資料庫,須另外設置階梯編輯器用 的階梯檔案及晝面編輯器用的畫面檔案。而且,將所製作 的階梯圖(使用者程式)及晝面(使用者畫面)登錄成最終的參 階梯檔案及畫面檔案時,兩個檔案也會將上述之屬性資料 一併登錄,更造成屬性資料的重覆登錄。 又,屬性資料可從共通資料庫中複製成階梯檔案或者Page 8 i 541447 V. Description of the invention (5) · To the common device, but each program is created separately. Due to the factors of independent production, additional addresses (I / 0 address) and ladders must be added to allocate devices. Commands and components. In order to solve the shortcomings in this regard, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Gazette No. 1 1-1 7 5 3 2 6 (published on July 2, 1999), it is announced that the steps that can be used to create a ladder diagram (staircase formula) An editing device that corresponds to and connects the step marks (step instructions) between the editor and the daytime editing software that creates the screen, and components (illustrations) placed on the daytime surface. Such an editing device can move the step mark displayed on the step window to the daytime editing window. For example, when performing a drag operation, for a symbol (symbo 1) and a symbol corresponding to this symbol (at least one), it includes the attribute data of the common control target machine and the address 1_, and stores it in a common database. In the daytime editing window, the attribute data will be referenced, and the above-mentioned symbols corresponding to the dragged symbols will be displayed. In addition, this editing device can also perform the opposite action. Therefore, first use the ladder diagram or the control screen. After the production is completed, the user can simply create another program by dragging and other operations. However, for the editing equipment published in the above-mentioned bulletin, the data is shared to avoid the duplication of data between the ladder editor and the screen editor. The common database of stored attribute data that is overwritten must be provided with a ladder file for the ladder editor and a screen file for the daytime editor. In addition, the created ladder diagram (user program) and daytime surface (user screen) When registering as the final reference file and picture file, the two files will also include the above-mentioned attribute information. Log in together, resulting in more repeat login attribute data. Also, attribute data can be copied from a ladder into a common database or file

第9頁 541447 五、發明說明(6) 是晝面檔案,並為了讓 禮案共容時,必須經由 ,再將其複製成為階梯 這種情形,對於從 由專門的播案所管理, 被利用之缺點。 又,對於運用階梯 為了讓階梯圖更容易被 階梯記號的旁邊 併 器(例如 常這種階 所輸入之 輸入的。 1開關和燈)的 梯記號的附帶 階梯記號,並 說也 應控 貼附 來說 時5 的這 和勞 而進 帶情 另一 是相 制對 並顯 ,當 一併 然而 種方 力也 行另 報輸 方面 , 同。例 象機器 示有關 畫面編 與位址 5附帶 法,如 就越多 一方程 入錯誤 對於運 士 Π , 士口 所繪製 其元件 輯器配 Sl f|;^ 情報由 須輸入 〇 又, 式的附 之問題 外部系統的資料和階梯檔案和畫面 外部系統將其資料複製到資料庫中 檔案或者是畫面檔案之程序。 前的編輯設備來說,因為資料都是 因此也就有了資料庫並沒有有效的 編輯器所製作而成的階梯圖來說, 了解。例如,於圖8 4 ( a )所表示之 將其階梯記號所對應之控制對象機 名稱或者是動作、說明等註明。通 情報是依據階梯編輯器分派位址給 和位址一起分派給階梯記號時所被 用晝面編輯器所製作而成之晝面來 同圖8 4 ( b )所表示的,可於依據對 而成之元件(例如,開關和燈)上, 之附帶情報。對於這樣的附帶情報 置對應上述位址之元件到基礎畫面 連性後輸入。 階梯編輯器和晝面編輯器各別輸入 之附帶情報越多,所須花費的時間 因為一面參照一方的程式設計資料 帶情報寫入作業時,恐怕會發生附 。因為輸入錯誤,而造成進行程式Page 9 541447 V. Description of the invention (6) is a daytime file, and in order to make the gift plan compatible, it must go through and then copy it into a ladder. For the case where it is managed by a special broadcast case, it is used Disadvantages. In addition, in order to make the ladder diagram easier to be paralleled by the ladder symbol (for example, the input of such steps is often input. 1 switch and lamp), the ladder symbol is attached with the ladder symbol, and it should be controlled and attached. In terms of five, this is the same as working hard. The other is that the system is opposite and obvious. When combined, all efforts can be reported separately. The same. For example, the machine shows the relevant screen editing and address 5 collateral method. For example, the more one equation is entered, the more the equation is entered. For Shishi II, Shikou draws its component editor with Sl f |; ^ Information must be entered. Attached question The external system's data and ladder file and the screen external system's process of copying its data to the database file or screen file. For the previous editing equipment, because the data are all, there is a ladder diagram made by the database without an effective editor. For example, as shown in Fig. 84 (a), the name of the control target machine corresponding to its step mark or its operation and description are indicated. The communication information is based on the daytime plane created by the daytime plane editor when the address is assigned by the ladder editor and the address is assigned to the ladder mark together, as shown in Figure 8 4 (b). Paired components (for example, switches and lights) with accompanying information. For such ancillary information, set the component corresponding to the above address to the base screen and enter it. The more the additional information input by the step editor and day editor, the more time it will take, because it will refer to the programming data of one party, and it is likely that the additional information will occur. Programming error due to input error

第10頁 541447 五、發明說明(7) 除錯作業時將 計資料須事先 又,對於 兩者同時進行 先製作階梯圖 較合乎理想。 時進行製作的 者是晝面來製 的情形發生, 面)進行修正 而且,上 中所輸入的有 錄於檔案中後 通於兩個程式 方的程式或者 並且7上 圖時,針對一 對前述的複合 其自動產生最 又,上述 矣和拖放至晝 梯程式及使周 編輯器,因而 法,使用者重 _1國11圓_1 會更加困難。並且,對應所製作之程式的設 準備,因此也就出現作業效率降低之缺點。 上述的編輯設備來說,有可能階梯圖和晝面 製作,但因效率不高之因素,通常都是採用 或者是先製作畫面後再製作另一方的順序比 因此上述的方法並不適用於階梯圖和晝面同 情況。如此,一旦根據製作完成的階梯圖或 作另一方時,如須更改階梯指令和更改圖示 須先將已製作完成之程式(階梯圖或者是晝 因而造成程式設計效率降低之缺點。 述的編輯設備,主要是利用一方於編輯設備 關階梯指令和圖示等資料,將其當成程式登 ,拿來製作另一方之程式。因為如此,將共 的資料預先製作後,再根據其資料來製作一 是兩方之程式,此方法是無法做到的。 述的編輯設備5依據已完成之畫面挺作階梯 個圖示雖可自動產生一個階梯指令,但是針 元件來說,是無法配合複數的階梯指令,讓 合適的階梯回路。 的編輯設備,每次進行將階梯記號各別的拖 面編輯視窗之操作時,為了必須將共通於階 者畫面的資料(裝置名,位址等)複至到晝面 引發處理效率低之問題。又,對於這樣的方 覆進行將階梯記號從階梯視窗拖髮至晝面編 _____ __議 第11頁 541447 五、發明說明(8) 輯視窗之操 之錯誤操作 【發明之公 本發明 可避免資料 庫。且可容 於儲存編輯 又,本 顯示内容程 之編輯設備 本發明 更加適用於 製作顯示内 控制程序程 情報製作顯 製作。 (1 ) 本發 的3個手段< 和具有控制 制系統為對 内容之顯示 入操作的第 行的控制程 可進行輸入 作時, 等問題 開】 之主要 的重複 易實現 程式的 發明之 式及控 及用於 是和以 對應多 容程式 式。並 示内容 是提供 之操作 部糸統 媒介。 目的為 序程式 編輯程 編輯設 且複雜 對應所 本發明 時,不 目的 輸入 和外 記錄 次要 制程 儲存 往的 樣化 時, 且, 程式 恐怕發生部份階梯記號並沒有被拖曳到 具備〕推持以往編輯設備’ 性,又可有效的運用資料 的資料共享之編輯設備及用 提供附帶情報輸入簡易化, 的製作將可更有效率的進行 式的記錄媒介。 備相同可簡易製作程式,且 之程式。又,本發明也提供 輸入之複合元件可自動產生 是可讓依據控制程序程式的 會操作錯誤且更加有效率的 明的編輯設備為了達成上述目的,包含了以下 '以具有顯示控制對象機器狀態之顯示功能部 該控制對象機器動作之控制功能部的顯示/控 象,將為了制定上述顯示功能部所執行的顯示 内容程式,置於第1編輯畫面上讓其可進行輸 1編輯手段及將為了制定上述控制功能部所執 序之控制程序程式,置於第2編輯畫面上讓其 操作的第2編輯手段,和選擇輸入於上述其中Page 10 541447 V. Description of the invention (7) The debugging information must be prepared in advance, and it is ideal to make a ladder diagram for both at the same time. The production is made by the day and time, and the correction is performed on the surface, and the input entered in the above is recorded in the file and then passed to the two formulas or 7 It automatically generates most of the compound, the above mentioned drag and drop to the day ladder program and the week editor, so the method, the user will be more difficult. In addition, due to the preparation of the created program, there is a disadvantage that the operation efficiency is reduced. For the above editing equipment, it is possible to produce ladder diagrams and daytime surfaces, but because of low efficiency, it is usually used or the screen ratio of the other party is made first, so the above method is not suitable for ladders. The picture and the day are the same. In this way, once according to the completed ladder diagram or the other party, if you need to change the ladder instruction and change the diagram, you must first make the completed program (the ladder diagram or the daytime, which causes the disadvantage of reduced programming efficiency.) The equipment is mainly used by one party to edit the equipment ’s instructions such as ladder instructions and icons, and use it as a program to create another program. Because of this, the common data is pre-made, and then one is created based on its data. It is a two-party program, and this method cannot be done. The editing device 5 described above makes a step based on the completed screen. Although the icon can automatically generate a step instruction, the needle element cannot cooperate with multiple steps. In order to make the appropriate ladder circuit editable, every time you perform the operation of dragging the ladder mark on each of the editing windows, in order to restore the data (device name, address, etc.) common to the ladder screen to The daytime surface causes a problem of low processing efficiency. In addition, for such a coverage, the step mark is dragged from the step window to the daytime editor _____ __ Page 11 541447 V. Explanation of the invention (8) Wrong operation of the editing window [The invention of the invention can avoid the database. And it can be stored for editing. The editing equipment of this display content program is more suitable for production (1) The three means of this issue < and the control process with the control system for the first line of the content display operation can be input, etc. The main repetitive and easy-to-implement program is the invention of the formula and control and is used to correspond to the multi-capacity program. The content is provided as the operating medium system. The purpose is to edit the program and edit the program complexly and correspondingly to the invention. When the input is not purposed and the sample is stored in the secondary process of the external record, and the program is afraid that some ladder marks have not been dragged to have] the characteristics of the past editing equipment, and effective use of data data sharing Editing equipment and simplification by providing additional information input, production will be more efficient and progressive recording media The same equipment can be used to easily create programs and programs. In addition, the present invention also provides input composite components that can be automatically generated. This is a clear editing device that can make operation errors and more efficient according to the control program program. Contains the following display and control images with a display function section that displays the status of the control target machine and a control function section that controls the operation of the target machine. It will place the display content program executed by the display function section on the first editing screen. The second editing means that allows it to perform input 1 editing means and put the control program program executed by the control function section on the second editing screen for operation, and selects and inputs in the above.

第12頁 541447 五、發明說明(9) 之一方弟1或者是弟2編輯畫面上之貢料後,該編輯晝面上 所顯示之影像區塊,並為了讓其區塊可對應複製於另外一 方的編輯晝面上之操作,將上述顯示内容程式和上述控制 程序程式間共通的資料,利用包含上述顯示内容程式的顯 示内容程式檔案和包含上述控制程序程式的控制程序程式 檔案間的相互複製之資料複製手段。 本發明的記錄媒介為了達成前述之目的,則記錄了上 述第1及第2編輯手段和上述之資料複製手段各別經由電 腦執行處理過後,包含第1及第2編輯處理和資料複製處 理的編輯程式。 又,本發明的其他記錄媒介5則記錄了包含上述第1 · 或者是第2編輯處理的任何一方和上述資料複製處理的編 輯程式。根據這個記錄媒介,包含了第1或者是第2編輯 處理的任何一方和資料複製處理的2種編輯程式,也就是 說,可以提供第1編輯程式或者是第2編輯程式。 上述之構成,則是依據第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理 )所被製作的顯示内容程式是儲存於顯示内容程式檔案, 而依據第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)所被製作的控制程 序程式則是儲存於控制程序程式檔案。又,根據第1編輯 手段(第1編輯處理)的操作,顯示内容程式製作完成後 或者是顯示内容程式製作中時,而須進行第2編輯手段(_ 弟2編輯處理)來製作控制程序程式時,利用貪料的複政 手段,選取第1編輯晝面上的影像區塊及按照操作將其複 製至第2編輯畫面,順應上述操作動作,兩個程式之間所Page 12 541447 V. Description of the invention (9) After Fang Di 1 or Di 2 edits the tribute on the screen, the editor edits the image blocks displayed on the day, so that the blocks can be copied to other sections accordingly. One editor's operation on the day is to copy the data common between the display content program and the control program program, using the display content program file containing the display content program and the control program program file containing the control program program. Means of data reproduction. In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the recording medium of the present invention records the first and second editing means and the data copying means described above, each of which is processed by a computer, and includes the first and second editing processes and data copying processes. Program. The other recording medium 5 of the present invention stores an editing program including any of the first or second editing process and the data copying process. According to this recording medium, there are two types of editing programs including either the first or the second editing process and the data copying process, that is, the first editing program or the second editing program can be provided. The above-mentioned structure is a display program created by the first editing means (first editing processing) is a control program created by the second editing means (second editing processing) and stored in the display content program file. The program is stored in the control program program file. In addition, according to the operation of the first editing means (the first editing process), after the completion of the display content program creation or the display content program creation, the second editing means (_ brother 2 editing processing) must be performed to create the control program program. At the time, using the revenge method of greed, select the image block on the first editing day and copy it to the second editing screen according to the operation. Following the above operation, the two programs

第13頁 541447 五、發明說明(ίο) 共通之資料將於兩個檔案間進行複製。另一方面,依據第 2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)的操作,控制程序程式製作 完成後或者是控制程式製作中時,而要進行第1編輯手段 (第1編輯處理)來製作顯示内容程式時,利用資料的複 製手段,選取第2編輯晝面上的影像區塊及按照操作將其 複製至第1編輯畫面,於是兩個程式之間所共通之資料將 於兩個檔案間進行複製。 由此,依據影像區塊的選擇及進行複製之操作,儲存 於一方檔案的資料將會複製到另外一方的檔案,因此,可 以製作兩個檔案之間所共通之資料庫。那樣的結果,也就 沒有必要製作兩個編輯手段(兩個編輯處理)所共通之資 料庫。而且,也可避免掉兩個編輯手段所造成之資料的重 覆輸入。因此,對於輸入作業的簡單化將可確保,且也可 有效的利用貢料庫。 對於上述的編輯設備及記錄媒介,除了運用上述的第 1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)於上述第1編輯畫面中,將 上述控制對象機器及其狀態當作影像區塊來製作晝面以外 ,並可輸入各個特定控制對象機器的屬性資料。運用上述 第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)於上述第2編輯晝面中, 將對應上述控制對象機器而代表控制動作之複數的符號當 作影像區塊來製作晝面以外,可輸入上述屬性資料。上述 資料複製手段(資料複製處理)除了將從上述第1或者是 第2任何一方之編輯晝面中,所選擇之上述影像區塊所附 帶之屬性資料,讓其於兩個檔案間進行複製以外,上述第 Π ;! i曜酵||___ 讎 1III3Page 13 541447 V. Description of Invention (ίο) Common information will be copied between the two files. On the other hand, according to the operation of the second editing means (the second editing process), after the control program is created or the control program is being produced, the first editing means (the first editing process) is performed to create the display content program. At this time, using the data copying method, select the image block on the second editing day and copy it to the first editing screen according to the operation, so the data common between the two programs will be copied between the two files. Therefore, according to the selection of the image block and the operation of copying, the data stored in one file will be copied to the other file. Therefore, a common database between the two files can be made. As a result, there is no need to create a database common to both editing methods (two editing processes). Moreover, it is also possible to avoid duplicate input of data caused by two editing methods. Therefore, the simplification of the input operation can be ensured, and the tribute warehouse can be effectively used. For the above-mentioned editing equipment and recording medium, in addition to using the above-mentioned first editing means (first editing processing) on the above-mentioned first editing screen, the control target device and its state are used as image blocks to create a daytime surface, It is also possible to input the attribute data of each specific control target machine. Using the second editing means (second editing processing) on the second editing day surface, using the plural symbols corresponding to the control target machine and representing the control action as image blocks to create the day surface, the above attributes can be entered data. The above-mentioned data duplication means (data duplication processing) will not only copy the attribute data attached to the above-mentioned image block from the editing day of either the first or the second party, and let it copy between the two files , The above Π;! I 曜 leave || 雠 1III3

第14頁 541447 五、發明說明(π) 1或者是第2編輯手段(第1或者是第2編輯處理)為了 對應上述任何一方被複製之屬性資料的檔案,根據參照所 被複製之屬性資料,讓其自動繪製對應被選擇之影像區塊 之控制對象機器和關於同一個控制對象機器的影像區塊是 相當合乎理想的。 上述之構成,依據第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)的 操作,於第1編輯晝面上,將對應控制對象機器之圖示當 作影像區塊被繪製的同時,一併輸入有關控制對象機器之 屬性資料。另一方面,依據第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理 )的操作,於第2編輯畫面上將對應控制對象機器之符號 (例如階梯記號),當作影像區塊進行繪製作業的同時, 一併輸入有關於控制對象機器之屬性資料。 又,依據資料複製手段(資料複製處理),將於第1 編輯晝面上所選擇之圖示所附帶之屬性資料,從顯示内容 程式檔案複製到控制程序程式檔案時,第2編輯手段(第2 編輯處理)參照所複製之屬性資料,將自動繪製對應所選 擇之圖示的控制對象機器和有關於同一個控制對象機器的 符號。另一方面,依據資料複製手段(資料複製處理), 將於第2編輯晝面上所選擇之符號所附帶之屬性資料,從 控制程序程式檔案複製到顯示内容程式檔案時,第1編輯 手段(第1編輯處理)參照所複製之屬性資料,將自動繪 製對應所選擇之符號的控制對象機器和有關於同一個控制 對象機器之圖示。 這樣的方式,先用一方的編輯手段將圖示或者是符號 111 譯Page 14 541447 5. Description of the invention (π) 1 or the second editing means (the first or the second editing process) In order to correspond to the file of the attribute data copied by any of the above, according to the copied attribute data, It is quite desirable to let it automatically draw the control target machine corresponding to the selected image block and the image block about the same control target machine. According to the above configuration, according to the operation of the first editing means (the first editing process), on the first editing day, the icon corresponding to the control target machine is drawn as an image block, and the related control target is also inputted. Machine attribute data. On the other hand, in accordance with the operation of the second editing means (second editing processing), symbols (for example, step marks) corresponding to the control target machine are used as image blocks for drawing operations on the second editing screen. Enter the attribute data about the control target machine. In addition, according to the data copying method (data copy processing), when the attribute data attached to the icon selected on the first editing day is copied from the display content program file to the control program program file, the second editing method (the 2 Editing process) With reference to the copied attribute data, the control target machine corresponding to the selected icon and the symbols related to the same control target machine will be automatically drawn. On the other hand, according to the data copying method (data copy processing), when the attribute data attached to the symbol selected on the second editing day is copied from the control program program file to the display content program file, the first editing method ( (1st editing process) With reference to the copied attribute data, the control target machine corresponding to the selected symbol and a diagram about the same control target machine will be automatically drawn. In this way, first use a editing method to translate the icon or symbol 111

第15頁Page 15

I 541447 五、發明說明(12) 製成,以那些附帶的屬性資料為基準,運用另外一方的編 輯手段製作符號或者是屬性資料及進行屬性資料的複製。 所以,藉由另外一方的編輯手段除了簡易了符號或者是圖 示的製作,屬性資料的輸入也可免除。因此,將可提升顯 示内容程式及控制程序程式的製作效率。 又,上述資料複製手段(資料複製處理)將上述屬性 資料進行影像區塊的選擇及複製作業之操作前,先將其複 製會比較合乎理想。因為如此,例如根據已製作完成之程 式而製作另外一方之程式時,預先將屬性資料總括起來, 進行複製後圖示或者是符號就會被繪製◦又,一面製作一 邊的程式又一面製作另一邊的程式時,在一方的編輯晝面. 上每次圖示或者是符號製作完成後,屬性資料將逐次的被 複製,於另外一方的編輯晝面上將會繪製出符號或者是圖 示。因此,順應程式的製作型態,可有效率的進行影像區 塊的繪圖。 上述任何一個構成的編輯設備及記錄媒介也是,上述 資料複製手段(資料複製處理)將有關於從應用軟體程式 的操作輸入晝面上所輸入之資料並從該操作畫面上所顯示 之影像區塊選取,且對應複製到上述第1或者是第2編輯 畫面上,將上述顯示内容程式或者是上述控制程序程式和 上述應用軟體程式的資料之間所共通的資料,複製到上述_ 顯示内容程式檔案或者是上述控制程序程式檔案會比較合 乎理想。因為如此,顯示内容程式檔案或者是控製程序程 式標案’將可讀取電腦輔助設計(電腦輔助設計(C A D ))I 541447 V. Description of the invention (12) It is made based on those attached attribute data, and the other editing method is used to make symbols or attribute data and copy the attribute data. Therefore, in addition to simplifying the production of symbols or illustrations by the other editing method, the input of attribute data can also be eliminated. Therefore, the production efficiency of the display content program and the control program can be improved. In addition, before the above-mentioned data copying means (data copying processing) performs the operation of selecting image blocks and copying operations of the above-mentioned attribute data, it would be more ideal to copy them. Because of this, for example, when making another program based on the completed program, the attribute data is summarized in advance, and the icon or symbol will be drawn after copying. Also, one side of the program and the other side of the program are created Each time the icon or symbol is created on the editing day, the attribute data will be copied one by one, and the symbol or icon will be drawn on the other editing day. Therefore, according to the production mode of the program, the image block can be efficiently drawn. The editing equipment and recording medium of any of the above constitutions are also the above-mentioned data duplication means (data duplication processing) which will input the data input from the operation surface of the application software program and the image block displayed on the operation screen. Select and correspondingly copy to the first or second editing screen, and copy the data common to the display content program or the control program program and the data of the application software program to the _ display content program file Or the above control program program file would be more ideal. Because of this, the display of the content program file or the control program program mark ’will read computer-aided design (Computer Aided Design (C A D))

第16頁 541447 五、發明說明(13) 等的應用軟體程式之資料。所以,利用兩個程式檔案所構 築之資料庫以外的資料庫,程式的開發將可更有效率的進 行’且可將程式的開發拿米當作更廣範的糸統開發的一部 份。 上述的任何一個所構成之編輯設備,可藉由網際網路 與上述顯示/控制系統不同的系統連線,上述資料複製手 段可在上述兩個檔案和上述系統間進行資料複製是合乎理 想的。因為如此,系統可直接複製上述兩個檔案的任何一 方之屬性資料◦所以,和外部系統的資料共享可容易的實 現。 (2 ) 本發明的編輯設備,為了達到上述之目的,則包含 了下列手段。上述第1及第2編輯手段和選取有關輸入於 上述第1或者是第2任何一方編輯畫面上之資料後該編輯 畫面上所顯示之影像區塊,且對應複製到另外一方的編輯 畫面上,以上述顯示内容程式和上述控制程序程式間所共 通的共通資料為基準,於上述第1或者是第2編輯手段中 ,讓上述顯示内容程式或者是上述控制程序程式產生固有 的固有資料之產生手段。和將上述共通資料及上述固有資 料儲存成單一檔案的資料統合手段。 本發明的記錄媒介,為了達到前述之目的,則記錄了 上述第1及第2編輯手段和上述資料產生手段和上述資料 統合手段等經由電腦執行過後,包含第1及第2編輯處理 和資料產生處理和資料統合處理之編輯程式。 又,本發明的其他記錄媒介,則記錄了包含上述第1Page 16 541447 5. Information of application software programs such as the invention description (13). Therefore, by using a database other than the database constructed by the two program files, program development can be carried out more efficiently 'and program development can be used as part of a broader system development. The editing equipment constituted by any of the above can be connected to a system different from the above display / control system via the Internet. It is desirable that the above data copying method can copy data between the above two files and the above system. Because of this, the system can directly copy the attribute data of either of the two files. Therefore, data sharing with external systems can be easily implemented. (2) In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the editing device of the present invention includes the following means. The above first and second editing means and the image blocks displayed on the editing screen after selecting the information input on the first or second editing screen are correspondingly copied to the editing screen of the other party, Based on the common data that is common between the display content program and the control program program, in the first or second editing means, the display content program or the control program program generates unique inherent data generation means. . It is a data integration method that stores the above-mentioned common data and the above-mentioned inherent data into a single file. In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the recording medium of the present invention records the first and second editing means, the data generating means, and the data integrating means described above and is executed by a computer, and includes the first and second editing processing and data generating. Editors for processing and data integration. Also, in another recording medium of the present invention, the first

第17頁 541447 五、發明說明(14) 或者是第2編輯處理的任何一方和上述資料產生處理和上 述資料統合處理之編輯程式。依據這個記錄媒介,包含了 第1或者是第2編輯處理的任何一方和資料複製處理的2 種類編輯程式’也就是說可以提供第1或者是第2編輯程 式。 上述之構成,依據第1編輯手段的操作於顯示内容程 式製作完成時或顯示内容程式製作中時,而須依據第2編 輯手段(第2編輯處)製作控制程序程式時,資料產生手 段(資料產生處理)選擇於第1編輯晝面上之影像區塊及 按照操作將其複製至第2編輯晝面,順應上述操作動作, 第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)將以共通資料為基準來產 生固有資料。另一方面,依據第2編輯手段(第2編輯處 理)的操作,控制程序程式製作完成後或者是控制程序程 式製作時,而須依據第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)的操 作製作顯不内容程式時’貢料的產生手段(資料的產生處 理)選擇於第2編輯晝面上之影像區塊及按照操作將其複 製至第1編輯畫面,順應上述操作動作,第1編輯手段( 第1編輯處理)將以共通資料為基準產生固有資料。因為 如此,可避免掉兩個編輯手段(兩個編輯處理)所產生的 資料重覆輸入之缺點。 又,依照上述所產生之固有資料,運用資料統合手段 (資料統合處理)將其共通資料一併儲存成單一檔案。也 就是說,依據第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)所製作的顯 示内容程式及依據第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)所製作Page 17 541447 V. Description of the invention (14) or the second editing process and the editing program for the above-mentioned data generation process and the above-mentioned data integration process. According to this recording medium, there are two types of editing programs including either the first or second editing process and the data copying process, that is, the first or second editing process can be provided. With the above structure, the data generating means (data) must be generated when the display content program is created or the display content program is created in accordance with the operation of the first editing method, and the control program program is created in accordance with the second editing method (the second editing office). Generate processing) Select the image block on the first editing day and copy it to the second editing day according to the operation. Following the above operation, the second editing method (the second editing processing) will be based on the common data. Generate inherent data. On the other hand, according to the operation of the second editing means (the second editing process), after the control program is created or when the control program is created, the display must be created according to the operation of the first editing means (the first editing process). In the content program, the means for generating materials (data generation and processing) is selected on the second editing day image area and copied to the first editing screen according to the operation. In accordance with the above operation, the first editing method (the 1 Editing process) The unique data will be generated based on the common data. Because of this, the shortcomings of repeated input of data generated by two editing methods (two editing processes) can be avoided. In addition, according to the inherent data generated above, the data integration method (data integration processing) is used to store the common data together into a single file. That is, the display content program created by the first editing means (the first editing process) and the display content program created by the second editing means (the second editing process)

第18頁 541447 五、發明說明(15) 的控制程序程式一併儲存成同一個檔案。因此,將可製作 兩個程式所共通之單一的資料庫。 針對上述的編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述第1編輯手段 (第1編輯處理)將於上述第1編輯畫面上,除了將代表 上述控制對象機器及其狀態的數個顯示符號當作上述影像 區塊來繪製畫面以外,並輸入包含了對應各個控制對象機 器所設定之變數名的上述共通資料^上述第2編輯手段( 第2編輯處理)於上述第2編輯晝面上,將代表對應上述 控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號當作影像區塊來 繪製晝面以外,並輸入上述共通資料。上述資料產生手段 (資料產生處理)參照將上述第1或者是第2編輯手段( 第1編輯處理或者是第2編輯處理)於第1編輯晝面或者 是第2編輯晝面的任格一方上,所選擇且複製於另一個晝 面上的上述影像區塊所附帶的上述共通資料,將對應所選 擇之影像區塊的控制對象機器和有關於同一個控制對象機 器的影像區塊,自動繪製晝面是合乎理想的。 上述之構成,依據第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)的 操作,對應控制對象機器的顯示符號(例如圖形)於第1 編輯晝面上當作影像區塊進行繪圖的同時,將一併輸入有 關控制對象機器的變數資料。另一方面,依據第2編輯手 段(第2編輯處理)的操作,對應控制對象機器的控制符 號(例如階梯記號)於第2編輯畫面上當作影像區塊進行 繪圖的同時,將一併輸入有關控制對象機器的變數資料。 又,依據資料的產生手段(資料產生處理),第2編P.18 541447 V. The control program of the invention description (15) is stored in the same file. Therefore, a single database common to both programs will be made. For the above-mentioned editing device and recording medium, the above-mentioned first editing means (first editing processing) will be on the above-mentioned first editing screen, except that a plurality of display symbols representing the control target device and its status will be used as the image block In addition to drawing the screen, and inputting the above-mentioned common data including the variable names corresponding to each control target device ^ The second editing means (second editing processing) on the second editing day will represent the corresponding control target Several control symbols of the machine's control actions are used as image blocks to draw outside the daytime surface, and the above-mentioned common data is input. The above-mentioned data generating means (data generating processing) refers to the above-mentioned first or second editing means (the first editing processing or the second editing processing) on either side of the first editing day or the second editing day. The above-mentioned common data attached to the above-mentioned image block selected and copied on another day surface will be automatically drawn corresponding to the control target machine of the selected image block and the image block related to the same control target machine. The daytime surface is ideal. According to the above structure, according to the operation of the first editing means (the first editing process), the display symbols (for example, graphics) corresponding to the control target machine are plotted as image blocks on the first editing day, and are inputted together. Variable data of the control target device. On the other hand, according to the operation of the second editing means (the second editing process), the control symbols (for example, step marks) corresponding to the control target machine are plotted as image blocks on the second editing screen, and are inputted together. Variable data of the control target device. In addition, according to the means of data generation (data generation processing), Part 2

第19頁 541447 五、發明說明(16) 輯手段(第2編輯處理)參照從第1編輯晝面複製到第2編 輯畫面上附帶於顯示符號中的共通資料。將自動繪製對應 所選擇之符號的控制對象機器和有關於同一個控制對象機 器的控制符號。另一方面,依據資料的產生手段(資料產 生處理),第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)參照從第2編輯 晝面複製到第1編輯晝面上附帶於控制符號中的共通資料 。將自動繪製對應所選擇之符號的控制對象機器和有關於 同一個控制對象機器的控制符號。 這樣的方式,先用一方的編輯手段將顯示符號或者是 控制符號製成,以那些附帶的資料為基準,運用另外一方 的編輯手段製作控制符號或者是顯示符號。如此,藉由另® 外一方的編輯手段除了簡易了符號的製作,共通資料的輸 入也可免除。因此,將可提升顯示内容程式及控制程序程 式的製作效率。 又,針對這個編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述資料統合手 段(資料統合處理)將作為包含上述控制對象機器的位址 及其所對應而被設定之變數名的上述共通資料的變數資料 5和作為包含上述控制符號及其所對應的上述變數名的上 述固有資料的控制符號資料,和作為包含上述顯示符號及 其所對應的上述變數名的上述固有資料的顯示符號資料。 藉由上述兩個符號資料各別的變數名,轉換成可與上述變)φ 數資料結合的型態儲存於上述檔案中是合乎理想的。 這樣的構成來說,依據資料統合手段(資料統合處理 ),兩個符號資料藉由變數名,轉換成可與上述變數資料P.19 541447 V. Description of the invention (16) Editing means (second editing process) refers to common information copied from the first editing day to the second editing screen and attached to the display symbol. The control target machine corresponding to the selected symbol and the control symbols related to the same control target machine are automatically drawn. On the other hand, according to the data generation method (data generation processing), the first editing method (first editing processing) refers to the common data copied from the second editing day surface to the first editing day surface with control symbols. The control target machine corresponding to the selected symbol and the control symbols related to the same control target machine are automatically drawn. In this way, the display symbol or control symbol is first made by one editing method, and based on those attached materials, the control symbol or display symbol is produced by the other editing method. In this way, in addition to simplifying the production of symbols by the other editing methods, the input of common data can also be eliminated. Therefore, the production efficiency of display content programs and control program programs will be improved. For this editing device and recording medium, the above-mentioned data integration means (data integration processing) will include the variable data 5 including the address of the control target device and the variable name corresponding to the variable data, and include The control symbol data of the control symbol and the specific data of the variable name corresponding to the control symbol, and the display symbol data of the specific data including the display symbol and the corresponding variable name of the variable name. With the variable names of the two symbolic data, it is ideal to convert it into a type that can be combined with the variable) φ number data stored in the above file. For this structure, according to the data integration method (data integration processing), the two symbol data are converted into data that can be used with the above variables by the variable name.

第20頁 541447 五、發明說明(17) 結合的型態儲存於上述檔案中,因此,結合各種不同的資 料的資料庫將很容易的被構築。不僅相當普及又容易使用 的關聯式資料庫(R e 1 a t i ο n a 1 Database )以外,其他的 階層型資料庫、網際網路型資料庫、物件指向型資料庫等 的構築也是可能。因此,可更深一層的有效利用資料庫。 (3 ) 本發明的編輯設備為了達到上述目的,則包含了下 列手段。上述第1或者是第2編輯手段和選取有關輸入於 上述第1或者是第2任何一方編輯晝面上之資料後該編輯 晝面上所顯示之影像區塊,且對應複製到另外一方的編輯 晝面上,將針對上述影像區塊的附帶情報提供給對應該編 輯晝面的編輯手段的附帶情報供給手段。 Φ 本發明的,記錄媒介,為了達到前述之目的,則記錄了 上述第1及第2編輯手段和上述附帶情報供給手段經由電 腦執行過後,包含第1及第2編輯處理和附帶情報供給處 理之編輯程式。 又,本發明的其他記錄媒介,則記錄了包含上述第1 或者是第2編輯處理的任何一方和上述附帶情報供給處理 之編輯程式。依據這個記錄媒介,包含了第1或者是第2 編輯處理的任何一方和附帶情報供給處理的2種類編輯程 式,也就是說可以提供第1或者是第2編輯程式。 上述之構成,依據第1編輯手段的操作於顯示内容程 · 式製作完成時或顯示内容程式製作中時,而須依據第2編 輯手段(第2編輯處理)製作控制程序程式時,附帶情報 供給手段(附帶情報供給處理)選擇於第1編輯晝面上之Page 20 541447 V. Description of the invention (17) The combined type is stored in the above file, so a database combining various data will be easily constructed. In addition to the popular and easy-to-use relational databases (R e 1 a t i ο n a 1 Database), other hierarchical databases, Internet-based databases, and object-oriented databases are also possible. Therefore, the database can be used more effectively. (3) In order to achieve the above object, the editing device of the present invention includes the following means. The first or second editing means mentioned above and after selecting the data input on any of the first or second editing editors on the day surface, the image blocks displayed on the editing day surface are correspondingly copied to the other party ’s editor On the daytime, the auxiliary information for the above-mentioned image block is provided to the auxiliary information supply means corresponding to the editing means for editing the daytime surface. Φ The recording medium of the present invention records the first and second editing means and the supplementary information supply means through a computer in order to achieve the aforementioned purpose, and includes the first and second editing processes and the supplementary information supply process. Edit the program. Further, in another recording medium of the present invention, an editing program including any one of the first or second editing process and the above-mentioned additional information supplying process is recorded. According to this recording medium, either one of the first or second editing processing and two types of editing programs with information supply processing are included, that is, the first or second editing program can be provided. With the above structure, when the content of the first editing means is completed or the content is created, or when the content is being programmed, the control program must be created with the second editing means (the second editing process). Means (with information supply processing) selected on the first editing day

第21頁 541447 五、發明說明(18) 影像區塊及按照操作將其複製至第2編輯畫面,順應上述 操作動作,針對影像區塊的附帶情報將會提供給第2編輯 手段(第2編輯處理)。所以,第2編輯手段(第2編輯處 理)可將被提供之附帶情報分配給於對應第1編輯手段( 第1編輯處理)所選擇之上述影像區塊而製成之影像區塊Page 21 541447 V. Description of the invention (18) The image block and copy it to the second editing screen according to the operation, following the above operation, the additional information on the image block will be provided to the second editing means (the second editor deal with). Therefore, the second editing means (the second editing process) can allocate the provided incidental information to the image blocks created corresponding to the above-mentioned image blocks selected by the first editing means (the first editing process).

另一方面,依據第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)的操 作,控制程序程式製作完成後或者是控制程序程式製作中 時,而須依據第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)的操作製作 顯示内容程式時,附帶情報供給手段(附帶情報供給處理 )選擇於第2編輯晝面上之影像區塊及按照操作將其複製 至第丨編輯晝面,順應上述操作動作,針對影像區塊的附 帶情報將會提供給第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)。所以第 ί編輯手段(第1編輯處理)可將被提供之附帶情報分派 給於對應第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)所選擇之上述影 像區塊而製成之影像區塊。On the other hand, according to the operation of the second editing means (second editing processing), after the control program is created or when the control program is being created, the display must be created according to the operation of the second editing method (second editing processing). In the content program, the information supply means (with information supply processing) selects the image block on the second editing day surface and copies it to the first editing day surface according to the operation. In accordance with the above operation, the image block is attached. Information will be provided to the first editing means (the first editing process). Therefore, the first editing means (the first editing process) can assign the provided incidental information to an image block corresponding to the image block selected by the second editing means (the second editing process).

依據這樣的方式,一方的編輯手段(編輯處理)將已 經被輸入之附帶情報提供給其他編輯手段(編輯處理), 將可避免掉兩個編輯手段(兩個編輯處理)所產生之附帶 情報的重覆輸入之缺點。因此,將附帶情報的輸入簡易化 5可讓顯示内容程式及控制程序程式的製作更加有效率之 進行。 針對上述的編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述第1編輯手段 (第1編輯處理)將於上述第1編輯晝面上,除了將代表According to this method, one side's editing means (editing process) will provide the incidental information that has been input to the other editing means (editing process). Repeat the disadvantages of input. Therefore, the simplification of inputting the information 5 can make the production of display content programs and control program programs more efficient. For the above-mentioned editing equipment and recording medium, the above-mentioned first editing means (first editing processing) will be on the above-mentioned first editing day, except that the representative

第22頁 541447 五、發明說明(19) 上述控制對象機器及其狀態的數個顯示符號當作上述影像 區塊來繪製晝面以外,並輸入包含了對應各個控制對象機 器所設定之變數和共通於上述兩個程式的共通資料和上述 附帶情報。上述第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)於上述第 2編輯畫面上,將代表對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作 的數個控制符號當作影像區塊來繪製晝面以外,並輸入上 述附帶情報及上述共通資料。上述附帶情報供給手段(附 帶情報供給處理)參照將上述第1或者是第2編輯手段( 第1編輯處理或者是第2編輯處理)於第1編輯畫面或者 是第2編輯晝面的任何一方上,所選擇且複製於另一個晝 面上的上述影像區塊所附帶的上述共通資料,將對應所選® 擇之影像區塊的控制對象機器和有關於同一個控制對象機 器的影像區塊,自動繪製晝面是合乎理想的。 上述之構成,依據第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理)的 操作,對應控制對象機器的顯示符號(例如圖示)於第1 編輯晝面上當作影像區塊進行繪製的同時,將一併輸入包 含位址及變數的共通資料和附帶情報。另一方面,依據第 2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)的操作,對應控制對象機器 的控制符號(例如階梯記號)於第1編輯晝面上當作影像 區塊進行繪製的同時,將一併輸入共通資料及附帶情報。 因此,可更深一層的提高顯示内容程式及控制程序程式的I# 製作效率。 又,依據附帶情報供給手段(附帶情報供給處理), 第2編輯手段(第2編輯處理)參照從第1編輯畫面複製Page 22 541447 V. Description of the invention (19) Several display symbols of the control target machine and its status are used as the image block to draw outside the daytime surface, and the input includes variables and common settings corresponding to each control target machine. Common information for the above two programs and the above-mentioned incidental information. The second editing means (second editing processing) on the second editing screen uses a plurality of control symbols representing control operations corresponding to the control target device as image blocks to draw outside the daytime surface, and inputs the incidental information And the above common information. The above-mentioned additional information supplying means (the additional information supplying process) refers to the first or second editing means (the first editing process or the second editing process) on either the first editing screen or the second editing day. The above-mentioned common data attached to the above-mentioned image block selected and copied on another daytime surface will correspond to the control target machine of the selected image block and the image block related to the same control target machine, It is ideal to draw the day and time automatically. According to the above configuration, according to the operation of the first editing means (the first editing process), the display symbols (for example, the illustrations) corresponding to the control target device are drawn as image blocks on the first editing day and are inputted together. Contains common information and incidental information of addresses and variables. On the other hand, according to the operation of the second editing means (the second editing process), the control symbols (for example, step marks) corresponding to the control target machine are drawn as image blocks on the first editing day and are inputted together. Common information and incidental information. Therefore, the I # production efficiency of the display content program and the control program can be further improved. In addition, the second editing means (second editing process) is copied from the first editing screen by referring to the additional information supplying means (the additional information supplying process).

541447 五、發明說明(20) 到第2編輯晝面上附帶於顯示符號中的共通資料。將自動 繪製對應所選擇之符號的控制對象機器和有關於同一個控 制對象機器的控制符號。另一方面,依據附帶情報供給手 段(附帶情報供給處理),第1編輯手段(第1編輯處理) 參照從第2編輯晝面複製到第1編輯畫面上附帶於控制符 號中的共通資料。將自動繪製對應所選擇之符號的控制對 象機器和有關於同一個控制對象機器的控制符號。 這樣的方式,因為將附帶情報和影像區塊同時繪製, 讓程式製作的操作更加單純化。因此,可更深一層的提高 顯示内容程式及控制程序程式的製作效率。 又,針對這個編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述附帶情報包® 含於上述共通資料是相當理想的。因為如此,第1或者是 第2編輯手段(第1或者是第2編輯處理)在將影像區塊 進行繪圖之同時,參照包含了附帶情報的共通資料,將可 容易進行附帶情報和影像區塊間的分配。因此,影像區塊 的繪圖處理將可更有效率的進行。 又,針對這個編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述附帶情報為 上述變數是相當理想的。因為如此,可達到情報共通化的 目的,資料的管理將可簡單化。 (4 ) 本發明的編輯設備,包含了下列手段。上述第1編 輯及第2編輯手段和為了將被分配到上述控制對象機器的 位址之變數,顯示於上述第1及第2編輯晝面上,對應上 述控制對象機器,將上述第1及第2編輯手段所準備的各 別之影像區塊中,運用具有關聯性的相同功能伙伴和已定541447 V. Description of the invention (20) The common information attached to the display symbols on the day of the 2nd editing day. The control target machine corresponding to the selected symbol and the control symbols related to the same control target machine are automatically drawn. On the other hand, according to the supplementary information provision method (incidental information provision processing), the first editing means (first editing processing) refers to common data copied from the second editing day to the control symbol attached to the first editing screen. Control target machines corresponding to the selected symbol and control symbols related to the same control target machine are automatically drawn. In this way, because the accompanying information and image blocks are drawn at the same time, the programming operation is more simplistic. Therefore, the production efficiency of the display content program and the control program can be further improved. For this editing device and recording medium, it is desirable that the above-mentioned incidental information pack® is included in the above-mentioned common data. Because of this, the first or second editing means (the first or the second editing process) draws the image block while referring to the common data containing the additional information, which makes it easy to perform the additional information and image block Allocation. Therefore, the drawing processing of image blocks can be performed more efficiently. For this editing device and recording medium, it is desirable that the incidental information is the variable. Because of this, the purpose of common information can be achieved, and the management of data can be simplified. (4) The editing device of the present invention includes the following means. The first editing and second editing means and variables for assigning addresses to the control target device are displayed on the first and second editing day screens, and the first and second control devices correspond to the control target device. 2 In the respective image blocks prepared by the editing method, the same functional partners and established

第24頁 541447 五、發明說明(21) 義關聯性的狀態來進行登錄之登錄手段。和除了顯示所被 登錄的上述變數以外,選取所顯示之變數,且伴隨著上述 第1或者是弟2編輯羞面上所指不之4呆作’將與該變數定 義了關聯性的影像區塊顯示於該變數所指定之編輯晝面上 之顯示手段。 本發明的記錄媒介,則記錄了上述第1及第2編輯手 段和上述登錄手段和上述顯示手段經由電腦執行過後,包 含第1及第2編輯處理和上述登錄處理和上述顯示處理之 編輯程式。 又,本發明的其他記錄媒介,則記錄了包含上述第1 或者是第2編輯處理的任何一方和上述登錄處理和上述顯 · 示處理之編輯程式。依據這個記錄媒介,包含了第1或者 是第2編輯處理的任何一方和登錄處理及顯示處理的2種 類編輯程式,也就是說可以提供第1或者是第2編輯程式 〇 上述之構成,依據第1編輯手段的操作來製作顯示内 容程式時,只要登錄手段(登錄處理)將上述變數登錄, 顯示手段(顯示處理)將會顯示上述之變數。接著,將此 變數選取,並於第1編輯晝面上下指令時,顯示手段(顯 I示處理)會將與該變數具有其關聯性的影像區塊,顯示於 |第1編輯晝面上。上述的選取及指令的操作,可舉拖曳和 · I拖放的例子。另一方面,依據第2編輯手段(第2編輯處 理)的操作,來進行控制程序程式的製作時,同樣的只要 將上述變數登錄後,依據顯示手段(顯示處理)選擇上述Page 24 541447 V. Description of the invention (21) Registering means for registering the status of the relevant relationship. In addition to displaying the above registered variables, select the displayed variables, and along with the above 1 or 2 of the editor's editor's 4 points of action, the image area that will be associated with the variable will be defined The block is displayed on the editing day specified by the variable. The recording medium of the present invention records the first and second editing means, the registration means, and the display means after being executed by a computer, and includes the first and second editing processes, and the editing processes of the registration processes and the display processes. In another recording medium of the present invention, an editing program including any one of the first or second editing process, the registration process, and the display process is recorded. According to this recording medium, there are two types of editing programs including either the first or the second editing process and the registration processing and display processing, that is, the first or the second editing program can be provided. 1 Operation of editing means to create a display content program, as long as the registration means (registration process) registers the above variables, the display means (display process) will display the above variables. Then, when this variable is selected and instructed on the first editing day, the display means (display processing) will display the image block associated with the variable on the first editing day. The above selection and instruction operations can be exemplified by dragging and dragging. On the other hand, when the control program is created based on the operation of the second editing means (second editing processing), the same as described above is registered after the variables are registered, and then the above is selected according to the display means (display processing).

第25頁 541447 五、發明說明(22) 變數,並於 聯性的影像 變數預先進 編辑處理) 這種方 另外 製作 化的 (登 數建 能屬 制功 機器 功能 個功 就沒有 一方之 型態, 製作型 對於上 錄處理 立關聯 性,例 能'^的 的功能 屬性, 能屬性 第2編輯晝上下其指令時,與該變數具有其關 區塊,將顯示於第2編輯晝面上。又,只要將 行登錄後,第1及第2編輯手段(第1及第2 將可同時製作兩個程式。 式,依據所登錄之變數為基準所顯示的影像區 必要採用一面參照製作完成的程式而一面製作 程式的程序。只要將變數登錄後,不管程式的 影像區塊將可自動產生。因此,將可對應多樣 態並簡單的實現程式之製作。 述的編輯設備及記錄媒介來說,上述登錄手段 )將相同功能關聯的上述影像區塊及與上述變 ,藉由將功能屬性賦予變數時來進行。作為功 如,開關、指示燈、碼表、計數器等具備了控 控制處理(計數器、演算處理等)和控制對象 較適合作為功能屬性。因變數具備了這樣子的 因此將可利用功能屬性來管理變數。所以,每 將會進行變數之顯示,因而可容易的選擇變數 示的等 顯想解 ί、理註 段乎和 手合稱 示是名 顯示的 述顯塊 上時區 ,一5)像 介塊影 媒區於 錄像關 記影有 及述將 輯上, 編與成 個數構 這變的 對述子 針上樣 ,將這 又}據 理依 處。 該刪 用可 運 , 可此 報因 青 〇 帶數 附參 。 該之性 ,入作 時輸操 示應其 顯加高 併增提 一會並 塊不, 區也間 像,時 影性和 與屬力 報能勞 情功的 帶的入 附數輸 的變減 m LT^IEi * 0 » I »- i—3—、一.Γ.ΓΒ- : .IfPage 25 541447 V. Description of the invention (22) Variables, and advanced editing processing of joint image variables) This method is separately produced (Dengshu Jianneng is a type of power-saving machine function, there is no one type) State, the production type is directly related to the recording process. For example, the functional attributes of '^ can be attributed. When the command is edited by the second editing day, it has a block related to this variable and will be displayed on the second editing day. . Also, as long as the line is registered, the first and second editing means (the first and the second will be able to make two programs at the same time. In this way, the image area displayed according to the registered variables must be used as a reference. While creating the program. As long as the variables are registered, the image block of the program will be automatically generated. Therefore, the program can be created in a variety of states and easily realized. For the editing equipment and recording medium described above, , The above-mentioned registration means) The image block and the change associated with the same function are performed by assigning a function attribute to a variable. As functions, a switch, an indicator, Tables, counters, etc. are equipped with control and control processing (counter, calculation processing, etc.) and control objects are more suitable as functional attributes. Because variables have such a feature, you can use the functional attributes to manage the variables. Therefore, each of the variables will be performed Display, so you can easily choose the equivalent visualization of the variable display, the rational note, paragraph, and hand together display is the name of the time zone on the display block, a 5) the media area of the video block in the video Guan Jiying In the review series, we compiled and changed the number structure to sample the needles, and put it in the right place. The deletion can be carried, but this report can be used as a reference. For this nature, when you enter the game, the instructions for losing should be increased and added for a while. The changes in time and time, and the changes in time and the ability to work with the power of the power can be changed. Minus LT ^ IEi * 0 »I»-i—3— 、 一 .Γ.ΓΒ-: .If

,^n, ^ n

第26頁 541447 五、發明說明(23) (5 ) 本發明的編輯設備則包含了下列手段◦上述第1或 者是第2編輯手段和具有複數功能的影像區塊依據上述第 1編輯手段,配置於上述第1編輯畫面上,預先將其分派 給上述被端機器的位址的同時,與上述影像區塊的各功能 定義了關聯性之變數,將其登錄於儲存構成上述控制程序 程式的指令執行順序的程式目錄。將可產生對應上述影像 區塊的部份程式之程式產生手段。 本發明的記錄媒介5為了達到前述之目的,則記錄了 上述第1及第2編輯手段和上述程式產生手段和經由電腦 各別執行過後,包含第1及第2編輯處理和附帶情報供給 處理之編輯程式。 又,本發明的其他記錄媒介,則記錄了包含上述第1 或者是第2編輯處理的任何一方和上述程式產生處理之編 輯程式。依據這個記錄媒介,包含了第1或者是第2編輯 處理的任何一方和程式產生處理的2種類編輯程式,也就 是說可以提供第1或者是第2編輯程式。 上述之構成,影像區塊配置於第1編輯畫面時,依據 程式產生手段(程式產生處理)變數將會被登錄於程式目 錄中。因程式目録足儲弁構成控制程序程式之指令的執行 順序,因此對應位址及影像區塊的功能的變數登錄於程式 目錄中5错由變數將嘗座生對應影像區塊的指令群’因為 如此,部份的程成將會被構成。這個樣子,於操作上,只 要將影像區塊配置於第1編輯畫面,部份的程式將自動產 生,因此,可大幅降低使用者設計部份程式時的工時。所P.26 541447 V. Description of the invention (23) (5) The editing device of the present invention includes the following means: The above-mentioned first or second editing means and image blocks having plural functions are arranged according to the above-mentioned first editing means. On the first editing screen, while assigning it in advance to the address of the end device, it defines variables that are related to each function of the image block, and stores it in the instructions that form the control program. Program directory for execution sequence. The program generation means that can generate some programs corresponding to the above-mentioned image blocks. In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the recording medium 5 of the present invention records the first and second editing means and the program generating means described above, and each of them is executed by a computer, and includes the first and second editing processes and additional information supply processes Edit the program. In another recording medium of the present invention, an editing program including any one of the first or second editing processing and the program generating processing is recorded. According to this recording medium, either the first or second editing process and the two types of editing processes generated by the program are included, that is, the first or second editing process can be provided. With the above configuration, when the image block is arranged on the first editing screen, the variables according to the program generating means (program generating processing) will be registered in the program directory. Because the program directory is sufficient to store the execution order of the instructions that control the program program, the variables corresponding to the function of the address and image block are registered in the program directory. 5 The error variables will try to generate the instruction group corresponding to the image block. In this way, part of Cheng Cheng will be constituted. In this way, in operation, as long as the image block is arranged on the first editing screen, some programs will be automatically generated. Therefore, the man-hour for designing some programs can be greatly reduced. All

第27頁 541447 五、發明說明(24) 以,可提升控 對於上述 (程式產生處 程式的指令群 想的。 具體來說 梯回路將會顯 (程式產生處 編輯畫面5將 圖等,因此將 將可更深一層 對於上述 (程式產生處 式保存為理想 檔案,將上述 了可以分散處 易。且,採用 易的建立其關 程式的管理將 第1及第2編輯 行顯示内容程 又,對於 段(程式座生 制程序程式的 制程序程式的製作效率。 的編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述程式產生手段 理)將於上述第2編輯手段,構成上述部份 讓其於上述編輯晝面上達到視覺化是合乎理 ,控製程序程式為階梯圖時,部份程式的階 示於第2編輯晝面。這種依據程式產生手段 理)所構成,而影像區塊將會被配置於第1 會顯示《作為第2編輯畫面的部份程式的階梯 會提供容易理解的視覺性操作環境。因此, 的提高控制程序程式的製作效率。 的編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述程式產生手段 理)將被產生的上述部份程式以個別檔案方 乃式。從前’控制程序程式就被儲存為卓一 等的部份程式採用個別檔案儲存保管時,除 理以外,對於控制區分的檔案管理可以更簡 XI種構案結構9複合元件和部份程式將弓容 聯。因此,除了包含到實行控制的控制程序 有效率的執行以外,第1及第2編輯手段( 處理)的親和性也提高,將可有效率的進 式及控制程序程式的開發。 這個編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述程式產生手 處理)將所產生的上述部份程式當作上述控 子程式,將該子程式分割,各別進行儲存也 ,i_V打攀丨 !. Γ!Page 27 541447 V. Description of the invention (24) So that the control of the above (thinking of the program instructions at the program generating place is thought. Specifically, the ladder circuit will be displayed (the editing screen of the program generating place will be shown in Figure 5) It can be a deeper layer for the above (program generation process is saved as an ideal file, and the above can be dispersed. Also, the management of the establishment of the relevant program by using easy will display the content of the first and second editing lines, and for the paragraph (The production efficiency of the program production program produced by the program base. The editing equipment and recording medium, the above-mentioned program generation method) will be composed of the above-mentioned second editing means to make it visual on the editing day. The change is reasonable. When the control program is a ladder diagram, the steps of some programs are shown on the second editing day. This is based on the method of program generation), and the image block will be arranged in the first display. "As a part of the program on the second editing screen, the ladder provides an easy-to-understand visual operating environment. Therefore, the production efficiency of the control program is improved. Editing equipment and recording media, the above-mentioned program generation method) the above-mentioned part of the program will be generated in the form of individual files. In the past, the control program program was stored as the first-class part of the program. In addition to management, the file management of the control division can be simplified. XI structure structure 9 composite components and some programs will be integrated. Therefore, in addition to including the effective implementation of the control program to implement control, the first and the first 2 The affinity of the editing means (processing) is also improved, which will enable efficient development and control program development. This editing device and recording medium, the above-mentioned program generation and manual processing) treat the above-mentioned partial programs as the above Control subroutines, divide the subroutines, and store them separately. I_V 打 攀 丨!. Γ!

Ilillippipip_纏__隨 __國駿_隱______ 第28頁 541447 五、發明說明(25) 是合乎理想的。因為如此’於控制程序程式中反覆被使用 的部份程式,就算將其子程式化時,也可達到上述的分散 處理及簡易的檔案管理。因此,和上述的編輯設備相同, 控制程序程式的官埋效率化和顯不内容程式及控制程序程 式的開發效率化者可提高。 (6) 本發明的編輯設備,上述第1及第2編輯手段和將 為了構成上述控制程序程式的指令,預先讓其對應為了構 成上述顯示内容程式的影像區塊,依據上述第2編輯手段 所製作而成的包含對應上述控制程序程式指令的影像區塊 ,針對複數的指令進行抽出動作的抽出手段。 本發明的記錄媒介,則記錄了上述第1及第2編輯手 段和上述抽出手段和經由電腦各別執行過後,第1編輯處 理及第2編輯處理和抽出處理之編輯程式。 又,本發明的其他記錄媒介,則記錄了包含上述第1 或者是第2編輯處理的任何一方和上述抽出處理之編輯程 式。依據這個記錄媒介,包含了第1或者是第2編輯處理 的任何一方和抽出處理的2種類編輯程式,也就是說可以 提供第1或者是第2編輯程式。 上述之構成5依據抽出手段(抽出處理)將所製作而 成的控制程序程式中所包含對應指令的影像區塊抽出,因 此,可運用該影像區塊製作對應指令的顯示内容程式◦又_ ,影像區塊可針對數個複數指令進行抽出作業,因此可提 高處理效率。 對於上述編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述抽出手段(抽出Ilillippipip_ 缠 __ 随 _Guojun_Hidden______ page 28 541447 V. Description of the invention (25) is ideal. Because of this, some of the programs used repeatedly in the control program can achieve the above-mentioned decentralized processing and simple file management even when they are subprogrammed. Therefore, as with the above-mentioned editing equipment, the efficiency of the embedded control program and the development of the display program and the control program can be improved. (6) In the editing device of the present invention, the first and second editing means and the instructions for constituting the control program program are made to correspond in advance to image blocks constituting the display content program according to the second editing means. An extraction method is provided which includes an image block corresponding to the control program program instruction and performs an extraction operation on a plurality of instructions. In the recording medium of the present invention, the first and second editing means, the above-mentioned extraction means, and the respective editing programs for the first editing process and the second editing process and the extraction process are executed by a computer. In another recording medium of the present invention, an editing program including any one of the first or second editing process and the extraction process is recorded. According to this recording medium, either one of the first or the second editing process and two types of editing processes of the extraction process are included, that is, the first or the second editing process can be provided. The above-mentioned structure 5 extracts the image block of the corresponding command included in the control program program produced according to the extraction means (extraction processing). Therefore, the image block of the corresponding command can be created by using the image block. The image block can be extracted for several plural instructions, so the processing efficiency can be improved. For the editing device and recording medium, the extraction means (extraction

第29頁 541447 五、發明說明(26) 處理)將所抽出之影像區塊用上述顯示内容程式的1個畫 面單位登錄是較合乎理想。運用被登錄第1晝面的影像區 塊,不用意識到一個晝面份的顯示内容程式對應控制程序 程式的那一個部份,就可製作顯示内容程式。因此,可提 升顯示内容程式的製作效率。 且,對於這個編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述抽出手段( 抽出處理)將針對包括單一的上述控制程序程式的影像區 塊抽出是合乎理想的。這個樣子,將影像區塊總括起來抽 出,將可縮短抽出處理所須要的時間,有效率的進行處理 作業。Page 29 541447 V. Description of the invention (26) Processing) It is more desirable to register the extracted image block with one screen unit of the above display content program. By using the image area registered on the first day surface, it is possible to create a display content program without being aware of which part of the display content program corresponds to the control program program. Therefore, the production efficiency of the display content program can be improved. Moreover, for this editing device and recording medium, the above-mentioned extraction means (extraction processing) is ideal for extracting image blocks including a single above-mentioned control program. In this way, the image blocks are extracted and extracted, which can shorten the time required for extraction processing and efficiently perform processing operations.

或者是5對於前述的編輯設備及記錄媒介,上述抽出 手段(抽出處理)將關於上述指令的屬性情報,與影像區 塊合併抽出較合乎理想。因為如此,即可節省重覆輸入屬 性資料的勞動時間,並達到刪減作業時間之目的。 本發明的其他目的、特徵及優點,可從下列所記載的 内容即可充份了解。又,本發明的好處,可參照所添附之 圖面中所說明即可充份明白。 為使 貴審查委員瞭解本發明之目的、特徵及功效5 茲藉由下述具體之實施例,並配合所附之圖示,對本發明 做一詳細說明,說明如后:Or 5 For the aforementioned editing device and recording medium, the extraction means (extraction processing) combines the attribute information about the instruction with the image block and extracts it. Because of this, the labor time of repeatedly entering the attribute data can be saved, and the purpose of reducing the operation time can be achieved. Other objects, features, and advantages of the present invention can be fully understood from the contents described below. Further, the advantages of the present invention can be fully understood by referring to the description in the attached drawings. In order to make your reviewing committee understand the purpose, features, and effects of the present invention, the following specific embodiments and the accompanying drawings will be used to describe the present invention in detail, as described below:

[執行本發明的最好型態】 【實施型態1】 關於本發明的一個實施型態,如依據圖1至圖2 1為基 準進行說明時5其内容如下:[The best mode for carrying out the present invention] [Implementation mode 1] Regarding an embodiment of the invention, as shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 21 as a reference, 5 its content is as follows:

第30頁 541447 五、發明說明(27) 與本實施型態相關之顯示/控制系統,有各式各樣的 構成方式可以考慮,在此,針對第1至第3的構成進行說 明。 首先,圖1所表示之第1的顯示/控制系統包含了可程 式顯示器1及可程式控制器2。 作為顯示功能部的可程式顯示器1則具備了中央處理 器1 1 ( CP U )、記憶體部1 2、視訊隨機存取記憶體1 3 ( V R AM ) 、顯示器1 4 、影像控制器(g r a p h i c s c〇n t r〇1 1 e r ) 1 5 、 觸碰式面板1 6 (t o u c h p a n e 1 )、觸碰板控制器1 7 (t o u c h panel controller)、系隹修、淳18 ( maintenance port )及 通訊控制器1 9。記憶體部1 2為包含動態隨機存取記憶體 1 2a( DRAM)、快問式可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體(EEPR0M F 1 a s h E r a s a b 1 e a n d P r 〇 g r a m m a b 1 e ) 1 2 b 等的記憶體。動 態隨機存取記憶體12a(DRAM)其主要是運用於顯示控制等 的演算處理時之作業,此外,可運用於和可程式控制器2 之間進行資料處理時的資料暫存區。抉閃式可抹除可程式 化唯讀記憶體(EEPROM ) 12b為可將内容重寫的唯讀記憶 體,實現如一般個人電腦中的硬碟趨動(H a r d D i s k Driver)之任務。快閃記憶體(Flash Memory)並無可動 部,因此耐衝擊,可在惡劣的周圍環境下也可穩定的進行 其功能運作。 · 又,上述的快閃式可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體 (E E P R 0 Μ ) 1 2 b如圖2所表示的,顯示控制系統程式和通 訊協定和使用者晝面(晝面資料)間各有個別的儲存區Page 30 541447 V. Description of the invention (27) Various display methods can be considered for the display / control system related to this embodiment. Here, the first to third configurations will be described. First, the first display / control system shown in FIG. 1 includes a programmable display 1 and a programmable controller 2. The programmable display 1 as a display function section includes a central processing unit 1 (CP U), a memory unit 1 2, a video random access memory 1 3 (VR AM), a display 1 4 and an image controller (graphicsc 〇ntr〇1 1 er) 1 5 、 touch panel 16 (touchpane 1), touch panel controller 17 (touch panel controller), system repair, Chun 18 (maintenance port) and communication controller 1 9 . The memory section 12 is a dynamic random access memory 12a (DRAM), a quick erasable and programmable read-only memory (EEPR0M F 1 ash E rasab 1 eand P r 0grammab 1 e) 1 2 b and other memory. The dynamic random access memory 12a (DRAM) is mainly used for operations during calculation processing such as display control, etc. In addition, it can be used as a data temporary storage area for data processing with the programmable controller 2. The flash-type erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) 12b is a read-only memory that can rewrite the content, realizing the task of a hard disk drive (H a d D s k Driver) in a general personal computer. Flash memory has no moving parts, so it is impact resistant and can perform its functions stably in harsh surroundings. · Also, the above-mentioned flash-type erasable and programmable read-only memory (EEPR 0 Μ) 1 2 b, as shown in FIG. 2, shows the control system program and communication protocol and the user's day (day and day data) Separate storage area

第31頁 541447 五、發明說明(28) 域。顯示控制系統程式是為了進行畫面顯示控制而實現基 本功能的程式。通訊協定是與可程式控制器2之間的通訊 處理所運用之協定,順應可程式控制器2的種類(廠商) 有制定固定的通訊協定。使用者晝面為依據後述的畫面編 輯器3 2 b所被製成,並下載至快閃式可抹除可程式化唯讀 記憶體(E E P R Ο Μ ) 1 2 b。這個使用者畫面包含了作為應顯 示於顯示器14的基本畫面和影像區塊(顯示符號)的圖示 的資料及賦予各個圖示之後述處理指令W (參照圖3 )等, 因而構成顯示内容程式。 上述的觸碰開關、燈、各種顯示器等圖示,將其當作 被影像化的基本元件預先準備。又,為了讓其開關和數值p 顯示器等的動態變化圖示可在晝面上的任意位置顯現,則 包含了在希望的任置中設定之方形區域上設定所想要的動 晝功能的動畫功能部(也就是所謂的標籤)。如圖3所 示,包含於畫面資料的處理指令W,則是依照基本晝面上 所必須被執行的各個事件而個別的被製作。這個處理指令 W基本來說,將應該執行顯示控制動作基本晝面的檔案號 碼F和在這個基本晝面上所必須被執行的特定動作内容的 事件名稱T和執行每個事件所被參照1或者是複數的資料所 構成之參照情報I組合並準備。 中央處理器11為,依據儲存於前述快閃式可抹除可程0 式化唯讀記憶體(EEPR0M)12b中的顯示控制系統程式來 控制可程式顯示器1的各個部份之動作。又中央處理器Π 介由後述維修埠1 8具有可控制和後述之電腦裝置3間的通Page 31 541447 V. Description of Invention (28) Domain. The display control system program is a program that implements basic functions for screen display control. The communication protocol is a protocol used for communication processing with the programmable controller 2. According to the type (manufacturer) of the programmable controller 2, a fixed communication protocol is established. The user's daylight is made based on the screen editor 3 2 b described later, and downloaded to the flash-type erasable programmable read-only memory (E E P R Ο Μ) 1 2 b. This user screen includes data as icons to be displayed on the basic screen and image block (display symbol) of the display 14 and processing instructions W (refer to FIG. 3) described later, which are given to each icon, and thus constitute a display content program. . The above-mentioned illustrations of touch switches, lamps, and various displays are prepared in advance as the basic elements to be imaged. In addition, in order to make the dynamic change icons such as the switch and the value p display appear at any position on the day, it includes an animation to set the desired day and night function in the square area set in the desired place. Functional department (also called label). As shown in FIG. 3, the processing instructions W included in the screen data are individually produced in accordance with various events that must be executed on the basic day. Basically, this processing instruction W will display the file number F of the basic day plane of the control action, the event name T of the specific action content that must be performed on this basic day plane, and the reference 1 or the execution of each event. It is a combination of reference information made up of plural data and prepared. The central processing unit 11 controls the operations of each part of the programmable display 1 according to the display control system program stored in the flash-type erasable and programmable 0-only read-only memory (EEPR0M) 12b. The central processing unit Π has controllable communication with the computer device 3 described later through the maintenance port 18 described later.

第32頁 541447 五、發明說明(29) , 訊之功能。一旦從畫面編輯器3 2 b接收到晝面資料後將其 儲存至快閃式可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體(E E P R Ο Μ ) 1 2 b 中,或者是將從階梯編輯器3 2 a接收到作為控制程序程式 的階梯程式(使用者程式)後將其傳送至可程式控制器 視訊隨機存取記憶體1 3 ( VRAM )為,將顯示於顯示 器14之畫面暫時保持之記憶體,從快閃式可抹除可程式化 唯讀記憶體(EEPROM ) 1 2b所傳送到之晝面,採用水平方 向顯示的順序將其當作像素資料儲存。 顯示器1 4為依據液晶板和邊緣發光板(E d g e - 1 i g h t e d panel )等的平板型顯示元件所構成。影像控制器15是將 展開於視訊隨機存取記憶體1 3 ( VRAM )的晝面圖案繪製於 顯示器1 4的趨動軟體。觸碰式面板1 6是為了在顯示器1 4 的顯示晝面上進行輸入作業而被設置,類比抵抗膜式的觸 碰式面板較合適。觸碰式面板控制器1 7是將觸碰式面板1 6 的輸出電壓變換至輸入位置情報並輸出至中央處理器1 1 。 維修埠18是為了和後述電腦裝置3之間進行通訊的通 訊槔。另一方面,通訊控制器1 9為介由通訊電纜(如R S -2 3 2 C )和勺程式控制器2之間的輸出入機4中有關控制 和監視等資料的傳送和控制抓取可程式控制器2的輸出資 料的介面。 作為控制功能部的可程式控制器2 ,因内藏中央處理 部,依照後述的控制功能程式,運用於階梯編輯器3 2 a所 被製成之使用者程式(階梯程式)所訂定之程序,控制輸Page 32 541447 V. Description of the invention (29), the function of communication. Once the day and night data is received from the screen editor 3 2 b, it is stored in the flashable erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPR Ο Μ) 1 2 b, or it will be from the ladder editor 3 2 a After receiving the ladder program (user program) as the control program program, it will be transmitted to the programmable controller video random access memory 1 3 (VRAM), which is the memory that temporarily displays the screen displayed on the display 14, From the flash-type erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) 1 2b to the daytime surface, it is stored as pixel data in the order of horizontal display. The display 14 is constituted by a flat-panel display element such as a liquid crystal panel and an edge-emitting panel (E d g e-1 i g h t e d panel). The image controller 15 is an actuation software which draws a daytime pattern developed in the video random access memory 1 3 (VRAM) on the display 14. The touch panel 16 is provided for performing input operations on the display day of the display 14 and is analogous to a film-type touch panel. The touch panel controller 17 converts the output voltage of the touch panel 16 to input position information and outputs it to the central processing unit 1 1. The maintenance port 18 is a communication port for communication with the computer device 3 described later. On the other hand, the communication controller 19 is used for transmission and control of data related to control and monitoring in the input / output machine 4 between the communication cable (such as RS-2 3 2 C) and the spoon program controller 2. Interface for outputting data from the program controller 2. The programmable controller 2 as the control function part, because the built-in central processing part is used in accordance with the control function program described later, and is applied to the program set by the user program (step program) made by the step editor 3 2 a Control loss

iiii ii fcgs.* u ri-------I__f l· h* Iiiii ii fcgs. * u ri ------- I__f l · h * I

in 1 ^1ϋ π .Surrey a —Kybmnti- #1¾¾¾ iiiin 1 ^ 1ϋ π .Surrey a —Kybmnti- # 1¾¾¾ iii

1 S—II 第33頁 541447 五、發明說明(30) 出入機器4的動作。 可程式控制器2内的記憶體因指定了其位址,因而將 其設定為字元裝置(word device)及位元裝置(bit device )的儲存位置可特別指定。將字元裝置(w o r d device )設定為針對輸出入資料像數值一般的文字資料, 另將位元裝置設定為針對開、關之狀態。藉此設定,只要 進入可程式控制器2内的任何的字元裝置或者是位元裝置 就可控制輸出入機器4,或是將與動作狀態相關之情報個 別取出。 可程式顯示器1 ,為上述的位元裝置或者是字元裝置1 S-II Page 33 541447 V. Description of the invention (30) The movement of the machine 4 in and out. Since the memory in the programmable controller 2 specifies its address, it can be specified as a storage location of a word device and a bit device. The character device (w or r d device) is set to the text data of ordinary input and output data like numerical values, and the bit device is set to the on or off state. With this setting, as long as it enters any character device or bit device in the programmable controller 2, it can control the input and output of the machine 4, or take out the information related to the operation status individually. Programmable display 1 is the above-mentioned bit device or character device

所表示的狀態情報當中,將必要的情報適時的讀取至記憶 體部1 2。另一方面,重覆讀出上述的處理指令W,運用各 個處理指令W的事件名稱T,將特定内容的動作一面參照 可程式控制器2方面的狀態情報一面執行。因為如此,可 順應著位元裝置或是字元裝置的狀態變化,變化其執行顯 示動作。 可程式顯示器1的顯示動作為依照圖4所表示之流程 圖的程序進行。Among the displayed status information, necessary information is read into the memory section 12 in a timely manner. On the other hand, the above-mentioned processing instruction W is repeatedly read, and the event name T of each processing instruction W is used to execute an operation of a specific content while referring to the status information on the programmable controller 2. Because of this, the display operation can be performed in accordance with the state change of the bit device or the character device. The display operation of the programmable display 1 is performed in accordance with the procedure of the flowchart shown in FIG. 4.

首先,先選擇可與執行控制著輸出入機器4的可程式 控制器2通訊之線上模式,或者是只讓可程式顯示器1進 行動作之離線模式的任何一方(S1)。選擇離線模式時 (NO),於可程式顯示器1中進行設定處理、診斷處理等 的各種處理(S6),接著將處理返回至S1。 於S1中選擇線上模式時(YES),作為起動處理,設First, select either the online mode that can communicate with the programmable controller 2 that controls the input / output machine 4 or the offline mode that only allows the programmable display 1 to operate (S1). When the offline mode is selected (NO), various processes such as setting processing and diagnostic processing are performed on the programmable display 1 (S6), and then the processing returns to S1. When the online mode is selected in S1 (YES), as the startup process, set

第34頁 541447 五、發明說明(31) 定於可程式顯示器1的記憶體部12的前述處理指令W中 所被引用的可程式控制器2方面的狀態情報,將被可程式 顯示器1方面所取出。具體來說,儲存於記憶體部12的處 理指令W之中,可從包含於與現在所顯示的基本畫面有關 的處理指令W的情報,將可程式控制器2所設定的字元裝 置及位元裝置的位址抽出。接著,依據那個位址可以直接 進入可程式控制器2的記憶體,位址被指定的狀態情報展 開於記憶體部12當中,顯示於操作面板晝面上。對於線上 模式來說,判斷是否有依照顯示於可程式顯示器1之操作 面板晝面進行輸入操作(S2)。在此,如有進行輸入操作 時,依照所被輸入的資料執行所規定之演算處理(S 3 ), 再進行資料通訊處理(S 4 )。 隨後5執行各個事件的顯示處理(S 5 )。這個時候, 儲存於記憶體部1 2的處理指令W之中,依據通訊處理所 被抽1¾之狀態情報進行顯示動作。 接者’針對電腦裝置3進行說明。 如圖1所衣示^電腦裝置3為個人電腦等的應用%腦 所構成◦這個電腦裝置3具備了中央處理器3 1 、編輯部3 2 '資料檔案3 3、記憶體部3 4、顯示器3 5、輸入裝置3 6、 外部記憶裝置3 7及界面部(圖中、I / F ) 3 8。 中央處理器31是執行安裝於電腦裝置3之操作系統 (0 S )上包含編輯部3 2等各種的套裝軟體,其進行操作 動作時各部的控制和演算處理。 記憶體部3 4具備了隨機存取記憶體(RAM )、唯讀記Page 34 541447 V. Description of the invention (31) Status information of the programmable controller 2 referred to in the aforementioned processing instruction W of the memory section 12 of the programmable display 1 will be used by the programmable display 1 take out. Specifically, the processing instruction W stored in the memory section 12 can be used to set the character device and bit set by the programmable controller 2 from information included in the processing instruction W related to the basic screen currently displayed. The address of the meta device is extracted. Then, according to that address, the memory of the programmable controller 2 can be directly entered, and the designated status information of the address is displayed in the memory section 12 and displayed on the day of the operation panel. For the online mode, it is judged whether or not an input operation is performed in accordance with the operation panel displayed on the programmable display 1 (S2). Here, if there is an input operation, the specified calculation processing (S 3) is performed according to the inputted data, and then the data communication processing (S 4) is performed. Subsequently, the display processing of each event is performed (S5). At this time, it is stored in the processing instruction W of the memory unit 12 and performs a display operation in accordance with the status information extracted by the communication processing unit 12a. The receiver 'will be described with respect to the computer device 3. As shown in Figure 1, the computer device 3 is composed of applications such as personal computers. This computer device 3 is equipped with a central processing unit 3 1, an editing unit 3 2 'data file 3 3, a memory unit 3 4, and a display. 3 5. Input device 3 6. External memory device 37 and interface section (picture, I / F) 38. The central processing unit 31 executes various software packages including an editing unit 32 and other operating systems (OS) installed on the computer device 3, and performs control and calculation processing of each unit during operation operations. Memory section 34 is equipped with random access memory (RAM), read-only memory

第35頁 541447 五、發明說明(32) 憶體(ROM )等的記憶體,其主要是實現固定資料的儲存 ,暫時的資料記憶,提供中央處理器3 1在演算處理時之作 業區域等任務。 編輯部32則包含了階梯編輯器32a、畫面編輯器32b、 套裝軟體32c及複製功能部32d。 作為第2編輯手段的階梯編輯器3 2 a,其構成是為了 讓輸出入機器4依據所希望的程序·進行動作,而制訂可程 式控制器2的控制程序之使用者程式製作的程式設計軟體 。也可讓顯示器3 5的顯示晝面3 5 a (參照圖1 5 ( a ))上, 對應輸出入機器4的動作而配置階梯記號(符號及控制符 號)並製成為階梯圖。對於這個階梯編輯器3 2 a舉例來說 ,可運用前述符合國際標準國際電氣技術標準會議(IEC )之程式語言。 又,階梯編輯3 2 a將賦予可程式控制器2的各個輸入 端子及輸出端子的輸入號碼和輸出號碼,和連結著各個輸 出入端子的輸出入機器4之間的建立其對應,藉由代表著 輸出入機器4的名稱(裝置名)等的變數進行輸出入號碼 的分配。將此分配的結果,儲存於後述之階梯檔案3 3 a。 進行上述分配時,記憶體部3 4將輸入號碼和輸出號碼 當作各別的位址,對應各別的位址之裝置名稱儲存於内部 。從前,這樣的分配,依據可程式控制器廠商的不同也就 不同,因絕對位址被設定,對應所搭配的廠商就必須要準 備記憶體目錄(Memory Table)。但是以國際電氣技術標準 會議(IEC)為標準的本階梯編輯器32a為,依據上述之變Page 35 541447 V. Description of the invention (32) Memory such as memory (ROM), which mainly realizes the storage of fixed data, temporary data storage, and provides tasks such as the processing area of the central processing unit 31 during calculation processing. . The editing section 32 includes a step editor 32a, a screen editor 32b, a software package 32c, and a copy function section 32d. The step editor 3 2 a as the second editing means is structured to create programming software created by a user program for the control program of the programmable controller 2 for the input / output machine 4 to operate in accordance with a desired program. . It is also possible to arrange step symbols (symbols and control symbols) on the display day surface 3 5 a (see FIG. 15 (a)) of the display 35 in accordance with the operation of the input / output device 4 and create a step diagram. For this step editor 3 2 a, for example, the aforementioned programming language conforming to the international standard International Electrical Technology Standards Conference (IEC) can be used. In addition, the step editing 3 2 a establishes a correspondence between the input number and output number given to each input terminal and output terminal of the programmable controller 2 and the input / output device 4 connected to each input / output terminal. The input / output number is assigned based on variables such as the name (device name) of the input / output device 4. The result of this allocation is stored in a ladder file 3 3 a described later. When performing the above allocation, the memory section 34 treats the input number and output number as separate addresses, and the device name corresponding to each address is stored internally. In the past, this allocation was different depending on the manufacturer of the programmable controller. Since the absolute address was set, it was necessary to prepare a memory table corresponding to the manufacturer. However, this ladder editor 32a based on the International Electrotechnical Standards Conference (IEC) is based on the above-mentioned changes.

第36頁 541447 五、發明說明(33) 數(自由變數),使用者可自行決定輸出入,因此像上述 的記憶體目錄(Memory Table)是不需要的。又,一旦決定 分配後5往後還是可以再變更。 運用階梯編輯器32a所製作而成之使用者程式,藉由 (或是直接)可程式顯示器1傳送至可程式控製器2,可 下載至可程式控制器的記憶體當中。Page 36 541447 V. Description of the invention (33) The number (free variable) can be determined by the user. Therefore, a memory table like the above is unnecessary. In addition, once the allocation is decided, it can be changed 5 times later. The user program made by using the ladder editor 32a is transmitted to the programmable controller 2 (or directly) by the programmable display 1 and can be downloaded into the memory of the programmable controller.

作為第1編輯手段的晝面編輯器32b,是讓可程式顯 示器1具備為了管理輸出入機器4的稼動狀況和作業指示 等,於各種螢幕、機器上進行輸入設定值和作業指示等的 輸入端功能,將其製作成晝面顯示於顯示器14之畫面製作 軟體。一般來說,晝面編輯器32b具備了可以製作使用者 獨有的晝面(使用者畫面)、開關、燈、數值鍵、各種顯 示器(如數值顯示器、碼表顯示器及圖表顯示器)等的元 件(圖示),繪製功能、數值輸入功能等。作為元件,並 不是只有單一功能之單一元件,可準備具有複數之功能。 複合開關、計數器、計時器等的複合元件。這樣的複合元 件和單一元件相同,依據進行拖良和拖放等之操作時,可 配置於基本晝面上所希望之位置,並將其採用圖書館方式 I 進行登錄作業。又,畫面編輯器32b將針對配置於所製成 之畫面中之圖示的各個輸出入機器4,進行將前述的輸出 入號碼(位址)藉由前述之變數進行分配作業。 依照上述的晝面編輯器321〕所製作而成的使用者畫面 5儲存於後述的晝面檔案3 3 b中,順應必要時,將藉由界 面部38傳送至可程示顯示器1 ,並將其當作畫面檔案下載The daytime editor 32b as the first editing means is provided with the programmable display 1 with input terminals for inputting set values, work instructions, etc. on various screens and devices in order to manage the operating status and work instructions of the input / output device 4. Function to make it into screen creation software for daytime display on the display 14. Generally, the daytime editor 32b is provided with components that can create the user's unique daytime display (user screen), switches, lights, numeric keys, various displays (such as numeric display, stopwatch display, and chart display). (Illustration), drawing function, numerical input function, etc. As a component, it is not a single component with only a single function, but multiple functions can be prepared. Composite components such as composite switches, counters, and timers. Such a composite element is the same as a single element, and can be placed at a desired position on the basic daytime surface during operations such as dragging and dragging, and it can be registered using Library Method I. In addition, the screen editor 32b assigns the aforementioned input / output number (address) to each of the input / output devices 4 illustrated in the created screen by using the aforementioned variables. The user screen 5 created in accordance with the above-mentioned daytime editor 321] is stored in a daytime file 3 3 b described later, and if necessary, will be transmitted to the programmable display 1 through the interface unit 38, and Download it as a screen file

第37頁 541447 五、發明說明(34) 至快閃式可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體(EEPROM) 12b中。 套裝軟體32c,主要是一般廣泛被應用之套裝軟體, 可以進行階梯編輯器32a及晝面編輯器32b之間的互動並 依據產生屬性資料的軟體所構成。對於其軟體來說,可以 舉例如表格計算程式軟體和設計回路等的電腦輔助設計 (C A D )軟體等。P.37 541447 V. Description of the invention (34) To the flash-type erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) 12b. The package software 32c is mainly a widely used package software, and can be composed of software that can perform interaction between the step editor 32a and the daytime editor 32b and generate attribute data. For its software, computer aided design (C A D) software such as spreadsheet software and design circuits can be cited.

作為資料複製手段的複製功能部32d,利用操作系統 (0S)的資料複製功能,於運用晝面編輯器32b所製成之 畫面上,除了自動產生(繪製)針對運用階梯編輯器32a 所製成之階梯圖所對應的階梯記號之圖示以外,將該階梯 記號的屬性資料當作圖示的屬性資料進行複製動作。又, 複製功能部32d也同樣的利用操作系統(0S )的資料複製 功能,於運用階梯編輯器3 2 a所製作而成的階梯圖,除了 自動產生(繪製)針對運用畫面編輯器32b所製成之晝面 所對應的階梯記號之圖示以外,將該圖示的屬性資料當作 階梯記號的屬性資料進行複製動作。 具體來說,屬性資料的複製可利用設置於記憶體部3 4 之後述的剪貼薄CB (Clipboard)(參照圖16及圖18), 藉此可進行拖良和拖放或者是複製和貼上的功能。 儲存於剪貼薄CB中之資料構造如圖5 (a)所表示的The copy function section 32d as a data copying means utilizes the data copying function of the operating system (OS) on the screen made using the daytime editor 32b, in addition to automatically generating (drawing) the screen created using the step editor 32a Except for the icon of the ladder symbol corresponding to the ladder diagram, the attribute data of the ladder symbol is copied as the attribute data of the icon. In addition, the copy function unit 32d also utilizes the data copy function of the operating system (OS). The ladder diagram created by using the ladder editor 3 2a is automatically generated (drawn) for the screen editor 32b. In addition to the illustration of the step symbol corresponding to the Cheng day surface, the attribute data of the icon is copied as the attribute data of the step symbol. Specifically, the attribute data can be copied by using a clipboard CB (Clipboard) (see FIG. 16 and FIG. 18) described later in the memory section 3 4, so that dragging and dropping or copying and pasting can be performed. Features. The structure of the data stored in the scrapbook CB is shown in Figure 5 (a)

抬頭編號(header code )、記憶體大小、物件型態、預 約、位址情報數量、位址情報(1〜N )及因予約而所構 成。在這之中,所謂的記憶體大小就是將資料儲存於剪貼 薄CB中所須要之記憶體容量。物件型態則是將元件儲存於Header code (header code), memory size, object type, appointment, number of address information, address information (1 to N), and the result of the appointment. Among them, the so-called memory size is the memory capacity required to store data in the clipboard CB. Object types store components in

第38頁 541447 五、發明說明(35) 剪貼薄CB時對其預先設定物件種類。這個物件型態其設定 有如圖5 (b)所表示的位元開關、跳動式開關、燈、數值 顯示器、柱狀圖表、圓形圖表、半圓形圖表、圓柱形圖 表、計數圖表及設定值顯示器等◦位址情報則由如圖5 (c )所表示的位址(位址名稱)、予約、位址附帶情報、予 約、物件型態及依據予约所構成◦位址附帶情報則是有關 符號的種類(整數符號、描述符號)之情報。對於在位址 情報的物件型態須與和上述的物件型態内容相同,並指定 那一個位址對應那一個元件,因為如此只要必要之元件的 位元將開啟。 且,上述的複製功能部3 2 d可當作一個功能包含於階 ® 梯編輯器3 2 a或者是晝面編輯器3 2 b的任何一方。 電腦裝置3因為具備了編輯部3 2,因此可執行使用者 程式及使用者畫面的製作及編修的編輯設備之功能。又, 編輯部3 2對於後述的各個實施型態中雖有部份不同的功 能,但為了方便性上,對於各個實施型態中相同的符號進 行附註說明。 可將編輯部3 2當作套裝軟體(p a c k a g e s 〇 f t w a r e )或 者是特別訂做軟體(〇 r d e r m a d e s o f t w a r e ),採用程式 媒介的型態提供給使用者之軟體5舉例來說,可記錄於電 腦裝置3和可分離式的記錄媒介5中。接著,編輯部3 2從記φ 錄媒介5安裝至電腦裝置3之中,因此可發揮編輯功能。對 於後述的各個實施型態來說,編輯部3 2也都是相同軟體所 構成。P.38 541447 V. Description of the invention (35) Set the type of objects in advance when scrapping the CB. This object type is set with bit switches, jump switches, lights, numerical displays, bar charts, circular charts, semi-circular charts, cylindrical charts, counting charts and set values as shown in Figure 5 (b). The display information is composed of the address (name of the address), the appointment, the address attached information, the appointment, the type of the object, and the agreement as shown in Figure 5 (c). The address attached information is Information on the types of symbols (integer symbols, descriptive symbols). The object type of the information at the address must be the same as the content type of the above object, and specify which address corresponds to which component, because only the bits of the necessary components will be turned on. In addition, the above-mentioned copy function section 3 2 d may be included as a function in either the step ® ladder editor 3 2 a or the day-and-day editor 3 2 b. Since the computer device 3 has the editing section 32, it can function as an editing device that can create and edit user programs and user screens. In addition, although the editing section 32 has different functions for each of the implementation modes described later, for convenience, the same symbols in each implementation mode are annotated. The editing department 32 can be regarded as package software (packages ftft) or special customized software (〇rdermadesoftware), which is provided to the user in the form of a program medium. Detachable recording medium 5. Then, the editing unit 32 is installed in the computer device 3 from the recording medium 5 so that it can perform an editing function. For each embodiment described later, the editing section 32 is also composed of the same software.

第39頁 541447 五、發明說明(36) 且,編輯部3 2可以記錄於單一的記錄媒介5當中,但 也可以記錄於階梯編輯器3 2 a和畫面編輯器3 2 b的各別的 記錄媒介當中。 上述的程式媒介,所適用的如磁帶和卡帶等的帶狀 式,軟碟和硬碟等的磁盤式,光盤唯讀記憶體(CD-ROM ) 、可讀寫的磁光碟(M0)、磁碟(MD)、多樣化數位光碟 (DVD )、等的光碟式,集體電路卡(I C卡)(包含記憶 體卡(Memory Card))、光學卡等的卡片式。另外,上 述的程式媒介也可以用唯讀記憶體(MASKR0M)、可抹除 可程式化唯讀記憶體(EPROM )、電子式可抹除可程式化 唯讀記憶體(EEPR0M )、快閃式可讀寫記憶體(FLASHR0M )等内包固定程式之半導體系記憶體。 又,電腦裝置3可連結包含網際網路等的通訊電腦網 路,可由通訊電腦網路下載程式可即時保有程式的記錄媒 介。但是,如採用通訊電腦網路來下載程式時,其該進行 下載之軟體須預先儲存於電腦裝置3中,或者是由別的記 錄媒介所安裝之軟體。 貢料彳當茶3 3則包含了階梯貢料3 3 a、畫面核条3 3 b及 應用軟體檔案33c。 作為控制程序程式檔案的階梯檔案3 3 a,如圖6所表 示的是由命令檔案部3 3 a 1及屬性資料檔案部3 3 a 2所構成 。命令檔案部3 3 a 1是將對應被輸入之階梯記號的函數(階 梯指令)及運算值進行儲存。而屬性資料檔案部3 3a 2則是 對應命令檔案部3 3 a 1 ,將有關於所輸入之階梯指令裝置的P.39 541447 V. Description of the invention (36) The editing unit 32 can be recorded in a single recording medium 5, but can also be recorded in separate records of the step editor 3 2a and the screen editor 3 2 b. Among the media. The above-mentioned program medium is applicable to a tape type such as a magnetic tape and a cassette, a magnetic disk type such as a floppy disk and a hard disk, a CD-ROM, a readable and writable magneto-optical disk (M0), a magnetic disk Compact disc type (MD), digital versatile disc (DVD), etc., card type of collective circuit card (IC card) (including memory card), optical card, etc. In addition, the above program medium can also use read-only memory (MASKR0M), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electronic erasable programmable ROM (EEPR0M), flash-type Read-write memory (FLASHR0M) and other semiconductor-based memory with fixed programs. In addition, the computer device 3 can be connected to a communication computer network including the Internet, and the program can be downloaded from the communication computer network, and the recording medium of the program can be stored in real time. However, if a communication computer network is used to download the program, the software to be downloaded must be stored in the computer device 3 in advance, or the software installed by another recording medium. The tribute tea 3 3 contains the step tribute 3 3 a, the picture core 3 3 b, and the application software file 33c. The step file 3 3 a, which is a control program program file, is composed of a command file section 3 3 a 1 and an attribute data file section 3 3 a 2 as shown in FIG. 6. The command file section 3 3 a 1 stores a function (step instruction) and an operation value corresponding to the input ladder mark. The attribute data file section 3 3a 2 corresponds to the command file section 3 3 a 1 and will have information on the entered step instruction device.

第40頁 541447 五、發明說明(37) 名稱及位址進行儲存。 作為顯示内容程式檔案的晝面檔案33b,如圖6所表 示的是由圖形資料擋案部3 3 b 1及屬性資料檔案部3 3 b 2所 構成。圖形貢料4當系部3 3 ο 1是將關於所輸入之圖不的圖形 資料進行儲存,而屬性資料檔案部3 3 b 2則是對應圖形資料 檔案部33bl ,將有關於所輸入之圖示的裝置名稱及位址進 行儲存。 階梯檔案33a及畫面檔案33b是依據屬性資料檔案部 3 3 a 2、3 3 b 2而相互建立關聯性,因此對於第1至第3的顯 示/控制系統之顯示動作及控制動作具有互相之關聯性。 應用軟體檔案3 3 c是將運用應用軟體3 2 c所製作而成 ® 的資料,和上述的屬性資料檔案部3 3 a 2、3 3 b 2的屬性資料 所建立之關聯性的屬性資料進行儲存。 顯示器3 5雖是由印像管螢幕(C RT )、液晶螢幕(L C D ) 等所構成,但是對於面板式電腦的電腦裝置3來說,都是 像液晶面板和邊緣發光板(E d g e - 1 i g h t e d p a n e 1 )等的平 '板型顯示元件所構成。輸入裝置3 6是為了進行輸入操作的 鍵盤、滑鼠等裝置,特別是對於在圖形使用者界面GUI (G r a ρ h i c a 1 U s e r I n t e r f a c e )的環境上進行操作的編輯 部3 2的輸入作業來說,滑鼠等裝置是較合適的。外部記憶 裝置37則是包含了硬碟裝置等的磁盤式設備,光盤唯讀記0 憶體(CD-ROM)設備等的光碟式設備,最少也必須是可讀 出記錄於前述記錄媒介5中,程式等的情報之裝置。界面 部3 8為與可程式顯示器1之間所進行資料通訊的輸出入Page 40 541447 V. Description of the invention (37) Name and address are stored. The daytime file 33b as the display content program file is composed of a graphic data archive section 3 3 b 1 and an attribute data file section 3 3 b 2 as shown in FIG. 6. The graphic material 4 is the department 3 3 ο 1 which stores the graphic data about the input map, and the attribute data file section 3 3 b 2 is the corresponding graphic data file section 33bl. The device name and address shown below are stored. The ladder file 33a and the screen file 33b are related to each other according to the attribute data file section 3 3 a 2, 3 3 b 2, and therefore, the display actions and control actions of the first to third display / control systems are related to each other. Sex. Application software file 3 3 c is a combination of the data created by application software 3 2 c ® and the attribute data related to the attribute data file 3 3 a 2, 3 3 b 2 Save. Although the display 3 5 is composed of a tube display (C RT), a liquid crystal display (LCD), etc., the computer device 3 of the panel computer is like a liquid crystal panel and an edge-emitting panel (E dge-1 ightedpane 1) and other flat panel display elements. The input device 36 is a device such as a keyboard or a mouse for performing input operations, and in particular, an input operation performed by the editing unit 3 2 that operates in an environment of a graphical user interface GUI (Gra ρ hica 1 U ser I nterface). In terms of devices, a mouse and the like are more suitable. The external memory device 37 is a disk-type device including a hard disk device, and the optical disk-type device such as a CD-ROM (CD-ROM) device must be at least readable and recorded in the aforementioned recording medium 5 , Programs, and other information devices. Interface section 38 is the input and output of data communication with the programmable display 1.

第41頁 541447 五、發明說明(38) 。運用階梯編輯器32a所製作而成的使用者程式及晝面 編輯器32b所製作而成之使用者畫面,藉由該界面部38傳 送至可程式控制器1。 繼續針對第2的顯示/控制系統進行說明。 圖7所表示之第2的顯示/控制系統與前述之第1的顯 示/控制系統相同,雖包含了可程式顯示器1及可程式控制 器2 ,但是在這裏的可程式顯示1為具備了可程式控制器 之功能,其構成是可直接控制輸出入機器4。因為如此, 可程式顯示器1除了於記憶體部12具備了靜態隨機存儲器 (S R A Μ ) 1 2 c以外,並加入了前述的通訊控制器1 9和輸 出入裝置(圖中、I / 0裝置)2 0及輸入/輸出(I /〇)控制 界面2 1 。 靜態隨機存儲器(S R A Μ ) 1 2 c為具有儲存依據階梯編 輯器32 a所製作而成之使用者程式之儲存區域,及儲存依 據階梯編輯器32a所輸入之變數的儲存區域。又。快閃式 可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體(E EPROM) 12b為了具備可程 式控制器之功能,如圖8所表示,除了給予儲存顯示控制 系統程式和通訊協定和畫面資料等各別的儲存區域,也須 具有控制功能程式和使用者程式各別的儲存區域。控制功 式為貫現程序控制基本功能的程式。 輸出入裝置20是為了讓輸出入機器4可具有連結功 因此具備了多數的輸出入端子及輸出入回路等。輸入 輸出(I / 0 )控制界面2 1為中央處理器1 1和輸出入裝置2 0 I間的信號收發協調的界面品路,具有輸出入記憶體、P.41 541447 V. Description of Invention (38). The user program created by the step editor 32a and the user screen created by the daytime editor 32b are transmitted to the programmable controller 1 through the interface section 38. The description of the second display / control system is continued. The second display / control system shown in FIG. 7 is the same as the first display / control system described above. Although the programmable display 1 and the programmable controller 2 are included, the programmable display 1 here is provided with a programmable display 1. The function of the program controller is to directly control the input and output of the machine 4. Because of this, in addition to the static random access memory (SRA M) 1 2 c provided in the memory portion 12 of the programmable display 1, the aforementioned communication controller 19 and the input / output device (the I / 0 device) are added. 2 0 and input / output (I / 〇) control interface 2 1. The static random access memory (SR AM) 1 2c is a storage area having a user program made according to the step editor 32a, and a storage area storing variables input according to the step editor 32a. also. The flashable erasable programmable read-only memory (E EPROM) 12b has the function of a programmable controller, as shown in Figure 8, in addition to the storage of the display control system program and communication protocols and screen data. The storage area must also have separate storage areas for the control function program and the user program. The control function is a program that realizes the basic functions of the program control. The input / output device 20 is provided for the input / output device 4 to have a connection function, and therefore includes a large number of input / output terminals, input / output circuits, and the like. The input / output (I / 0) control interface 2 1 is a coordinated interface for signal transmission and reception between the central processing unit 1 1 and the input / output device 2 0 I. It has input / output memory,

第42頁 541447 五、發明說明(39) D/A變換器、A/D變換器。 再繼續針對第3的顯示/控制系統進行說明。 圖9所表示之第3的顯示/控制系統是運周軟體來進行 動作,也就是所謂的以開放式控制器(可程式控制器軟體 )作為中心所構成的。 開放式控制器是依據電腦裝置3所構成的,為了連結 輸出入機器4 ,則具備替於前述的第1的顯示/控制系統中 的電腦裝置3的界面部3 8之輸出入裝置(圖中、I / 0裝置) 39及輸入/輸出(I/O )控制界面40。 輸出入裝置3 9為了與輸出入機器4連結,具備了多數 的輸出入端子及輸出入回路等。這樣的輸出入裝置39通常 採用輸入/輸出(I / 0 )板方式裝置於電腦裝置3中,但是 也可以採用遙控操作輸入/輸出(I / 0 )方式獨立裝置於電 腦裝置外。 輸入/輸出(I / 0 )控制界面4 0為協調中央處理器3 1和 輸出入裝置39之間的信號收發之界面回路,且具備了輸出 入記憶體、D/A變換器、A/D變換器等。此輸入/輸出(I/O )控制界面40是將輸出入於輸出入機器4之間的數位信號 或者是類比信號與中央處理器進行處理。 又,電腦裝置3作為開放式控制器之功能,則具備了 界面裝置(圖中、I/F裝置)41 。界面裝置41為運用如乙 太網路(E t h e r n e t登錄商標)等廣泛被使用之通訊協定, 對應開放式電腦網路8的輸出入部且與其開放式電腦網路 連結。因為如此,電腦裝置3可藉由開放式電腦網路8與其Page 42 541447 V. Description of the invention (39) D / A converter, A / D converter. The description of the third display / control system will be continued. The third display / control system shown in FIG. 9 is operated by software, which is a so-called open controller (programmable controller software). The open controller is based on the computer device 3. In order to connect the input / output device 4, it is provided with an input / output device for the interface section 38 of the computer device 3 in the first display / control system (see the figure). , I / 0 device) 39 and input / output (I / O) control interface 40. The input / output device 39 is provided with a large number of input / output terminals, input / output circuits, and the like in order to be connected to the input / output device 4. Such an input / output device 39 is usually installed in the computer device 3 using an input / output (I / 0) board method, but it can also be independently installed outside the computer device by using a remote operation input / output (I / 0) method. The input / output (I / 0) control interface 40 is an interface circuit that coordinates the transmission and reception of signals between the central processing unit 31 and the input / output device 39, and is provided with an input / output memory, a D / A converter, and an A / D. Converter, etc. The input / output (I / O) control interface 40 processes digital signals or analog signals between the input / output device 4 and the central processing unit. The computer device 3 functions as an open controller and includes an interface device (I / F device in the figure) 41. The interface device 41 uses a widely used communication protocol such as Ethernet (registered trademark of Ethernet), and corresponds to the input / output section of the open computer network 8 and is connected to the open computer network. Because of this, the computer device 3 can communicate with it via the open computer network 8

第43頁 541447 五、發明說明(40) 它的電腦裝置、可程式顯顯示器、可程式控制器等連結。 記憶體部3 4和前述快閃式可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體 (EEPROM) 12b相同,如圖8所表示的具有各別儲存顯示 控制系統程式和通訊協定和使用者畫面和控制功能程式和 使用者程式之儲存區域。 由這樣所構成之電腦裝置3配備『輸出入機器4的目 標系統運轉時(連線狀態),將被製作而成的畫面和將現 場的情況顯示於顯示器3 5 ,因此,除了具有監視目標系統 的運轉狀況的監視螢幕功能以外,還可以於目標系統上進 行操控輸出入機器4。這時,電腦裝置3將依據運用階梯 編輯器32a所製作而成,且儲存於階梯檔案33a中的使用 ® 者程式來執行控制功能程式。另一方面,電腦裝置3於目 標系統在非運轉狀態時(離線狀態),起動階梯編輯器 3 2 a或者是畫面編輯器3 2 b則是開啟製作使用者程式或者是 使用者晝面的編輯設備的功能。 在此,於第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中,對於使用者 程式及使用者晝面的製作程序,參照圖10至圖14的流程 圖進行說明。 如圖10所表示的,是先製作使用者晝面(晝面製作) 還是先製作使用者程式(程式設計)須依據使用者的輸入 操作來作判斷(S11)。先製作使用者程式時,執行運用 · 階梯編輯器32a所進行的程式設計處理(1)之後(S12 ),執行運用畫面編輯器32b所進行的畫面製作處理(2) (S1 3 )。另一方面,則是先製作使用者晝面時,執行運 i 『/vaTIAriJV-r- ssl.ltp院扭:Page 43 541447 V. Description of the invention (40) Its computer device, programmable display, programmable controller and other links. The memory section 34 is the same as the flash-type erasable and programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) 12b, as shown in FIG. 8 and has separate storage display control system programs and communication protocols, and user screens and control functions. Program and user program storage area. The computer device 3 configured as described above is equipped with "the target system of the input / output device 4 is in operation (connected state), and the created screen and the situation on the site are displayed on the display 3 5. In addition to the monitoring screen function of the operating status, it is also possible to control the input / output of the machine 4 on the target system. At this time, the computer device 3 will execute the control function program according to the user program created by using the step editor 32a and stored in the step file 33a. On the other hand, when the computer system 3 is in a non-operating state (offline state), the step editor 3 2 a or the screen editor 3 2 b is started to create a user program or edit the user's daytime Function of the device. Here, in the first to third display / control systems, the user program and the user's day-time production program will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figs. 10 to 14. As shown in Fig. 10, whether to create the user's day surface (day surface production) or user program (programming) first must be determined based on the user's input operation (S11). When the user program is first produced, the programming processing (1) performed by the step editor 32a is executed (S12), and then the screen creation processing (2) by the screen editor 32b is executed (S1 3). On the other hand, when the user's daytime surface is first produced, the operation i "/vaTIAriJV-r-ssl.ltp:

Π —ϋ iii in iii in F.iurr...vv^rb_ iii ϋΗ ii.1Π —ϋ iii in iii in F.iurr ... vv ^ rb_ iii ϋΗ ii.1

ϋ ss uruy^nwunn in inϋ ss uruy ^ nwunn in in

1® 8S1 β:,ν' ίρ, 第44頁 541447 五、發明說明(41) 用晝面編輯器32b所進行的畫面製作處理(1)之後(S1 4 ),執行運用階梯編輯器3 2 a所進行的程式設計處理(2 ) (S15 )。 接著,將所製作而成的使用者程式及使周者晝面儲存 於可利用之特定儲存位置(S 1 6 )。這時的第1或者是第2 的顯示/控制系統,一旦使用者程式和使用者畫面儲存於 資料檔案3 3之後,將會各別被下載至可程式控制器2和可 程式顯示器1並儲存於記憶體部12中。或者是第2的顯示/ .控制系統,一旦使用者程式及使用者晝面儲存於資料檔案 33之後,將會被下載至可程式顯示器1並儲存於記憶體12 中。第3的顯示/控制系統,則是將使用者程式及使用者晝 面儲存於資料檀案3 3中。 尚且,上述之舉例主要是針對晝面製作或是程式設計 的其中之先執行後,再執行另外一方的程序進行說明,但 是不限於此,也是會有兩方同時進行執行的可能。此程序 及上述的程序,對於後述實施型態2及實施型態3也都是 相同。 先執行程式設計處理(1 )時,依照圖1 1的流程圖所 表示之程序。在此,於電腦裝置3中,階梯編輯器32a及 晝面編輯器32b已被起動,顯示器35的顯示部35a (參照 圖15 (a))上,則顯示使用者晝面製作用的編輯晝面 (第1編輯畫面)視窗(以下稱為晝面製作視窗)3 2 b 1及 顯示使用者程式製作用的編輯畫面(第2編輯畫面)視窗 (以下稱為階梯視窗)3 2 a 1同時被開啟之狀態。然而先執1® 8S1 β :, ν 'ίρ, p. 44 541447 V. Description of the invention (41) After the screen production process (1) using the daytime editor 32b (S1 4), execute the step editor 3 2 a Programming process (2) (S15). Then, the created user program and the weekly surface are stored in a usable specific storage location (S 1 6). At this time, the first or second display / control system, once the user program and user screen are stored in the data file 3 3, will be downloaded to the programmable controller 2 and the programmable display 1 and stored in Memory body 12 in. Or the second display / control system, once the user program and the user are stored in the data file 33 in the daytime, it will be downloaded to the programmable display 1 and stored in the memory 12. The third display / control system is to store the user program and the user in the data case 33. In addition, the above examples are mainly for the day-to-day production or program design, and then execute the other party's procedure, but it is not limited to this, there may be two parties to execute at the same time. This procedure and the procedure described above are also the same for the implementation mode 2 and the implementation mode 3 described later. When the programming process (1) is executed first, the procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11 is followed. Here, in the computer device 3, the step editor 32a and the daytime editor 32b have been activated, and the display portion 35a of the display 35 (see FIG. 15 (a)) displays the editing daytime for the user's daytime creation. Window (first editing screen) window (hereinafter referred to as daytime window) 3 2 b 1 and display of editing screen (second editing screen) window for user program creation (hereinafter referred to as step window) 3 2 a 1 The opened state. Preemptive

第45頁 541447 五 灯 器 像 的 暫 處 將 者 所 階 梯 如 面 有 實 話 全 數 記 發明說明(42) 程式設計處理(1 )時,最基本也必須要起動階梯編輯 3 2a。 首先,於階梯視窗3 2 a 1上,以各個輸出入機器4為對 進行階梯記號的配置並對其階梯指令的進行記述 2 1 )。接著輸入針對被記述之階梯指令的名稱、位址等 屬性資料(S 2 2 ),將階梯記號及屬性資料登錄於檔案 存區(S 2 3 )。之後,順應著使用者的操作判斷程式設計 24 在此,如並未完成時其處理流程 將所製作之使用 理是否完成i 返回至S 2 1 ,另一方面如果已完成時 程式登錄於階梯標案3 3 a中(S 2 5 )。 對於繼續執行的晝面製作(2),依照圖12之流程圖 表示之流程進行。 首先,預先將有關登錄於階梯檔案3 3 a的階梯記號( 梯指令)的屬性資料匯入至晝面檔案3 3 b ( S 3 1 )。判斷階 視窗3 2 a 1上的階梯記號是否有被滑鼠等拖曳(S 3 2 ), 被拖曳時5則判斷被拖曳的階梯記號是否有被拖放至畫 製作視窗3 2 b 1上(S 3 3 )。在此,如確認階梯記號確實 進行拖放,將依據包含於針對被拖良的階梯記號的屬性 料中之功能,顯示包含了具有此功能的複數的圖示的對 視窗D1 (參照圖1 5 ( c ) ) ( S34 )。 上述的程序中,對於運用階梯編輯器3 2 a所製作而成 數的階梯記號之屬性資料,預先在S 3 1的匯入步驟中全 一次複製到畫面檔案3 3 b。然而,相反的針對一個階梯 號的屬性資料,也可以於每次進行拖良及拖放時逐次的Page 45 541447 The temporary location of the five-lamp image is as follows: The ladder has all the facts. Description of the invention (42) When programming (1), the most basic step is to start the ladder editing 3 2a. First, on the step window 3 2 a 1, the step marks are arranged with each input / output device 4 as a pair and the step instructions are described 2 1). Next, input the attribute data (S 2 2) such as the name and address of the described ladder instruction, and register the ladder symbol and attribute data in the file storage area (S 2 3). After that, the program design is judged in accordance with the user's operation. Here, if it is not completed, the processing flow will return the completed use logic to S 2 1. On the other hand, if the program is completed, the program will be registered on the ladder. Case 3 3a (S 2 5). The day-to-day production (2) that is to be continued is performed in accordance with the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. First, the attribute data on the ladder mark (ladder instruction) registered in the ladder file 3 3 a is imported into the day-time file 3 3 b (S 3 1) in advance. Determine whether the step mark on the step window 3 2 a 1 has been dragged by a mouse or the like (S 3 2), and when it is dragged 5, determine whether the dragged step mark has been dragged onto the drawing production window 3 2 b 1 ( S 3 3). Here, if it is confirmed that the ladder symbol is actually dragged and dropped, a pair of windows D1 (refer to FIG. 1 5) including a plurality of icons having this function will be displayed according to the function included in the attribute material for the dragged ladder symbol (refer to FIG. 15). (c)) (S34). In the above program, the attribute data of the number of step marks created by the step editor 3 2 a are all copied to the screen file 3 3 b in the import step of S 3 1 in advance. However, on the contrary, the attribute data for a step number can also be successively used for each dragging and dragging.

第46頁 541447 五、發明說明(43) 被匯入。特別是製作包含多數的階梯記號的階梯圖時,會 比將屬性資料全數一次匯入之處理效率大幅提昇。另一方 面,製作包含少數的階梯記號的階梯圖時,就算將屬性資 料逐次的匯入,也應不會發生製作效率降低之情況。因此 採用那一種匯入方式最好還是根據階梯圖的大小和其他因 素後再做選擇。P.46 541447 V. Description of Invention (43) was imported. In particular, when creating a ladder diagram containing a large number of ladder marks, the processing efficiency is greatly improved compared to importing all the attribute data at once. On the other hand, when making a ladder diagram with a small number of ladder marks, even if the attribute data is imported one by one, the production efficiency should not decrease. Therefore, the best way to import is based on the size of the ladder diagram and other factors.

之後,選擇顯示於對話視窗D1的數個圖示的其中之 一,該圖示將會登錄於檔案暫存區(S35)。接著,判斷 使用者的操作是否結束晝面製作處理(S 3 6 )。在此,如 不結束時將處理返回S 3 1 ,如結束時,將製作而成的使用 者晝面登錄於畫面檔案3 3 b ( S 3 7 )。 , 在此,針對運用圖12流程圖的程序進行晝面製作處理 (2 )的具體範例進行說明。 首先,如圖15 (a)所表示的,階梯視窗32al上早已 繪製好運用階梯編輯器32a,所繪製的代表開關(輸入) 的階梯記號L和代表燈(輸出)的階梯記號L ’ ◦隨著上述 因素,階梯檔案3 3 a如圖1 6所表示的,登錄著有關於開關 及燈的資料。更具體來說,關於開關最少也登錄了當作名 稱的n SW1 π及當作位址的π ΧΒΟΟΟ Γ 。又,關於燈最少則登 錄了當作名稱的"L A Μ Ρ 1 π及當作位址的π Υ Β Ο Ο Ο Γ 。After that, one of several icons displayed in the dialog window D1 is selected, and the icon will be registered in the file temporary storage area (S35). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation of the user has ended the day-and-surface creation process (S 3 6). Here, if it is not finished, the process will be returned to S 3 1. If it is finished, the created user will be registered in the screen file 3 3 b (S 3 7). Here, a specific example of daytime surface creation processing (2) using the program of the flowchart of FIG. 12 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), the ladder window 32al has already drawn the ladder editor 32a. The drawn ladder symbol L representing the switch (input) and the ladder symbol L (output) are drawn. In view of the above factors, as shown in FIG. 16, the ladder file 3 3 a has registered information about switches and lights. More specifically, at least n SW1 π as a name and π χΒΟΟΟ Γ as an address are registered as switches. In addition, as for the minimum number of lights, "L A Μ Ρ 1 π" as a name and π Υ Β Ο Ο Ο Γ as an address are registered.

在這個狀態中,如圖1 5 ( a)所表示的將畫面製作視窗 3 2 b 1開啟。接著如圖1 5 ( b )所表示的將在階梯視窗3 2 a 1中 之階梯記號L拖曳及拖放至畫面製作視窗32bl時,如圖 15(c)所表示的,對話視窗D1將顯示於畫面製作視窗32blIn this state, the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 is opened as shown in FIG. 15 (a). Next, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), when dragging and dragging the ladder symbol L in the ladder window 3 2 a 1 to the screen creation window 32bl, as shown in FIG. 15 (c), the dialog window D1 will be displayed On the screen making window 32bl

第47頁 541447 五、發明說明(44) 上。 如前述的,運用階梯編輯3 2 a所製作關於所有的階梯 記號之屬性資料,因為預先匯入將全數複製至畫面/檔案 3 3 b。或者是,針對一個階梯記號的屬性資料,將於進行 拖曳及拖放時逐次匯入。該匯入則如圖1 6所表示的,是藉 由將屬性資料暫時記憶於剪貼薄後,再將其複製到畫面檔 案3 3 b中所實現的。 對話視窗D1中具有開關功能的數個種類中的圖示中 ,選擇一個適當的圖示,如圖1 5 ( d )所表示,除了所被選 擇到之圖示的影像Μ顯示於畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1以外,包 含著屬性資料(名稱n SW1 π及特性π ON")的對話視窗D2 將一併顯示。在此,如押下0 K按鈕時,即確認了畫面製 作視窗3 2 b 1上的圖示Μ及屬性資料,針對開關圖示Μ的 圖形資料及屬性資料將會被建立其關聯性並儲存於,畫面 檔案3 3b的圖形資料檔案部3 3 b 1及屬性資料檔案部3 3 b 2 ( 參照圖1 6 )。 因此,使用者可免除在畫面製作視窗32bl上繪製開關 圖示之作業,和進行輸入必要的屬性資料作業,可相當容 易的製作出使用者晝面。 另一方面,如先執行晝面製作處理(1 )時,則依據圖 13流程圖所表示的程序進行。在此電腦裝置3中,階梯 編輯器3 2 a及晝面編輯器3 2 b已被起動,顯示器3 5的顯示 部35a (參照圖17 (a))中階梯視窗32al及晝面製作視窗 3 2 b 1已被同時開啟。然而,先執行畫面製作處理(1 ) in I —ί ί. * II lii^Page 47 541447 V. Description of Invention (44). As mentioned above, the attribute data about all the ladder symbols created by using the ladder editor 3 2 a is imported in advance to copy all to the screen / file 3 3 b. Or, the attribute data of a ladder mark will be imported one by one when dragging and dropping. The import is implemented as shown in Figure 16 by temporarily storing the attribute data in the clipboard and then copying it to the screen file 3 3 b. In the dialog window D1, among several types of icons with switch functions, select an appropriate icon, as shown in FIG. 15 (d). In addition to the image M of the selected icon, it is displayed in the screen creation window. In addition to 3 2 b 1, a dialog window D2 containing attribute data (name n SW1 π and characteristic π ON ") will be displayed together. Here, if the 0 K button is pressed, the icon M and attribute data on the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 are confirmed. The graphic data and attribute data of the switch icon M will be related and stored in , The graphic data file section 3 3 b 1 and the attribute data file section 3 3 b 2 of the screen file 3 3b (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the user can dispense with the operation of drawing the switch icon on the screen creation window 32bl and the operation of inputting necessary attribute data, and the user can easily create the user's daytime surface. On the other hand, if the day-surface production process (1) is executed first, it is performed according to the procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. In this computer device 3, the step editor 32a and the daytime editor 32b have been activated, and the step window 32a1 and the daytime window 3 in the display portion 35a of the display 35 (see FIG. 17 (a)). 2 b 1 has been turned on at the same time. However, the screen making process is performed first (1) in I —ί ί. * II lii ^

11¾¾ I, !11¾¾ I,!

^ϋ iii^ ϋ iii

1 ^si^—ϋUS 第48頁 541447 五、發明說明(45) 時,最基本也要畫面編輯器3 2 b被起動。 首先,於畫面製作視窗3 2 b丨上,以各個绔出入機器4 為對象進行圖示的配置(S 4 1 ) ◦接著輸八關於將被配置 之圖示的要使用之名稱、位址等的屬性资料,S 4 2 ),將 圖示及屬性資料登錄於檔案暫存區(S43)。之後,順應 著使用者的操作判斷晝面製作處理是否完成< S4 4 )。在 此,如並未完成時其處理流程將返回至S 4 1 ,另一方面如 果已完成時,將所製作之使用者盡靣登錄於畫面檔案33 b 中(S45 ) 〇 對於繼續執行的程式設計製作(2),依照圖14之流 程圖所表示之流程進行。 _ 首先,預先將有關登錄於晝面稽案3 3 b的圖示的屬性 資料匯入至階梯檔案33a(S51)。判斷畫面&作視窗32bl 上的圖示是否有被拖曳(S 5 2 ),如有被拖曳時,則判斷 被拖良的圖式是否有被拖放至階梯視窗3 2 a 1上(S 5 3 )。在 此,如確圖示確實有進行拖放,將會顯示針驚包含於被拖 曳的圖示的屬性資料中之功能,與該功能對爲的階梯記號 及上述屬性資料(S54)。 上述的程序中,對於運用晝面編輯器32b所製成而全 數被配置的圖示之屬性資料,預先在S 5 1的匯人步驟中全 數一次複製到階梯標案3 3 a。然而,相反的針對一個圖示 _ 的屬性貧料5也可以於每次進行拖良及拖放時逐次的被匯 入 ° 之後,將被顯示的階梯記號登錄於檔案暫存區(S 5 51 ^ si ^ —ϋUS Page 48 541447 5. In the description of the invention (45), the screen editor 3 2 b must be started. First, on the screen creation window 3 2 b 丨, configure the icons for each of the access devices 4 (S 4 1). Then enter eight names, addresses, etc. to be used for the icons to be configured. Attribute data, S 4 2), register the icon and attribute data in the file temporary storage area (S43). After that, it is determined whether or not the day-and-day production process is completed in accordance with the operation of the user (S4 4). Here, if it is not completed, the processing flow will return to S 4 1. On the other hand, if it is completed, the created user will be registered in the screen file 33 b (S45). 〇 For the program to continue execution The design (2) is performed according to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 14. _ First, the attribute data about the icons registered in the day-to-day audit case 3 3 b is imported to the step file 33a (S51). Determine whether the icon on the screen & window 32bl has been dragged (S 5 2). If it is dragged, determine whether the dragged drawing has been dragged onto the ladder window 3 2 a 1 (S 5 3). Here, if the icon is indeed dragged and dropped, the function included in the attribute data of the icon being dragged, the step mark corresponding to the function, and the above attribute data will be displayed (S54). In the above-mentioned program, the attribute data of all the arranged icons created by using the daytime editor 32b is copied to the ladder project 3 3a in advance in the remittance step of S 51 in advance. However, the opposite attribute poor material 5 for an icon _ can also be imported one by one each time dragging and dragging are performed, and the displayed step marks are registered in the file temporary storage area (S 5 5

第49頁 541447 五、發明說明(46) )。接著,判斷使用者的操作是否結束程式設計處理 (S 5 6 )。在此,如不結束時將處理返回、S 5 1 ,如結束時, 將製作而成的使用者程式登錄於階梯檔案33a (S57)。 在此,針對運用圖1 4流程圖的程序進行程式設計處理 (2 )的具體範例進行說明。 首先,如圖1 7 ( a )所表示的,畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1上 早已配置好運用晝面編輯器3 2 b,所繪製的代表開關(輸 入)的圖示Μ。隨著上述因素,畫面檔案33b如圖18所表 示的,登錄著有關於開關的資料。更具體來說,關於開關 最少也登錄了當作名稱的n S W 1 π及當作位址的π XB 0 0 0 1 π 。 在這個狀態中,如圖1 7 ( a )所表示的將階梯視窗 32al開啟。接著如圖17 (b)所表示的將在晝面製作視窗 3 2 b 1中之圖示Μ拖曳及拖放至階梯視窗3 2 a 1時,如圖1 7 ( c )所表示的,階梯記號L及對話視窗D 3將顯示於畫面製作 視窗3 2 b 1上。 如前述的,運用晝面編輯器3 2 b,所製作關於所有的圖 示之屬性資料,因為預先匯入將全數複製至階梯檔案 3 3 a。或者是,針對一個圖示的屬性資料,將於進行拖曳 及拖放時逐次匯入。該匯入則如圖1 8所表示的,是藉由將 屬性資料暫時記憶於剪貼薄CB後,再將其複製到階梯檔案 3 3 a中所實現的。 接著,如圖1 7所表示,除了對應開關功能的階梯記號 L將會繪製於階梯視窗32al上,並會顯示包含了屬性資料 (名稱"S W 1 π )的對話視窗D 3。在此,如壓下Ο K按鈕時,P. 49 541447 V. Description of Invention (46)). Next, it is determined whether the user's operation has ended the programming process (S 5 6). If it is not finished, the process returns to S 5 1. If it is finished, the created user program is registered in the step file 33 a (S57). Here, a specific example of programming processing (2) using the program of the flowchart of FIG. 14 will be described. First, as shown in Fig. 17 (a), the picture creation window 3 2 b 1 has already been configured with the icon M of the representative switch (input) drawn by using the day and night editor 3 2 b. With the above-mentioned factors, the screen file 33b is registered with the data about the switch as shown in FIG. More specifically, n S W 1 π as a name and π XB 0 0 0 1 π as an address are registered as a switch. In this state, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), the stepped window 32al is opened. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), when the icon M in the daytime production window 3 2 b 1 is dragged and dragged to the step window 3 2 a 1, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), the step The mark L and the dialog window D 3 will be displayed on the screen creation window 3 2 b 1. As mentioned above, using the daytime editor 3 2 b, the attribute data about all the diagrams is created, because all the data are copied to the ladder file 3 3 a in advance. Or, the attribute data of an icon will be imported one by one during drag and drop. The import is shown in FIG. 18, which is realized by temporarily storing the attribute data in the clipboard CB and then copying it to the step file 3 3a. Next, as shown in FIG. 17, in addition to the ladder symbol L corresponding to the switch function, it will be drawn on the ladder window 32al, and a dialog window D 3 containing the attribute data (name " S W 1 π) will be displayed. Here, when the 0 K button is pressed,

第50頁 541447 五、發明說明(47) 即確認了階梯視窗3 2 a 1上的階梯記號L及屬性資料,關於 開關的階梯記號L的命令及屬性貢料將會被建立其關聯性 並儲存於階梯檔案3 3 a的命令檔案部3 3 a 1及屬性資料部 3 3 a 2 (參照圖1 8 )。 因此,使用者可免除在階梯視窗32al上繪製開關的階 梯記號之作業,和進行輸入必要的屬性資料作業,可相當 容易的製作出使用者晝面。 依照上述,與本實施型態相關的第1至第3的顯示/控 制系統之構成為,各別具備有儲存運用階梯編輯器32a所 製作的使用者程式的階梯檔案3 3 a和儲存運用畫面編輯器 3 2 b所製作的使用者畫面的晝面檔案3 3 b。和藉由複製功能 部3 2 d,除了將階梯記號的屬性資料複製至晝面檔案3 3b, 並將圖示的屬性資料複製至階梯檔案3 3 a中。因為如此, 兩個播茶J 3 a、3 ^ b可以持有共通之屬性資料’和可容易的 建立兩個檔案間之關聯性。 又,如果使用者程式和使用者畫面擁有獨立之資料庫 時,各個資料庫和其他的資料庫之間可以進行如上述之屬 性資料的複製作業。具體來說,運用一般常用的應用軟體 (表格計算軟體等)的資料庫、電子回路用的電腦輔助設 計(C A D )的貢料庫、設計數值控制(N C )叙置的G碼程式 設計(G C 〇 d e P r 〇 g r a η] m i n g )(加工程式設計)等的軟體 所製作而成的資料庫之資料,將於該軟體的操作輸入畫面 上所輸入之資料當作影像區塊進行選取,可運用前述的拖 曳和拖放(或者是複製和貼上)之功能,將其複製到使用Page 50 541447 V. Description of the invention (47) The ladder symbol L and attribute data on the ladder window 3 2 a 1 are confirmed. The order and attribute data about the ladder symbol L of the switch will be established and related. A command file section 3 3 a 1 and an attribute data section 3 3 a 2 in the ladder file 3 3 a (see FIG. 18). Therefore, the user can dispense with the operation of drawing the step marks of the switch on the step window 32al and the operation of inputting the necessary attribute data, and the user's day surface can be made relatively easily. According to the above, the configuration of the first to third display / control systems related to this embodiment mode are each provided with a step file 3 3 a for storing a user program created by the step editor 32 a and a storage operation screen. The daytime file 3 3 b of the user screen created by the editor 3 2 b. And by the copy function part 3 2 d, in addition to copying the attribute data of the step mark to the day-time file 3 3 b, and copying the attribute data shown in the figure to the step file 3 3 a. Because of this, the two sowing teas J 3 a, 3 ^ b can hold common attribute data ’and can easily establish the relationship between the two files. In addition, if the user program and the user screen have separate databases, the above-mentioned attribute data can be copied between each database and other databases. Specifically, it uses a database of commonly used application software (table calculation software, etc.), a computer-aided design (CAD) library for electronic circuits, and a G-code programming (GC) for design numerical control (NC). 〇de P r 〇gra η] ming) (processing program design) and other database data, the data entered on the operation input screen of the software will be selected as an image block, you can select Use the aforementioned drag and drop (or copy and paste) functions to copy it to use

第51頁 541447 五、發明說明(48) 者程式或者是使用者畫面的資料庫中。 特別是,籍由電腦輔助設計(C A D )軟體來進行控制盤 的設計時,可以在階梯編輯器及晝面編輯器之間的進行資 料的相互傳送。 為了開發所有的裝置系統,首先為機械設計圖後為電 力系統圖。又製作電力系統圖時必須製作電力之規格說明 書、控制盤圖、零件目錄、硬體圖(回路圖等)。接著, 依據所製作的電力系統圖來製作控制盤後,再進行設置控 制盤的裝置系統的電氣工程。又,對於設計控制盤及製作 工程中,首先是決定規格,再依照其規袼利用電腦輔助設 計(CAD)軟體等的圖面製作工具,設計電氣的構造後再轉 移到包含可程式控制器等顯示/控制系統的程式製作。這 個時候,利用與本實施型態相關的複製功能部3 2 d的功 能,在電腦辅助設計(CAD )軟體中所輸入之資料可運用於 使用者程式及使用者畫面的製作。 具體來說,如電腦輔助設計(C A D )軟體有編入於電月餐 裝置3的應用軟體3 2 c (蒼照圖/及圖9 ) 0夺5起動電腦輔 助設計(CAD)軟體,如圖19 (a)所表示於顯示部35a中顯 不電腦續助設計(C A D )視窗3 2 c 1和階梯視窗ό 2 a 1。於%腦 輔助設計(CAD)視窗32cl上顯示著與可程式控制器的輸入 部連結的按鍵式開關(用圖記號名PB001所表示)和可程 式控制器的輸出部連結的指示燈(用圖記號名PL 0 0 1所表 示)。在此狀態下,只要將顯示於電腦輔助設計(CAD)視 窗32cl中的按鍵式開關白勺圖記號拖曳及拖放至階梯視窗32Page 51 541447 V. Description of the invention (48) The user program or the database of the user screen. In particular, when designing a control panel using computer-aided design (C A D) software, data can be transferred between the step editor and the day-and-day editor. In order to develop all the installation systems, the mechanical design drawings are first followed by the electrical system drawings. In addition, when preparing the power system diagram, the power specification book, control panel diagram, parts catalog, and hardware diagram (circuit diagram, etc.) must be produced. Next, after the control panel is made based on the produced power system diagram, the electrical engineering of the device system in which the control panel is installed is performed. In the design control panel and production process, first determine the specifications, and then use computer-aided design (CAD) software, such as drawing production tools, to design the electrical structure, and then transfer to a programmable controller. Programming of display / control system. At this time, using the function of the copy function section 3 2 d related to this embodiment, the data input in the computer-aided design (CAD) software can be used for the production of user programs and user screens. Specifically, for example, the computer-aided design (CAD) software has application software 3 2 c (Cangzhao / and Figure 9) incorporated in the electric moon meal device 3, and the computer-aided design (CAD) software is started as shown in FIG. (a) The computer-assisted design (CAD) window 3 2 c 1 and the stepped window 2 a 1 are displayed on the display portion 35 a. A 32-key CAD design window (32cl) displays a push-button switch connected to the input section of the programmable controller (indicated by the symbol PB001) and an indicator light connected to the output section of the programmable controller (shown in the figure). Symbolic name PL 0 0 1). In this state, just drag and drop the button symbol displayed on the computer-aided design (CAD) window 32cl to the ladder window 32

第52頁 541447 五、發明說明(49) a 1 ,將會如圖1 4的流程圖所表示之程序大致相同之程序, 對應按鍵式開關的階梯記號L 1 ( L D命令等)將顯示於階梯 視窗32al ,相同的,指示燈也會當作階梯記號L2 (OUT 命令)顯示於階梯視窗32al。 另一方面,運用電腦輔助設計(C A D )的資料來製作使 用者畫面時,如圖1 9所示,電腦輔助設計(C A D )視窗3 2 c 1 和晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1顯示於顯示部3 5 a。在此狀態下,將 顯示於電腦輔助設計(CAD)視窗32cl的按鍵開關的圖記號 進行拖曳並將其拖放至畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1 ,將會如圖1 2 , 的流程圖所表示之程序大致相同之程序,對應按鍵式開關 的圖示Μ 1將顯示於晝面視窗3 2 b 1。這時,只要在可程式 Φ 控制器輸入部和輸出部讓按鍵式開關及指示燈的功能共通 化,代表按鍵式開關兼指示燈的圖示將顯示於畫面製作視 窗32bl上。 進行上述的處理時,匯入於階梯檔案3 3 a及晝面檔案 33b的資料如圖20所表示的,儲存於構築在應周軟體檔案 3 3 c的電腦辅助設計(C A D )貪料厚。具體來說’也就是儲存 了圖記號名、註解、可程式控制器關聯位址等。所謂的可 程式控制器關聯位址就是分配給連結於可程式控制器2的 按鍵式開關和燈等的機器的位址。圖記號名是賦予上述運 用電腦輔助設計(CAD)軟體製成之圖面中的按鍵式開關和 燈等之記號名。該圖記號名與上述位址建立對應關係,將 按鍵式開關和燈等的位址分配給階梯記號和圖示時,與被 代替為位址的變數設定為相同。註解則是為了表示機器的Page 52 541447 V. Description of the invention (49) a 1, the procedure shown in the flowchart shown in FIG. 14 is almost the same, and the step symbol L 1 (LD command, etc.) corresponding to the key switch will be displayed on the step. Window 32al. Similarly, the indicator light will also be displayed on the ladder window 32al as a step symbol L2 (OUT command). On the other hand, when using computer-aided design (CAD) data to create a user screen, as shown in FIG. 19, a computer-aided design (CAD) window 3 2 c 1 and a daytime surface creation window 3 2 b 1 are displayed on the display. Department 3 5 a. In this state, drag and drop the icon symbol of the key switch displayed in the computer-aided design (CAD) window 32cl and drag it to the screen creation window 3 2 b 1, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 12, The procedure is roughly the same. The icon M 1 corresponding to the push-button switch will be displayed in the daytime window 3 2 b 1. At this time, as long as the functions of the push-button switch and indicator light are made common in the programmable input and output of the controller, the icon representing the push-button switch and indicator light will be displayed on the screen creation window 32bl. When the above-mentioned processing is performed, the data imported into the step file 3 3a and the day-surface file 33b are stored in a computer-aided design (C A D) constructed in the software file 3 3 c of the week, as shown in FIG. 20. Specifically, it means that the symbol name, comment, and programmable controller address are stored. The so-called programmable controller-associated address is an address assigned to a device such as a push-button switch and a lamp connected to the programmable controller 2. The symbolic names are the symbolic names given to the push-button switches, lights, etc. in the drawings made using the above computer-aided design (CAD) software. The symbolic name of the figure corresponds to the above address. When assigning the address of the push-button switch, lamp, etc. to the ladder symbol and the figure, the variable is replaced with the address. Annotations are meant to represent machines

第53頁 541447 五、發明說明(50) 動作狀態所設置的。 在上述的電腦輔助設計(C A D )資料庫中,因為將圖記 號名及變數設定為相同,所以可以將圖記號名(名稱)和 可程式控制器關聯位址(位址)當作屬性資料(參照圖6 (a ) 及圖6 ( b ))來進行操作。因為如此,階梯編輯器3 2 a 及晝面編輯器32b將圖記號名當作變數與階梯記號LI 、L2 及圖示Μ合併顯示。又,畫面編輯器3 2 b將稱為[連轉」 的註解顯示於圖示Μ上。 在此,第3的顯示/控制系統如圖9所表示的,因為具 有編輯功能及可程式控制器功能的電腦裝置3與開放式電 腦網路8連結,所以電腦裝置3中的資料庫可與類似這種 開放式電腦網路8連結的其他糸統Α〜C等的貧料庫之間’ 經由電腦網路抓取有關於階梯記號及圖示的屬性資料。又 ,電腦裝置3也可經由電腦網路和遠端的系統共享相同的 資料庫。 第2的顯示/控制系統 可程式顯示器1只要具備了可與開放式電腦網路8連 結的界面5則可程式顯示器1可如圖2 1 ( a )所表示的, 箱由開放式電腦網路8可與電腦哀置3和其他的糸統A〜u 等連結。又,採用第1的顯示/控制系統的時候,雖與第2 的顯示/控制系統相同,將可程式顯示器1可與開放式電腦H 網路8進行連結,但對於可程式顯示器1和可程式控制器 2之間的通訊,對應每個可程式控制器2的薇商就必彡貝要 有不同的通訊協定,因此,如記載於國際專利公開公報Page 53 541447 V. Description of the invention (50) Set by the operating state. In the above computer-aided design (CAD) database, since the graphic symbol names and variables are set to be the same, the graphic symbol names (names) and programmable controller associated addresses (addresses) can be used as attribute data ( Refer to Fig. 6 (a) and Fig. 6 (b)) for operation. Because of this, the step editor 3 2 a and the day and day editor 32 b display the symbol name as a variable in combination with the step symbols LI, L2 and the icon M. In addition, the screen editor 3 2 b displays a comment called “continuous rotation” on the icon M. Here, the third display / control system is as shown in FIG. 9. Since the computer device 3 having an editing function and a programmable controller function is connected to the open computer network 8, the database in the computer device 3 can be connected with Similar to this kind of open computer network 8 is connected to other poor systems such as A ~ C, etc. 'The computer network captures attribute data about step marks and icons. In addition, the computer device 3 can also share the same database with a remote system via a computer network. As long as the second display / control system programmable display 1 is provided with an interface 5 that can be connected to the open computer network 8, the programmable display 1 can be as shown in Figure 2 1 (a), and the box is formed by the open computer network. 8 can be connected to computer 3 and other systems A ~ u. When the first display / control system is used, the programmable display 1 can be connected to the open computer H network 8 in the same way as the second display / control system, but the programmable display 1 and the programmable display 1 The communication between the controllers 2 must correspond to a different communication protocol for each programmable controller 2. Therefore, as described in the International Patent Publication

Kl· —ϋ .... ΕηΕηκ liKl · —ϋ .... ΕηΕηκ li

—ϋ pi ii 111 1¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ iii 賺·—ϋ 第54頁 541447 五、發明說明(51) W〇9 9 / 5 6 1 8 6號(1 9 9 9年1 1月4日公開),將運用在開放式 電腦網路的共通的通訊協定和對應可程式控制器2的機種 的通訊協定相互變換之功能,配置於可程式顯示器1上。 而且,就算對於一個使用者程式製作數個不同樣本與 在第1的顯示/控制系統中一台的可程式顯示器1與數個可 程式控制器連結時,藉由資料庫間的資料複製,可以容易 的實現一對多的資料庫間之連結。 又,本實施型態雖已針對階梯視窗和畫面製作視窗顯 示於同一個顯示器上之範例進行過說明,但本發明也適用 於藉由不同機器的資料庫為基礎來顯示階梯視窗和晝面製 作視窗。 具體來說,如圖2 1 ( a )所表示的在第1的顯示/控制 系統中,儲存下載至可程式控制器2的使用者程式的資料 庫D B 1和第2的顯示/控制系統中儲存下載至可程示顯示 器1的使用者晝面的資料庫DB 2之間的資料相互抓取。這 時,電腦裝置3則如圖2 1 ( b )所表示,對於顯示於階梯 視窗3 2 a i的資料庫D B 1中的使用者程式和顯示於畫面製 作視窗3 2 b 1的資料庫D B 2中的使用者晝面之間可藉由拖 曳和拖放,自動產生階梯記號及圖示。因此,可容易的進 行早已下載至可程式控制器2的使用者程式和下載至可程 式顯示器1的使用者畫面之間的編輯和修正。 且,包含著本實施型態及以下全數的實施型態的本發 明,並不只有限定階梯圖,包含前述的I E C 6 1 1 3 1 - 1所規 定的5種語言之其他語言所進行的程式設計也當然一併適—Ϋ pi ii 111 1¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ iii Earn · —ϋ Page 54 541447 V. Description of the Invention (51) W〇9 9/5 6 1 8 6 (published on November 4, 1999) will be used in The function of converting the common communication protocol of the open computer network and the communication protocol of the model corresponding to the programmable controller 2 is arranged on the programmable display 1. Moreover, even if several different samples are made for one user program, and one programmable display 1 and several programmable controllers in the first display / control system are connected, the data can be copied between databases. Easily realize the connection between one-to-many databases. In addition, although the present embodiment has been described with an example in which the stepped window and the screen making window are displayed on the same display, the present invention is also applicable to displaying stepped windows and daytime surfaces based on databases of different machines. Windows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the first display / control system, the database DB 1 and the second display / control system that store and download the user program of the programmable controller 2 are stored. The data stored in the daytime database DB2 of the user downloaded to the programmable display 1 are captured from each other. At this time, the computer device 3 is shown in the database DB 1 of the step window 3 2 ai and the database DB 2 of the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 as shown in FIG. 2 1 (b). Users can automatically create ladder marks and icons by dragging and dropping between the day and the day. Therefore, editing and correction between the user program already downloaded to the programmable controller 2 and the user screen downloaded to the programmable display 1 can be easily performed. In addition, the present invention including this embodiment and all the following embodiments is not limited to a ladder diagram, and includes programs in other languages including the five languages specified in the aforementioned IEC 6 1 1 3 1-1 The design is of course suitable

第55頁 541447 五、發明說明(52) 用。又,對於此部份以下其他實施範例也相同。 [實施型態2】 如依據針對本發明的第2的實施型態的圖5、圖2 2至 圖3 6來進行說明,其内容如下。且對於本實施型態中,具 有與實施型態1中之構成要素大致相同功能的構成要素及 主要部具有同等的功能之構成要素,將其標註相同之符號 並省略其說明,對此部份以下其他實施範例也相同。 圖2 2所表示第1的顯示/控制系統,和實施型態1的 顯示/控制系統(參照圖1 )相同,包含了可程式顯示器1 及可程式控制器2。 與可程式顯示器1連結的電腦裝置3和圖1所表示的 顯不/控制糸統的電腦裝置3相同,具備了中央處理器3 1 、 編輯部3 2、記憶體部3 4、顯示器3 5、輸入裝置3 6、外部 記憶裝置3 7及界面部3 8,但具備了代替資料檔案3 3的專 案檔案4 2。 編輯部32則包含了階梯編輯器32a、畫面編輯器32b、 複製功能部3 2 e及檔案管理部3 2 f。 在本顯示/控制系統中作為資料產生手段的複製功能 部3 2 e,是利用控制系統的資料複製功能,藉由對應運用 階梯編輯器32a所製作的階梯圖中的階梯記號和後述的變 數資料之圖示,讓其在晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1中的晝面編輯器魯 32b自動產生(繪製)。又,複製功能部32e也相同的利用 控制系統的資料複製功能,藉由對應運用畫面編輯器32b 所製作的畫面中的圖示和變數資料之階梯記號,讓其在階Page 55 541447 V. Description of Invention (52). In addition, the same applies to the other following embodiments in this section. [Embodiment Mode 2] The description will be given with reference to Figs. 5 and 22 to Fig. 36 for the second embodiment mode of the present invention, and the contents are as follows. In addition, in this embodiment, components having substantially the same functions as those in the embodiment 1 and components having the same functions as the main parts are marked with the same symbols and descriptions thereof are omitted. The following other implementation examples are also the same. The first display / control system shown in FIG. 2 is the same as the display / control system of the first embodiment (see FIG. 1), and includes a programmable display 1 and a programmable controller 2. The computer device 3 connected to the programmable display 1 is the same as the computer device 3 of the display / control system shown in FIG. , Input device 36, external memory device 37, and interface section 38, but has a project file 4 2 instead of a data file 33. The editing section 32 includes a step editor 32a, a screen editor 32b, a copy function section 3 2e, and a file management section 3 2f. In the display / control system, the copy function section 3 2 e, which is a means for generating data, utilizes the data copy function of the control system, and corresponds to the step marks in the ladder diagram created by using the ladder editor 32a and variable data described later As shown in the figure, let the daytime editor Lu 32b in the daytime production window 3 2 b 1 automatically generate (draw). In addition, the copy function section 32e also uses the data copy function of the control system, and corresponds to the icons on the screen created by using the screen editor 32b and the step marks of the variable data, so that it is in the advanced stage.

第56頁 541447 五、發明說明(53) 梯視窗3 2 a 1中的階梯編輯器3 2 a自動產生(繪製)。 具體來說,利用拖曳和拖放或者是複製和貼上的功能 ,進行圖示或者是階梯記號的複製時,將屬性資料暫時保 存於設置在記憶體部34的後述剪貼薄CB中,複製目的區 的編輯器參照其變數資料將圖示及階梯記號自動產生。 檔案管理部3 2 f藉由專案檔案4 2構築成如後述的資料 庫,將可一元化的管理使用者程式及程用者畫面。 儲存於剪貼薄C B的資料構造則如圖(5 )所表示的構 造。在該資料構造的專案檔案其構造如圖5 ( b )所表示, 位址情報則是如圖5 ( c )所表示之構造。 且,上述的複製功能部3 2 e及檔案管理部3 2 f ,可各別 包含階梯編輯器3 2 a或者是畫面編輯器3 2 b的任何一方的 功能。 專案檔案4 2如圖2 3所表示,包含了控制資料和晝面 資料和變數資料。使用者程式則包含了控制資料及變數資 料,使用者晝面則包含了晝面資料及變數資料。又,雖不 使用圖表示前述的專案檔案4 2有保存著前述輸入/輸出 (I / 0 ) 分配的結果。 運用階梯編輯3 2 a所製作而成的使用者程式,除了儲 存於專案檔案4 2中,也可以藉由可程式顯示器1 (或者是 直接)傳送至可程式控制器2中,下載至可程式控制器2 内的記憶體。另一方面,運用晝面編輯器3 2 b所製作而成 的使用者晝面,儲存於專案檔案4 2,依據其需要藉由界面 部3 8傳送至可程式顯示器,並下載至快閃式可抹除可程式Page 56 541447 V. Description of the invention (53) The ladder editor 3 2 a in the ladder window 3 2 a 1 is automatically generated (drawn). Specifically, when dragging, dragging, or copying and pasting functions are used for illustration or step mark copying, the attribute data is temporarily stored in a scrapbook CB described later in the memory section 34 for copying purpose The editor of the zone will automatically generate icons and step marks by referring to its variable data. The file management section 3 2 f constructs a database as described later by using the project file 4 2 to manage user programs and user screens in a unified manner. The data structure stored in the scrapbook C B is as shown in Figure (5). The structure of the project file constructed in this data is shown in Figure 5 (b), and the address information is shown in Figure 5 (c). The above-mentioned copy function unit 3 2e and file management unit 3 2 f may each include a function of either the step editor 3 2 a or the screen editor 3 2 b. Project file 4 2 is shown in Fig. 23, which contains control data, day data and variable data. The user program contains control data and variable data, and the user's daytime data includes daytime data and variable data. It should be noted that although the above-mentioned project file 42 is not shown in the figure, the result of the input / output (I / 0) allocation is stored. The user program created by using step editing 3 2 a is not only stored in the project file 4 2, but also can be transmitted to the programmable controller 2 through the programmable display 1 (or directly) and downloaded to the programmable Memory in controller 2. On the other hand, the user's day and night surface created by using the day and night editor 3 2 b is stored in the project file 4 2 and transmitted to the programmable display through the interface portion 38 according to its needs and downloaded to the flash type Erasable and programmable

第57頁 541447 五、發明說明(54) 化唯讀記憶體(EEPROM ) 1 2b中。 作為固有資料的控制資料是由作為對應所輸入之階梯 記號的控制符號資料的階梯指令(函數)及變數名所構成 。作為變數名,可以舉出以對應開關的S W 1和對應燈的 L A Μ P 1 ,那種以對應裝置(輸出入機器4 )的符號和操作 指示、裝置的動作狀態的事件名。以這種變數名所建立之 變數,如前所述預先建立其對應裝置所希望的輸出入號碼 (I / 0位址)。 作為固有資料的晝面資料則是包含了影像資料,文字 資料及元件資料。影像資料為線、圓、橢圓、三角形、四 角形、填色圖形等的圖形資料。文字資料則包含了運用文 字和記號等所構成的使用者晝面的標題和文章等。元件資 料為預先準備於晝面編輯器3 2 b中有關於前述元件的資料 ,是由作為顯示符號資料的元件名及上述變數名所構成。 作為元件名,例如可從多種開關中選擇特定開關被區別的 開關A所稱之名稱和附在各個元件的元件編號(例如由英 文字母和數字的組合所組成之編號)。又,作為晝面資料 雖不用圖解表示,但包含了前述設定動晝功能的功能部。 ί 作為共通資料變數資料為使用者程式及使用者晝面的 共通的情報,是由變數名及位址(I / 0位址等)所構成。 該變數資料包含在屬性資料當中。變數除此之外還可以設 定為位元型、整數型、實數型等之型態,這樣的資料則與 變數資料包含於屬性資料中。 圖2 3所表示的專案檔案4 2,則被當作包含著可以建Page 57 541447 V. Description of the invention (54) The read-only memory (EEPROM) 1 2b. The control data as the unique data is composed of a step instruction (function) and a variable name which are control symbol data corresponding to the input ladder symbol. Examples of variable names include S W 1 corresponding to a switch and L A MP P 1 corresponding to a lamp, and event names using symbols and operation instructions of a corresponding device (input / output device 4) and operating status of the device. The variable created under this variable name is used to establish the input / output number (I / 0 address) desired by the corresponding device in advance as described above. The daytime data as the inherent data includes image data, text data and component data. The image data is graphic data such as lines, circles, ellipses, triangles, quadrilaterals, and filled graphics. The text data includes the user ’s daily headlines and articles composed of text and symbols. The component data is prepared in advance in the day-and-day editor 3 2 b. The component information includes the component name and the variable name as display symbol data. As the component name, for example, the name of the switch A in which a specific switch is distinguished and the component number (for example, a number composed of a combination of English letters and numbers) can be selected from a variety of switches. In addition, although it is not illustrated graphically as the daytime data, it includes the function section for setting the daylight function described above. ί As common data, variable data is common information for user programs and users. It consists of variable names and addresses (I / 0 address, etc.). The variable data is included in the attribute data. In addition, variables can also be set to bit, integer, real, and so on. Such data and variable data are included in attribute data. The project file 42 shown in Figure 2 3 is considered to contain

第58頁 541447 五、發明說明(55) 立關赠性之特定資料的資料庫而被構成的。在專案稽案42 中,控制資料和晝面資料和變數資料是由各別被當作關係 表所構成的。因為如此,將變數資料的變數名當作基本鑰 匙,另一方面則將控制資料的變數名當成外部鑰匙,讓其 變數資料與控制資料相互結合,則可構成使用者程式。又 ,將變數資料的變數名當作基本鑰匙,另一方面則將晝面 資料的變數名當成外部鑰匙,讓其變數資料與晝面資料相 互結合,則可構成使用者晝面。 舉例來說,因關聯式資料庫是運用表格形式來表現的 ,藉由階梯編輯器32a及畫面編輯器32b可讀寫CSV (P.58 541447 V. Description of the invention (55) It is constituted by a database of specific materials related to donation. In the project audit case 42, the control data and day-time data and variable data are each composed of relation tables. Because of this, the variable name of the variable data is used as the basic key, while the variable name of the control data is regarded as the external key, and the variable data and the control data are combined to form a user program. In addition, the variable name of the variable data is regarded as the basic key, while the variable name of the day-time data is regarded as the external key, and the variable data and the day-time data are combined to form the user's day-time surface. For example, because the relational database is expressed in the form of a table, the ladder editor 32a and the screen editor 32b can read and write CSV (

Comma Separated Value)形式的播案,可以將利用市面 上所販賣的資料庫軟體和表格計算軟體所製成之資料讀取 至本資料庫中,其相反動作也可以執行。 像這樣子,使用者程式及使用者畫面在檔案管理部 32f之管理下,藉由變數資料進行相互間關聯性之建立。 所以,在第丨至第3的顯示/控制系統中的顯示動作和控制 動作將建立相互之關聯性。 專案檔案4 2並不是-只有關聯式資料庫,其他如階層性 貢料庫、電腦網路型資料庫、物件指向型資料厚%·所構成 之資料庫階可適用。 例如,丨智層型資料庫如圖2 4所表示的,將變數名當作 根區段(s e g m e n t )配置後,將控制資料(階梯指令)和 晝面資料(元件名)和位址當作的下位的從屬區段來進行 配置,又,將影像資料及文字資料當作晝面資料的下位的Comma Separated Value) can be used to read the data created by the database software and spreadsheet software sold in the market into this database, and the reverse can be performed. In this way, the user program and the user screen are established under the management of the file management section 32f through the variable data to establish the correlation between them. Therefore, the display actions and control actions in the display / control systems Nos. 1-3 will establish mutual correlation. Project files 4 2 are not-only relational databases, and other database levels such as hierarchical data banks, computer network databases, and object-oriented data thickness% · are applicable. For example, the intelligent layer database is shown in Figure 24. After the variable name is configured as the root segment (segment), the control data (ladder instruction) and daytime data (component name) and address are treated as The lower-level subordinate sections are configured, and the image data and text data are regarded as the lower-level data of the day-surface data.

第59頁 541447 五、發明說明(56) 從屬區段進行配置的階層構造針對各個變數名所形成。 又’電腦網路型貪料庫社階層型資料庫中,順應從屬區段 所需要從屬別的父區段。 物件指向型資料庫則如圖2 5所表示,將階梯指令(例 如L D )、元件名(例如開關A )、變數名(例如S W 1 )及 位址(例如XB 0 0 0 1 )被膠囊化的開關等的元件當作物件來 進行處理。在各個物件中將階梯指令、元件名及位址當作 資料進行處理,變數名則被當作手續進行處理。因此,籍 由變數名來進行各個資料的存取(各個資料的參照)。 圖26所表示第2的顯示/控制系統,和前述第1的顯示 /控制系統相同,雖包含了可程式顯示器1及可程式控制器 2,但是在此的顯可程式顯示器1之構成更具備了可程式控 制器之功能,可直接控制輸出入機器4。因為如此,可程 式顯示器1除了在記憶體部12中配備靜態隨機存儲器( S R A Μ ) 1 2 c以外,並具備了在前述的通訊控制器1 9中加 入的輸出入裝置20及輸入/輸出(I/O)控制界面21。 圖27所表示的第3顯示/控制系統,是由依據作為開 放式控制、的電腦裝置3所構成’並具備為了與輸出入機 器4連結,代替在前述第1的顯示/控制系統中的電腦裝置 3之界面部3 8的輸出入裝置3 9及輸入/輸出(I / 0 )控制界 面4 0 〇 又,電腦裝置3具備了與開放式電腦網路8連結的界面 裝置4 1 。因為如此,電腦裝置3將藉由開放式電腦網路8與 其他電腦裝置、可程式顯示器、可程式控制器等進行連結Page 59 541447 V. Description of the invention (56) The hierarchical structure of the subordinate section is formed for each variable name. Also, in the computer network-type database, the parent section of the subordinate section is required to comply with the subordinate section. The object-oriented database is shown in Figure 25. The ladder instruction (such as LD), component name (such as switch A), variable name (such as SW 1), and address (such as XB 0 0 0 1) are encapsulated. Components such as switches are handled as objects. The ladder instruction, component name, and address are processed as data in each object, and the variable names are processed as procedures. Therefore, each data is accessed by the variable name (reference of each data). The second display / control system shown in FIG. 26 is the same as the first display / control system described above. Although the programmable display 1 and the programmable controller 2 are included, the configuration of the programmable display 1 here is further provided. With the function of programmable controller, it can directly control the input and output of machine 4. Because of this, in addition to the static random access memory (SRAM) 1 2c provided in the memory section 12, the programmable display 1 is provided with the input / output device 20 and input / output ( I / O) Control Interface 21. The third display / control system shown in FIG. 27 is constituted by a computer device 3 which is an open control, and is provided with a computer for connecting to the input / output device 4 instead of the computer in the first display / control system. The input / output device 39 and the input / output (I / 0) control interface 400 of the interface portion 38 of the device 3, and the computer device 3 includes an interface device 41 connected to the open computer network 8. Because of this, the computer device 3 will be connected to other computer devices, programmable displays, programmable controllers, etc. via the open computer network 8

第60頁 541447 五、發明說明(57) 電腦裝置3將運用階梯編輯器32a所製成,並儲存在專 案檔案4 2的使用者程式依據控制功能程式執行。另一方面 ,電腦裝置3在連線狀態中,因起動了階梯編輯器32a或者 是畫面編輯器32b,而為了製作使用者程式或者是使用者 堇面的編輯設備將進行作用。 在此,針對在第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中的使用者 程式及使用者畫面的製作程序,參照圖2 8至圖3 1的流程圖 進行說明。 先執行程式設計處理(1 )時,依照圖2 8的流程圖所 表示之程序。在此,於電腦裝置3中,階梯編輯器3 2 a及晝 面編輯器3 2 b已被起動,顯示器3 5的顯示部3 5 a (參照圖3 2 (a ))上,則顯示使用者晝面製作用的編輯畫面視窗3 2 b 1 及顯示使用者程式製作用的編輯晝面視窗3 2 a 1同時被開啟 之狀態。然而先執行程式設計處理(1 )時,最基本也必 須要起動階梯編輯器3 2 a。 首先,於階梯視窗32al上,以各個輸出入機器4為對 象進行階梯記號的配置並對其階梯指令的進行記述(S 6 1 )。接著輸入包含針對被記述之階梯指令所使用之變數資 料(變數名及位址)的屬性資料(S 6 2 ),將階梯記號及 屬性資料登錄於檔案暫存區(S63)。之後,順應著使用 者的操作判斷程式設計處理是否結束(S64)。在此,如 並未結束時其處理流程將返回至S 6 2,另一方面如果已結 束時,將所製作之使用者程式登錄於專案檔案4 2中(S 6 5Page 60 541447 V. Description of the invention (57) The computer device 3 will be made using the ladder editor 32a and stored in the project file 42. The user program will be executed according to the control function program. On the other hand, since the computer device 3 is in the connected state, the step editor 32a or the screen editor 32b is activated, and an editing device for creating a user program or a user's face will function. Here, the user program and the user screen creation program in the first to third display / control systems will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 28 to 31. When the programming process (1) is executed first, the procedure shown in the flowchart of Fig. 28 is followed. Here, in the computer device 3, the step editor 3 2 a and the day and day editor 3 2 b have been activated, and the display portion 3 5 a of the display 35 (see FIG. 3 2 (a)) is displayed for use. The editing screen window 3 2 b 1 for daytime surface creation and the editing daytime window 3 2 a 1 for user program creation are displayed at the same time. However, when the programming process (1) is performed first, the ladder editor 3 2 a must also be started. First, on the step window 32al, the step marks are arranged with the input / output devices 4 as objects, and the step instructions are described (S 6 1). Then enter the attribute data (S 6 2) containing the variable data (variable name and address) used for the described ladder instruction, and register the ladder mark and attribute data in the file temporary storage area (S63). After that, it is judged whether or not the programming process is completed in accordance with the user's operation (S64). Here, if it is not finished, the processing flow will return to S 6 2; on the other hand, if it has ended, the created user program will be registered in the project file 4 2 (S 6 5

第61頁 541447 五、發明說明(58) )0 對於繼續執行的畫面製作(2),依照圖29流程圖所 表示之流程進行。 首先,判斷階梯視窗3 2 a 1上的階梯記號是否有被滑鼠 等拖曳(S 7 1 ),如被拖曳時,則判斷被拖曳的階梯記號 是否有被拖放至晝面製作視窗32bl上(S72)。在此,如 確認階梯記號確實有進行拖放,為了將針對被拖放的階梯 記號的變數名從登錄在資料庫的變數資料中抽出,在專案 檔案42的資料庫中進行變數資料的檢索(S73)。 接著,依據針對包含於被拖良的階梯記號的變數名中 之功能,將會顯示包含具有該功能的複數的圖示之對話視® 窗 D 1 (參照圖 3 2 ( c ) ) ( S 7 4 )。 之後,判斷是否有從顯示於對話視窗D1的複數的圖示 中選取一個圖示(S 7 5 )。如圖示有被選取時,則顯示出 該圖示(S 7 6 ),並將其登錄於檔案暫存區(S 7 7 )。接下 來,順應著使用者的操作來判斷畫面製作處理是否結束( S 7 8 )。在此,如並未結束時其處理流程將返回至S 7 1 ,另 --方面如果已結束時,將所製作之使用者畫面登錄於專案 檔案42中(S79 )。 而且,S 7 3至S 7 6的處理是為了提供使用者在選擇圖示 時,有其相當之自由度所設置的。因此,如不須要該自由馨 度,只要將圖示固定為一個種類,S 7 3至S 7 6的處理即可省 略。這種情況,例如將被固定的開關的編號資料(元件編 號)預先登錄於資料庫中。Page 61 541447 V. Description of the invention (58)) 0 For the screen creation (2) to be performed continuously, follow the flow shown in the flowchart in Fig. 29. First, determine whether the step mark on the step window 3 2 a 1 has been dragged by a mouse or the like (S 7 1). If it is dragged, determine whether the dragged step mark has been dragged onto the daytime production window 32bl. (S72). Here, if it is confirmed that the ladder mark is actually dragged and dropped, in order to extract the variable name for the dragged ladder mark from the variable data registered in the database, the variable data is searched in the database of the project file 42 ( S73). Next, according to the function included in the variable name of the dragged ladder symbol, a dialog view® window D 1 including a plurality of icons having the function will be displayed (refer to FIG. 3 2 (c)) (S 7 4). Then, it is determined whether or not one icon is selected from the plurality of icons displayed in the dialog window D1 (S 7 5). If the icon is selected, the icon is displayed (S 7 6) and registered in the file temporary storage area (S 7 7). Next, it is determined whether or not the screen creation process is completed in accordance with the user's operation (S 7 8). Here, if it is not finished, the processing flow will return to S 7 1. Otherwise, if it has ended, the created user screen will be registered in the project file 42 (S79). In addition, the processing from S 7 3 to S 7 6 is provided to provide users with a considerable degree of freedom when selecting icons. Therefore, if the degree of freedom is not required, as long as the illustration is fixed to a kind, the processing of S 7 3 to S 7 6 can be omitted. In this case, for example, the number data (component number) of the fixed switch is registered in the library in advance.

第62頁 541447 五、發明說明(59) 在此,針對運用圖4 5流程圖的程序進行晝面製作處理 (2 )的具體範例進行說明。 首先,如圖4 7 ( a )所表示的,階梯視窗3 2 a 1上早已 繪製好運用階梯編輯器32a,所繪製的代表開關(輸入) 的階梯記號L和燈(輸出)的階梯記號L’ 。隨著上述因 素,資料檔案33如圖48所表示的,登錄著有關於開關及燈 的資料。更具體來說,關於開關最少也登錄當作資料檔案 的變數名n S W 1 π及位址的π X B 0 0 0 1 π 。又,關於燈最少則登 錄了當作共通資料的變數名"LAMPln及位址的16 0 0 0 1 "。 在這個狀態中,如圖3 2 ( a)所表示的將晝面製作視窗 3 2 b 1開啟。接著如圖3 2 ( b )所表示的將在階梯視窗3 2 a 1中 之階梯記號L拖曳及拖放至畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1時,如圖3 3 所表示的,將從專案檔案42抽出之變數資料暫時保存於剪 貼薄CB中。接著,晝面編輯器3 2b依據參照該變數資料, 將如圖32 (c)所表示的,對話視窗D1將顯示於晝面製作 視窗32bl上。 如前述的,運用階梯編輯3 2 a所選取及繪製關於所有 的階梯記號之屬性資料,預先將其全數登錄至專案檔案42 中。因此,晝面編輯器32b將會依據該變數資料而顯示對 話視窗D1。 · 對話視窗D 1中具有開關功能的數個種類中的圖示中, 選擇一個適當的圖示,如圖32 (d)所表示,除了所被選 擇到之圖示的影像Μ顯示於畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1以外,包含 著屬性資料(變數名” SW1"及特性π 0ΝΠ )的對話視窗D2將P.62 541447 V. Description of the Invention (59) Here, a specific example of daytime surface processing (2) using the program shown in the flowchart of Fig. 45 will be described. First, as shown in Figure 4 7 (a), the ladder window 32 2 a 1 has already been drawn using the ladder editor 32 a, the drawn ladder symbol L representing the switch (input) and the ladder symbol L of the light (output) are drawn. '. With the above factors, as shown in Fig. 48, the data file 33 is registered with data on switches and lamps. More specifically, the switch also registers at least the variable name n S W 1 π and the address π X B 0 0 0 1 π as data files. In addition, the variable name " LAMPln and address 16 0 0 0 1 ", which are common information, are registered for the least number of lights. In this state, as shown in FIG. 3 2 (a), the daytime surface creation window 3 2 b 1 is opened. Next, as shown in FIG. 3 2 (b), drag and drop the ladder symbol L in the ladder window 3 2 a 1 to the screen making window 3 2 b 1, as shown in FIG. 3 3, from the project file The extracted variable data is temporarily stored in the scrapbook CB. Next, the daytime editor 32b will refer to the variable data, and as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the dialog window D1 will be displayed on the daytime creation window 32bl. As mentioned above, use the ladder editor 3 2 a to select and draw the attribute data about all the ladder marks, and register all of them to the project file 42 in advance. Therefore, the daytime editor 32b will display the dialog window D1 according to the variable data. · Among the several types of icons with switch functions in dialog window D1, select an appropriate icon, as shown in Figure 32 (d). In addition to the image M of the selected icon, it is displayed on the screen. In addition to window 3 2 b 1, the dialog window D2 containing attribute data (variable name "SW1 " and characteristic π 0ΝΠ) will

第63頁 541447 五、發明說明(60) 一併顯示◦在此,如壓下〇 K按鈕時,即確認了畫面製作 視窗32bl上的圖示Μ及4面資料,針對開關圖示Μ的圖形 資料及屬性資料將會被建立其關聯性並儲存於專案檔案4 2 之資料庫中(參照圖3 3 )。 因此,使用者可免除在畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1上繪製開關 圖示之作業,和進行輸入必要的屬性資料作業,可相當容 易的製作出使用者晝面 另一方面,如先執行晝面製作處理(1 )時,則依據 圖3 0流程圖所表示的程序進行。在此電腦裝置3中,P皆梯 編輯器3 2 a及畫面編輯器3 2 b已被起動,顯示器3 5的顯示部 3 5 a (參照圖3 4 ( a ))中階梯視窗3 2 a 1及畫面製作視窗 3 2 b 1已被同時開啟。然而,先執行晝面製作處理(1 )時 ,最基本也必須要畫面編輯器3 2 b被起動。 首先,於晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1上,以各個輸出入機器4 為對象進行圖示的配置(S 8 1 )。接著輸入包含關於將被 配置之圖示的要使用之變數資料的屬性資料(S 8 2 ),將 圖示及屬性資料登錄於檔案暫存區(S 8 3 )。之後,順應 著使用者的操作判斷晝面製作處理是否完成(S84)。在 此,如並未完成時其處理流程將返回至S 8 1 ,另一方面如 果已完成時,將所製作之使用者晝面登錄於專案檔案42中 (S85 ) ° 對於繼續執行的程式設計製作處理(2 ),依照圖3 1 之流程圖所表示之流程進行。 首先,判斷畫面製作視窗32bl上的圖示是否有被拖曳Page 63 541447 V. Description of the invention (60) is displayed together. Here, if the 0K button is pressed, the icon M and the 4-sided data on the screen creation window 32bl are confirmed. The data and attribute data will be related and stored in the database of the project file 4 2 (refer to Figure 3 3). Therefore, the user can dispense with the operation of drawing a switch icon on the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 and the operation of inputting necessary attribute data, and it is quite easy to create the user's day surface. On the other hand, if the day surface is executed first The creation process (1) is performed in accordance with the program shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30. In this computer device 3, the ladder editor 3 2 a and the screen editor 3 2 b have been activated, and the display portion 3 5 a of the display 3 5 (see FIG. 3 4 (a)) has a stepped window 3 2 a. 1 and screen creation window 3 2 b 1 have been opened at the same time. However, when the day-to-day production process (1) is performed first, the screen editor 3 2 b must be started as a basic matter. First, on the daytime production window 3 2 b 1, the illustrated arrangement is performed for each input / output device 4 (S 8 1). Then enter the attribute data (S 8 2) containing the variable data to be used for the icon to be configured, and register the icon and attribute data in the file temporary storage area (S 8 3). After that, it is judged whether or not the day and night production processing is completed in accordance with the user's operation (S84). Here, if it is not completed, the processing flow will return to S 8 1. On the other hand, if it is completed, the created user will be registered in the project file 42 (S85) on the day. The production process (2) is performed in accordance with the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31. First, determine whether the icon on the screen creation window 32bl has been dragged

第64頁 541447 五、發明說明(61) (S9 1 ),如被拖曳時,則判斷被拖曳的圖示是否有被拖 放至階梯視窗3 2 a 1上(S 9 2 )。在此,如確認圖示確實有進 行拖放,為了將針對被拖放的圖示的變數名從登錄在資料 庫的變數資料中抽出,在專案檔案42的資料庫中進行變數 資料的檢索(S 9 3 )。 接著,依據針對包含於被拖矣的階梯記號的變數名中 之功能,將會顯示除了對應該功能的階梯記號以外,上述 的屬性資料(最少也必須有變數名)也將一併顯示(S94 )。之後,將所顯示之階梯記號登錄於檔案暫存區(S 9 5 )。接下來,順應著使用者的操作來判斷程式設計處理是 否結束(S 9 6 )。在此,如並未結束時其處理流程將返回 至S 5 2,另一方面如果已結束時,將所製作之使用者程式 登錄於專案檔案4 2中(S 9 7 )。 在此,針對運用圖3 1流程圖的程序進行程式設計處理 (2 )的具體範例進行說明。 首先,/如圖3 4 ( a )所表示的,晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1上 早已配置好運用晝面編輯器3 2b,所繪製的代表開關(輸 入)的圖示Μ。隨著上述因素,專案檔案4 2如圖3 5所表示 的,登錄著有關於開關的資料。更具體來說,關於開關最 少也登錄了當作變數名的n S W Γ及位址的π X Β 0 0 0 1 π 。 在這個狀態中,如圖3 4 ( a )所表示的將階梯視窗 3 2 a 1開啟。接著如圖3 4 ( b )所表示的將在畫面製作視窗 3 2 b 1中之圖示Μ拖曳及拖放至階梯視窗3 2 a 1時,如圖3 5所 表示的,將從專案檔案4 2抽出之變數資料暫時保存於剪貼P.64 541447 V. Description of the invention (61) (S9 1), if dragged, judge whether the dragged icon has been dragged to the step window 3 2 a 1 (S 9 2). Here, if it is confirmed that the icon is actually dragged and dropped, in order to extract the variable name for the dragged icon from the variable data registered in the database, search the variable data in the database of the project file 42 ( S 9 3). Next, according to the function of the variable name included in the dragged ladder symbol, in addition to the ladder symbol corresponding to the function, the above-mentioned attribute data (at least a variable name must also be displayed) will be displayed together (S94 ). After that, the displayed ladder mark is registered in the file temporary storage area (S 9 5). Next, it is determined whether or not the programming process is completed in accordance with the user's operation (S 9 6). Here, if it is not finished, the processing flow will return to S 5 2; on the other hand, if it is finished, the created user program will be registered in the project file 4 2 (S 9 7). Here, a specific example of programming processing (2) using the program of the flowchart of FIG. 31 will be described. First, as shown in Fig. 3 4 (a), the day-surface production window 3 2 b 1 is already configured with the icon M of the representative switch (input) drawn by using the day-surface editor 3 2b. With the above factors, the project file 42 is registered with the information about the switch as shown in Figure 35. More specifically, n S W Γ as a variable name and π X Β 0 0 0 1 π as the address of the switch are registered at least. In this state, the step window 3 2 a 1 is opened as shown in FIG. 34 (a). Then, as shown in FIG. 3 4 (b), when the icon M in the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 is dragged and dragged to the ladder window 3 2 a 1, as shown in FIG. 3 5, the project file will be removed from the project file. 4 2 The extracted variable data is temporarily saved in the scrapbook

第65頁 541447 五、發明說明(62) 薄CB中。接著,階梯編辑器32a依據參照該變數資料,將 如圖34 (c)所表示的,階梯記號及對話視窗D3將顯示於 階梯視窗32al上。 如前述的,將運用畫面編輯器3 2 b所製作關於所有的 圖示之屬性資料,預先登錄於專案檔案42中。因此階梯編 輯器3 2 a將會依據該變數資料顯示對話視窗D 3。 具體來說,除了對應開關功能的階梯記號L將會繪製 於階梯視窗32al上,並會顯示包含了變數資料(變數名 n S W 1 n )的對話視窗D 3。在此,如壓下了對話視窗D 3的 Ο K按鈕時,即確認了階梯視窗3 2 a 1上的階梯記號L及控制 資料,關於開關的階梯記號L的控制資料及變數資料將會 被建立其關聯性並儲存於專案檔案4 2中(參照圖3 5 )。 因此,使用者可免除在階梯視窗3 2 a 1上繪製開關的階 梯記號之作業,和進行輸入必要的屬性資料作業,可相當 容易的製作出使用者程式。 如上述,與本實施型態相關的第1至第3的顯示/控制 系統具備了 ,將使用者程式及使用者晝面共通的屬性資料 (特別是變數資料)和,使用者程式固有的控制資料和, 使闱者晝面固有的晝面資料等儲存於專案檔案42中統一進 行管理的檔案管理部3 2 f。又,這些的顯示/控制系統其構 成為,依據複製功能部32e,隨著階梯記號或者是圖示的 拖曳和拖放動作,除了讓階梯編輯器3 2 a產生控制資料以 外並讓其繪製階梯記號。另一方面,除了讓晝面編輯器 3 2 b產生晝面資料以外並讓其繪製圖示。Page 65 541447 V. Description of the invention (62) In the thin CB. Next, the step editor 32a will refer to the variable data, and as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the step symbol and dialog window D3 will be displayed on the step window 32al. As described above, the attribute data on all the icons created by the screen editor 3 2 b is registered in the project file 42 in advance. Therefore, the step editor 3 2 a will display the dialog window D 3 according to the variable data. Specifically, in addition to the ladder symbol L corresponding to the switch function, it will be drawn on the ladder window 32al, and a dialog window D 3 containing variable data (variable name n S W 1 n) will be displayed. Here, if the 0K button of the dialog window D 3 is pressed, the step symbol L and the control data on the step window 3 2 a 1 are confirmed, and the control data and variable data on the step symbol L of the switch will be confirmed. Establish its relevance and store it in the project file 4 2 (refer to Figure 3 5). Therefore, the user can dispense with the operation of drawing the step marks of the switch on the step window 3 2 a 1 and the operation of inputting the necessary attribute data, and the user program can be made relatively easily. As described above, the first to third display / control systems related to this embodiment are provided with attribute data (especially variable data) common to the user program and the user's day and day, and control inherent to the user program. The data and the day-and-day data inherent to the day and night of the person are stored in the project file 42 and the file management unit 3 2 f manages them in a unified manner. In addition, these display / control systems are configured so that, in accordance with the copy function unit 32e, the ladder editor 3 2 a generates control data and draws the ladder in accordance with the drag and drop actions of the ladder mark or the icon. mark. On the other hand, in addition to letting the day-and-day editor 3 2 b generate day-and-day data, and letting it draw icons.

第66頁 541447 五、發明說明(63) 因為如此,將全部的資料運用專案檔案4 2進行管理, 可以容易達到資料管理。又,與將資料儲存於針對階梯編 輯器32a和晝面編輯器32b的各別檔案之構成相比,為了讓 變數資料持有各別的檔案所進行的檔案間複製作業操作是 沒有必要的。又,也可一次將使用者程式及使用者晝面從 專案檔案4 2下載至可程示顯示器1 。又,因運用專案檔案 4 2來官理資料,别述的各種貪料庫可順應其用途所構成。 又,本實施型態雖已針對階梯視窗32al和畫面製作視 窗3 2 b 1顯示於同一個顯示器3 5上之範例進行過說明,但如 圖3 6所表示的本發明也適用於藉由電腦網路以不同機種的 資料庫為基礎來顯示階梯視窗和畫面製作視窗。 【實施型態3】 針對本發明的第3的實施型態,依據圖3 7至圖4 9來進 行說明,其内容如下。 圖3 7所表示的第1的顯示/控制系統和前述的實施型態 1的顯示/控制系統相同,包含了可程式顯示器1及可程式 控制器2。 與可程式顯示器1連結的電腦裝置3和圖1所表示的顯 示/控制系統的電腦裝置3相同,具備有中央處理器31 、編 輯部3 2、資料檔案3 3、記憶體部3 4、顯示器3 5、輸入裝置 3 6、外部記憶裝置3 7及界面部3 8。 編輯部3 2則包含了階梯編輯部3 2 a、晝面編輯部3 2 b及 複製功能部3 2 g。 作為附帶情報供給手段的複製功能部3 2 g,利用操作Page 66 541447 V. Description of the invention (63) Because of this, all the data are managed by the project file 4 2, which can easily achieve data management. In addition, compared with the configuration in which data is stored in separate files for the step editor 32a and the daytime editor 32b, the operation of copying files between files in order to hold variable files in separate files is unnecessary. In addition, the user program and the user can also be downloaded from the project file 42 to the programmable display 1 at a time. In addition, because the project files 4 2 are used for official data, various greed materials can be constructed according to their uses. In addition, although this embodiment has been described with respect to the example in which the stepped window 32al and the screen making window 3 2 b 1 are displayed on the same display 3 5, the present invention as shown in FIG. 36 is also applicable to a computer The network displays ladder windows and screen creation windows based on databases of different models. [Embodiment Mode 3] A third embodiment mode of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 37 to 49, and the contents are as follows. The first display / control system shown in FIG. 37 is the same as the display / control system of the aforementioned embodiment 1, and includes a programmable display 1 and a programmable controller 2. The computer device 3 connected to the programmable display 1 and the computer device 3 of the display / control system shown in FIG. 1 are provided with a central processing unit 31, an editing unit 3, a data file 3, a memory unit 3, and a display. 3 5, input device 3 6, external memory device 37 and interface section 38. The editing unit 32 includes a step editing unit 3 2 a, a day-time editing unit 3 2 b, and a copy function unit 3 2 g. Copy function section 32 g as a means of supplying information

第67頁 541447 五、發明說明(64) 系統的資料複製功能,在運用階梯編輯器32a所製作而成 的階梯圖中,將對應階梯記號的圖示在畫面製作視窗32bl 中,除了讓晝面編輯器自動的產生(繪製)以外,將該階 梯記號的附帶情報當作圖示的銘板情報(附帶情報)提供 給晝面編輯器32b。又,複製功能部32g同樣的利用操作系 統的資料複製功能,在運用畫面編輯器3 2 b所製作而成的 畫面中,將對圖示的應階梯記號在階梯視窗32al中,除了 讓階梯編輯器32a自動的產生(繪製)以外,並提供將該 圖示的銘板情報當作階梯記號的附帶情報。又,複製功能 部3 2 g將包含了階梯記號及與圖示共通之共通資料(變數 (變數名)及位址)的屬性資料,與附帶情報一併提供給 階梯編輯器3 2 a及晝面編輯器3 2 b。 具體來說,附帶情報的提供則是藉由設置於記憶體部 3 4之後述的剪貼薄CB,利用拖曳和拖放或者是複製和貼上 之功能來進行。 儲存於剪貼薄CB的資料構造如圖3 8所表示的是由台頭 編號(h e a d e r c 〇 d e )、記憶體大小、物件型態、予約、符 號數量(N )、位址情報(1〜N )及因予約而所構成。在這 之中,所謂的記憶體大小就是將資料儲存於剪貼薄C B中所 須要之記憶體容量。物件型態則是將元件儲存於剪貼薄CB 時對其預先設定物件種類。這個物件型態其設定有如圖3 8 (b )所表示的位元開關、跳動式開關、燈、數值顯示 器、柱狀圖表、圓形圖表、半圓形圖表、圓柱形圖表、計 數圖表及設定值顯示器等。位址情報則由如圖3 8 ( c )所Page 67 541447 V. Description of the invention (64) The data copy function of the system, in the ladder diagram created by using the ladder editor 32a, the icon corresponding to the ladder mark is displayed in the screen creation window 32bl, except for the day In addition to the automatic generation (drawing) of the editor, the incidental information of the step mark is provided to the day-time editor 32b as the nameplate information (incidental information) shown in the figure. The copy function unit 32g also uses the data copy function of the operating system. In the screen created by using the screen editor 3 2 b, the steps corresponding to the illustration are marked in the step window 32al, except that the steps are edited. In addition to the automatic generation (drawing) of the device 32a, it provides incidental information using the illustrated nameplate information as a step mark. In addition, the copy function section 3 2 g will include the attribute data of the ladder symbol and common data (variable (variable name) and address) common to the icon, and provide it to the ladder editor 3 2 a and the daylight together with the accompanying information Face Editor 3 2 b. Specifically, the provision of supplementary information is performed by using a scrapbook CB, which will be described later in the memory section 34, by using drag and drop or copy and paste functions. The data structure stored in the scrapbook CB is represented by the header number (header ocde), memory size, object type, appointment, number of symbols (N), address information (1 ~ N), and Constructed by appointment. Among them, the so-called memory size is the memory capacity required for storing data in the clipboard CB. The object type is to set the object type in advance when the component is stored in the scrapbook CB. This object type is set with bit switches, toggle switches, lights, numerical displays, bar charts, circular charts, semi-circular charts, cylindrical charts, counting charts and settings as shown in Figure 3 8 (b). Value display, etc. The address information is shown in Figure 3 8 (c)

第68頁 541447 五、發明說明(65) 表示的符號名、位址(位址名稱)、位址附加情報、變數 的註解、物件型態預約位元組數及依據予約所構成。位址 附帶情報則是有關符號的種類(整數符號、描述符號)之 情報。變數的註解是讓有關於變數的·各種註解與階梯記號 及圖示一併顯示。 對於在位址情報的物件型態須與和上述的物件型態内 容相同,並指定那一個位址對應那一個元件,因為如此只 有必要之元件的位元開關將開啟。 且,上述的複製功能部3 2 g可當作一個功能各別包含 於階梯編輯器3 2 a或者是晝面編輯器3 2 b的其中一方。 在資料檔案3 3中,例如圖3 9 ( a )所表示的,使用者 ® 程式將儲存於階梯檔案3 3 a中,如圖4 0 ( a )所表示的,使 用者晝面將儲存於畫面檔案3 3 b中。 階梯檔案3 3 a是由命令播案部3 3 a 1及共通資料播案部 3 3 a 2所構成。命令檔案部3 3 a 1是儲存對應所被輸入之階梯 記號的階梯指令及運算值,共通資料檔案部3 3 a2是為了對 應命令檔案部33al ,將針對上述階梯指令的裝置的變數名 及位址進行儲存。 畫面檔案33b是由圖形資料檔案部3 3bl及共通資料檔 案部3 3 b 2所構成的。圖形資料檔案部3 3 b 1則儲存了關於作 為圖示之元件的各種圖形(圓、線、四角形、文字列等)修 的資料。屬性資料檔案部3 3b 2是為了對應圖形資料檔案部 3 3 b 1 ,將針對所輸入之圖示的裝置的變數名及位址進行儲 存0Page 68 541447 V. Composition of symbolic name, address (address name), address additional information, variable comment, object type reserved byte number, and basis of appointment indicated by invention description (65). Address Ancillary information is information about the type of symbol (integer symbol, descriptive symbol). Variable annotations are displayed with various annotations related to variables, along with step marks and icons. The object type for the address information must be the same as the above object type content, and specify which address corresponds to which component, because so only the bit switches of the necessary components will be turned on. In addition, the above-mentioned copy function section 3 2 g may be included in one of the step editor 3 2 a or the day-and-day editor 3 2 b as one function. In the data file 33, for example, as shown in Figure 3 9 (a), the user® program will be stored in the ladder file 3 3a, as shown in Figure 40 (a), and the user will be stored in the daytime Picture file 3 3 b. The step file 3 3 a is composed of an order broadcasting section 3 3 a 1 and a common data broadcasting section 3 3 a 2. The command file section 3 3 a 1 stores the step instructions and calculation values corresponding to the inputted ladder symbols. The common data file section 3 3 a 2 is for the command file section 33 a1, which will change the variable names and bits of the device for the above-mentioned step instructions Address for storage. The screen file 33b is composed of a graphic data file section 3 3bl and a common data file section 3 3 b 2. The graphic data file department 3 3 b 1 stores data about the repair of various graphics (circles, lines, quadrilaterals, character lines, etc.) as components of the icon. The attribute data file section 3 3b 2 is corresponding to the graphic data file section 3 3 b 1, and stores the variable names and addresses of the devices entered in the illustrated diagram. 0

第69頁 541447 五、發明說明(66) 又,在畫面檔案部3 3 b中的元件情報,其詳細内容如 圖4 0 ( b )所表示的,運用包含位址、種類(〇 n )、種類 (off )、銘板(ο η )及銘板(〇 f f )的資料構造進行儲 存◦種類(ο η )及種類(〇 f f )是元件的圖形資料,以開 關為例時,運用被準備的1個或是數個的開關的元件編 號,來分別代表開啟(on )狀態及關閉(〇 f f )狀態。上 述的元件編號是附帶於各個元件部,例如運用英文字母和 數字的組合而成的編號。銘板(ο η )及銘板(〇 f f )是貼 附於圖示的銘板情報,這也是分別代表開啟(on )狀態及 關閉(〇 f f )狀態。 因階梯檔案3 3a及晝面檔案33b是藉由共通資料檔案部 3 3 a 2、3 3 b 2相互建立關聯性,因此在第1至第3的顯示/控 制系統中顯示動作及控制動作是相互具有關聯性的。 又,資料檔案3 3也可以如圖4 1所表示的,增設一個共 通資料庫3 3 d。該共通資料庫3 3 d則將應儲存於共通資料擋 案部33a、33b2的變數名及位址,和對應這些階梯記號及 圖示功能(開關、燈等)當作屬性資料包含於其中。這種 的共通資料庫33d如後述的,是被當作先在階梯編輯器32a 或者是畫面編輯器32b製作使用者程式或者是使用者晝面 時的共通資料的儲存部所設置的。 或者是,資料擋案3 3如圖4 2所表示的,也可將前述的 階梯檔案33a及晝面檔案33b統合的型態去除。該資料檔案 3 3是由命令檔案部3 3 e、圖形資料檔案部3 3 f及共通資料檔 案部3 3 g所構成的。在圖形資料檔案部3 3 f的"元件情報"如P.69 541447 V. Description of the invention (66) In addition, the component information in the screen file section 3 3 b is detailed as shown in FIG. 4 (b), including address, type (〇n), The type (off), nameplate (ο η), and nameplate (〇ff) are stored in the data structure. Type (ο η) and type (〇ff) are the graphic data of the component. When a switch is used as an example, the prepared The component numbers of one or several switches represent the on (on) state and the off (0ff) state, respectively. The above-mentioned component numbers are numbers attached to each component, for example, a combination of English letters and numbers. The name plate (ο η) and the name plate (〇 f f) are information of the name plate attached to the figure, which also represent the on state and the off (〇 f f) state, respectively. Since the step file 3 3a and the day-surface file 33b are related to each other through the common data file section 3 3 a 2, 3 3 b 2, the display actions and control actions in the first to third display / control systems are Interrelated. In addition, the data file 3 3 may be added with a common data base 3 3 d as shown in FIG. 41. The common database 3 3 d includes the variable names and addresses that should be stored in the common data archives 33a, 33b2, and corresponding ladder symbols and icon functions (switches, lights, etc.) as attribute data. Such a common database 33d is provided as described later, and is provided as a storage section for creating a user program in the step editor 32a or the screen editor 32b or a common data of the daytime user. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 4 2, the data file 33 can also be removed from the integrated type of the aforementioned step file 33a and daytime file 33b. The data file 33 is composed of an order file department 3 3e, a graphic data file department 3 3f, and a common data file department 3 3g. In the graphic data file department, 3 " component information " such as

第70頁 541447 五、發明說明(67) 前述,包含了圖4 0 ( b )所表示的詳細情報。採用該資料 檔案3 3時,運用複製功能部3 2 g所進行階梯檔案3 3 a及畫面 檔案3 3 b之間屬性資料的複製可不要。 圖4 3所表示第2的顯示/控制系統,和前述第1的顯示/ 控制系統相同,雖包含了可程式顯示器1及可程式控制器2 ,但是在此的顯可程式顯示器1之構成更具備了可程式控 制器之功能,可直接控制輸出入機器4。因為如此,可程 式顯示器1除了在記憶體部1 2中配備靜態隨機存儲器( S R A Μ ) 1 2 c以外,並具備了在前述的通訊控制器1 9中力口入 的輸出入裝置2 0及輸入/輸出(ί / 0 )控制界面2 1 。 圖4 4所表示的第3顯示/控制系統,是由依據作為開放Φ 式控制器的電腦裝置3所構成,並具備為了與輸出入機器4 連結,代替在前述第1的顯示/控制系統中的電腦裝置3之 界面部3 8的輸出入裝置3 9及輸入/輸出(I / 0 )控制界面 4 0 ° 又,電腦裝置3具備了與開放式電腦網路8連結的界面 裝置4 1 。 在此,針對在第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中的使用者 程式及使用者晝面的製作程序,參照圖45至圖46的流程圖 進行說明。 先執行程式設計處理(1 )時,執行與在實施型態2中 _ 的程序(參照圖2 8 )相同之處理。但是,在S 6 5的處理步 驟5將使用者程式登錄於資料檔案3 3的程序與實施型態2 不同。Page 70 541447 V. Description of the invention (67) The foregoing contains the detailed information shown in Figure 40 (b). When the data file 3 3 is used, the copy of the attribute data between the step file 3 3 a and the screen file 3 3 b by the copy function section 3 2 g is unnecessary. The second display / control system shown in FIG. 4 is the same as the first display / control system described above. Although the programmable display 1 and the programmable controller 2 are included, the configuration of the programmable display 1 is more detailed here. It has the function of a programmable controller, which can directly control the input and output of the machine 4. Because of this, the programmable display 1 is equipped with a static random access memory (SRAM) 1 2c in the memory section 12 and is provided with an input / output device 2 0 and a force input in the aforementioned communication controller 19. Input / output (ί / 0) control interface 2 1. The third display / control system shown in FIG. 4 is composed of a computer device 3 as an open Φ controller, and is provided to connect to the input / output device 4 instead of the first display / control system. The input / output device 39 and the input / output (I / 0) control interface 40 of the interface unit 38 of the computer device 3 are provided with an interface device 41 which is connected to the open computer network 8. Here, the user programs in the first to third display / control systems and the user's day-time production program will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figs. 45 to 46. When the program design process (1) is executed first, the same process as that of the program in the implementation mode 2 (see FIG. 28) is performed. However, the procedure of registering the user program in the data file 3 3 in the processing step 5 of S 6 5 is different from the implementation mode 2.

第71頁 541447 五、發明說明(68) 對於接著被執行的畫面製作,則依照圖4 5流程圖所表 示之程序來進行。 首先,判斷階梯視窗32al上的階梯記號是否有被滑鼠 等拖曳(S 1 0 1 ),如被拖曳呀,則判斷被拖曳的階梯記號 是否有被拖放至晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1上(S 1 0 2 )。在此,如 確認階梯記號確實有進行拖放,為了將針對被拖放的階梯 s己號的共通貢料抽出’在貢料禮条3 3的貪料庫(共通資料 檔案部3 3 a 2或3 3 g或者是共通資料庫3 3 d )中進行檢索作業 (S103 )。 接著,依據針對被拖贪的階梯記號所被分配的變數名 之功能,將會顯示包含具有該功能的複數的圖示之對話視 窗D1 (參照圖47(c) ) (S104)。之後,判斷是否有從 顯示於對話視窗D 1中的複數的圖示中選取一個圖示(S 1 0 5 )。如圖示有被選取時,則將該圖示瀏覽顯示(S1 0 6 ), 並將其登錄於檔案暫存區(S 1 0 7 )。接下來,順應著使用 者的操作來判斷晝面製作處理是否結束(S ] 0 8 )。在此, 如並未結束時其處理流程將返回至S 1 0 1 ,另一方面如果已 結束時,將所製作之使用者畫面登錄於資料檔案33中( S109 ) ° 而且,在製作使用者程式並將共通資料登錄至共通資 料檔案3 3 a 2或者是共通資料庫3 3d時,將共通資料在S 1 0 8 的步驟中登錄於資料暫存區,在S 1 0 9的步驟中儲存至共通 資料檔案部33b2。又,製作使用者程式並將共通資料登錄 至共通資料檔案部3 3 g時,將共通資料在S 1 0 8的步驟中登Page 71 541447 V. Description of the invention (68) For the screen creation to be executed next, follow the procedure shown in the flowchart in Fig. 4.5. First, determine whether the step mark on the step window 32al has been dragged by a mouse or the like (S 1 0 1). If it has been dragged, determine whether the dragged step mark has been dragged onto the daytime production window 3 2 b 1 Up (S 1 0 2). Here, if it is confirmed that the ladder mark is actually dragged and dropped, in order to extract the common tribute material for the dragged ladder s' in the tribute material library 3 3 (common data archives department 3 3 a 2 Or 3 3 g or a common database 3 3 d) to perform a search operation (S103). Next, a dialog window D1 (see FIG. 47 (c)) including a plurality of icons having the function will be displayed according to the function of the variable name assigned to the dragged staircase mark (S104). After that, it is determined whether one icon is selected from the plural icons displayed in the dialog window D 1 (S 1 0 5). If an icon is selected, the icon is browsed and displayed (S1 0 6), and registered in the file temporary storage area (S 1 0 7). Next, according to the user's operation, it is judged whether or not the day-to-day production process is finished (S) 0 8). Here, if it is not finished, its processing flow will return to S 1 0 1. On the other hand, if it is finished, the created user screen will be registered in the data file 33 (S109). Program and register the common data to the common data file 3 3 a 2 or the common database 3 3d, the common data is registered in the data temporary area in the step of S 1 0 8 and stored in the step of S 1 0 9 To the Common Data Archives Department 33b2. When creating a user program and registering common data to the common data file department 3 3 g, the common data is registered in the step S 108.

第72頁 541447 五、發明說明(69) 錄於資料暫存區,在S109的步驟中儲存至圖形資料檔案部 33f 。 又,S 1 0 3至S 1 0 6的處理是為了提供使用者在選擇圖示 時,有其相當之自由度所設置的。因此,如不須要該自由 度,只要將圖示固定為一個種類,S 1 0 3至S 1 0 6的處理即可 省略。這種情況,例如將被固定的開關的編號資料(元件 編號)預先登錄於資料庫中。 在此,針對運用圖4 5流程圖的程序進行晝面製作處理 (2 )的具體範例進行說明。 首先,如圖4 7 ( a )所表示的,階梯視窗3 2 a 1上早已 繪製好運用階梯編輯器3 2 a,所繪製的代表開關(輸入) 的階梯記號L和燈(輸出)的階梯記號L ’ 。隨著上述因 素,資料檔案3 3如圖4 8所表示的,登錄著有關於開關及燈 的資料。更具體來說,關於開關最少也登錄當作資料檔案 的變數名n S W Γ及位址的π X B 0 0 0 1 π 。又,關於燈最少則登 錄了當作共通資料的變數名nLAMPl"及位址的1' ΥΒ 0 0 0 1 Π 。 在這個狀態中,如圖4 7 ( a )所表示的將畫面製作視 窗3 2 b 1開啟。接著在階梯視窗3 2 a 1中之階梯記號L拖曳及 拖放至晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1時,如圖4 7 ( b )所表示的,對 話視窗D 1將顯示於晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1上。 又,階梯記號L被拖曳時,如圖4 8所表示的,針對從 階梯檔案33al (共通資料庫33d或者是共通資料檔案部33g )中所抽出的開關的共通資料將暫時的保存於剪貼薄CB。 接著,階梯記號L被拖曳時,共通資料將從剪貼薄CB授予 sIP ls^ Λ!*/ t*K '- ,.,τ—4 ·1 <^· 1Page 72 541447 V. Description of the invention (69) Recorded in the temporary storage area of the data, and stored in the graphic data file department 33f in step S109. The processing from S 103 to S 106 is set to provide the user with a considerable degree of freedom when selecting an icon. Therefore, if this degree of freedom is not required, as long as the illustration is fixed to one type, the processing from S 103 to S 106 can be omitted. In this case, for example, the number data (component number) of the fixed switch is registered in the library in advance. Here, a specific example of daytime surface creation processing (2) using the program of the flowchart of FIG. 45 will be described. First, as shown in Figure 4 7 (a), the ladder window 3 2 a 1 has already been drawn using the ladder editor 3 2 a. The drawn ladder symbol L representing the switch (input) and the ladder of the lamp (output) are drawn. Symbol L '. With the above factors, the data file 33 is registered with the data about the switches and lights as shown in Fig. 48. More specifically, the switch also registers at least the variable name n S W Γ and the address π X B 0 0 0 1 π as the data file. In addition, regarding the minimum number of lights, the variable name nLAMPl " and the address 1 'ΥΒ 0 0 0 1 Π, which are common information, are registered. In this state, the picture creation window 3 2 b 1 is opened as shown in FIG. 4 7 (a). Then, drag and drop the step symbol L in the step window 3 2 a 1 to the day-side production window 3 2 b 1, as shown in FIG. 4 7 (b), the dialog window D 1 will be displayed in the day-side production window 3 2 b 1 on. When the ladder symbol L is dragged, as shown in FIG. 48, the common data for the switches extracted from the ladder file 33al (the common database 33d or the common data archive section 33g) will be temporarily saved in the scrapbook. CB. Next, when the ladder mark L is dragged, the common data will be awarded from the scrapbook CB to sIP ls ^ Λ! * / T * K '-,., Τ—4 · 1 < ^ · 1

KiiK齡 iii h__ΓΙΝ1¾¾ ΕϋΒfssf: 丨—\KiiKage iii h__ΓΙΝ1¾¾ ΕϋΒfssf: 丨 — \

第73頁 541447 五、發明說明(70) 畫面編輯器32b,畫面編輯器32b則依據該共通資料顯示有 關於開關的對話視窗D 1 。 對話視窗D 1中具有開關功能的數個種類中的圖示中, 選擇一個適當的圖示,如圖4 7 ( c )所表示,除了所被選 擇到之圖示的影像Μ瀏覽顯示於畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1以外, 包含著銘板情報(銘板n S W 1 π )的對話視窗D 4將一併顯示 。在此,如壓下Ο Κ按鈕時,即確認了畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1上 的圖示Μ及屬性資料。因此,如圖4 8所表示的,針對開關 圖示Μ的圖形資料(元件情報)及共通資料將會被建立其 關聯性並儲存於晝面檔案3 3 b的圖形資料檔案部3 3 b 1及共 通資料檔案部33b2。 如資料檔案3 3為圖4 2所表示之構成時,因為關於使用 者程式及使用者晝面的共通資料,早已儲存於資料檔案3 3 中,由剪貼薄C B所授予畫面編輯器3 2 b之共通資料,只會 儲存到圖形資料檔案部3 3 f。 這樣的結果,如圖4 7 ( d)所表示的,包含著銘板n S W 1 π 的開關之圖示Μ 1將被繪製於晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1上。又, 對於燈方面也進行和前述操作相同之動作時,將包含著銘 板ΠLAMP1Π的開關之圖示M2將被繪製於畫面製作視窗32bl 上。 因此,使用者可免除在階梯視窗3 2 a 1上繪製開關的階 梯記號之作業,和進行輸入必要的共通資料作業,可相當 容易的製作出使用者程式。又,製作使用者畫面時,重新 輸入銘板情報的必要將消失。Page 73 541447 V. Description of the invention (70) The screen editor 32b, and the screen editor 32b displays a dialog window D 1 on the switch according to the common information. Among the several types of icons with switch functions in the dialog window D1, select an appropriate icon, as shown in Fig. 4 7 (c). In addition to the selected icon, the image M is displayed on the screen. In addition to the production windows 3 2 b 1, a dialog window D 4 containing nameplate information (nameplate n SW 1 π) is displayed together. Here, when the 0K button is pressed, the icon M and attribute data on the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 are confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48, the graphic data (component information) and common data for the switch icon M will be related and stored in the graphic data file section 3 3 b 1 of the daytime file 3 3 b. And Common Information Archives Department 33b2. For example, when the data file 3 3 has the structure shown in FIG. 4, the common data about the user program and the user ’s day and night has already been stored in the data file 3 3 and was awarded to the screen editor 3 2 b by the scrapbook CB. The common data will only be saved to the graphics data file department 3 3 f. Such a result, as shown in FIG. 4 (d), a diagram M 1 including a switch of the name plate n S W 1 π will be drawn on the day-time production window 3 2 b 1. When the same operation is performed on the lamp, the icon M2 including the switch of the nameplate ΠLAMP1Π will be drawn on the screen creation window 32bl. Therefore, the user can dispense with the operation of drawing the step marks of the switch on the step window 3 2 a 1 and the operation of inputting the necessary common data, and the user program can be made relatively easily. When creating user screens, the need to re-enter nameplate information disappears.

第74頁 541447 五、發明說明(71) 另一方面,先進行晝面製作處理(1 )時,執行與在 實施型態2中的程序(參照圖30)相同之處理。但是,在 S 8 5步驟中,將使用者晝面登錄於資料檔案3 3之作業是與 實施型態2的程序不同。 對於繼續執行的程式設計製作處理(2),依照圖46 之流程圖所表示之流程進行。 首先,判斷畫面製作視窗32bl上的圖示是否有被拖曳 (S 1 1 1 ),如被拖曳時,則判斷被拖曳的圖示是否有被拖 放至階梯視窗3 2 a 1上(S 1 1 2 )。在此,如確認圖示確實有 進行拖放,為了將針對被拖放的圖示的共通資料抽出,在 資料檔案3 3的資料庫(影像資料檔案部3 3 b 1或者是3 3 f ) 中進行共通資料的檢索(S 1 1 3 )。 接著,依據包含於針對被拖食的圖示的屬性資料中之 功能,將會顯示除了對應該功能的階梯記號以外,上述的 共通資料(最少也必須有變數名)也將一併顯示(S 1 1 4 ) 。之後,將所顯示之階梯記號登錄於檔案暫存區(S115) 。接下來,順應著使用者的操作來判斷程式設計處理是否 結束(S 1 1 6 )。在此,如並未結束時其處理流程將返回至 S ] 1 2 ,另一方面如果已結束時,將所製作之使用者程式登 錄於資料檔案33中(S117)。 而且,在製作使用者晝面並將共通資料登錄至共通資 料檔案33b2或者是共通資料庫33d時,將共通資料在S115 的步驟中登錄於資料暫存區,在S 1 1 7的步驟中儲存至共通 資料檔案部3 3 a 2。又,製作使用者畫面並將共通資料登錄P.74 541447 V. Description of the invention (71) On the other hand, when the day surface preparation processing (1) is performed first, the same processing as the procedure in the implementation mode 2 (see FIG. 30) is performed. However, in step S85, the operation of registering the user to the data file 33 in the day and time is different from the procedure of the implementation mode 2. As for the program design creation processing (2) that continues to be executed, the process shown in the flowchart in FIG. 46 is performed. First, determine whether the icon on the screen creation window 32bl has been dragged (S 1 1 1). If it is dragged, determine whether the dragged icon has been dragged onto the ladder window 3 2 a 1 (S 1 1 2). Here, if it is confirmed that the icon is actually dragged and dropped, in order to extract the common data for the dragged and dropped icon, in the database of the data file 3 3 (the image data file department 3 3 b 1 or 3 3 f) A common data search is performed (S 1 1 3). Next, according to the functions contained in the attribute data of the icon for the dragged food, in addition to the step marks corresponding to the functions, the above-mentioned common data (at least also a variable name) will also be displayed (S 1 1 4). After that, the displayed ladder mark is registered in the file temporary storage area (S115). Next, it is determined whether the programming process is completed in accordance with the user's operation (S 1 1 6). If it is not finished, the processing flow will return to S] 1 2. On the other hand, if it is finished, the created user program will be registered in the data file 33 (S117). Moreover, when creating a user's day and registering the common data to the common data file 33b2 or the common database 33d, the common data is registered in the data temporary area in step S115 and stored in step S 1 1 7 To the Common Data Archives Department 3 3 a 2. Create user screen and register common data

第75頁 541447 五、發明說明(72) 至共通資料擋案部3 3 g時,將共通資料在S 1 1 5的步驟中登 錄於資料暫存區,在S 1 1 7的步驟中儲存至命令檔案部 33e ° 在此,針對運用圖4 6流程圖的程序進行程式設計處理 (2 )的具體範例進行說明。 首先,如圖49 (a)所表示的,畫面製作視窗32bl上 早已配置好運用晝面編輯器3 2 b,所繪製的代表開關(輸 入)的圖示Μ和銘板n S W 1 π 。隨著上述因素,資料檐案3 3如 圖5 0所表示的,最少也登錄著有關於開關的資料。更具體 來說,關於開關最少也登錄了當作變數資料的變數名的 n SW1"及位址的3:6 0 0 0 1 "。 在這個狀態中,如圖4 9 ( a )所表示的將階梯視窗 3 2 a 1開啟。接著,將在晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1中之圖示Μ拖曳 及拖放至階梯視窗3 2 a 1時,如圖4 9 ( a )所表示的,除了 將對應開關的功能的階梯記號L繪製於階梯編輯器3 2 a 1 , 並顯示包含註解等的附帶情報(n SW1 ")的對話視窗D5。 又,圖示Μ被拖曳時,如圖5 0所表示的,將從晝面稽 案3 3 b (影像資料檔案部3 3 b 1 )中所抽出針對開關的位址 及銘板情報暫時的保存於剪貼薄CB。接著,圖示Μ被拖曳 (Ρ83 )日夺,共通資料將從剪貼薄C Β授予階梯編輯器3 2 a。 階梯編輯器3 2 a則顯示關於依據該位址及銘板情報所配置 _ 於開關的階梯記號(L D命令)的對話視窗D 1。 在此,如壓下Ο K按鈕時,即確認了階梯視窗3 2 a 1上的 階梯記號L及屬性資料。因此,如圖5 0所表示的,針對對P.75 541447 V. Description of the invention (72) When the common data filing department 3 3g, the common data is registered in the data temporary storage area in step S 1 1 5 and stored in step 1 1 7 to Command file section 33e ° Here, a specific example of programming processing (2) using the program of the flowchart in FIG. 46 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the screen creation window 32bl is already equipped with the daytime editor 3 2b, and the icon M and the nameplate n S W 1 π of the representative switch (input) are drawn. With the above factors, the data eaves case 33 is shown in Fig. 50, and at least the data about the switch is also registered. More specifically, the switch has at least n SW1 ", which is a variable name, and address 3: 6 0 0 0 1 ", which are variable data, registered. In this state, the stepped window 3 2 a 1 is opened as shown in FIG. 4 9 (a). Next, when dragging and dropping the icon M in the daytime production window 3 2 b 1 to the step window 3 2 a 1, as shown in FIG. 4 9 (a), except for the step mark corresponding to the function of the switch L is drawn on the step editor 3 2 a 1, and a dialog window D5 including annotated information (n SW1 ") is displayed. In addition, when the icon M is dragged, as shown in FIG. 50, the address and nameplate information for the switch extracted from the day-to-day audit case 3 3b (the image data file section 3 3 b 1) is temporarily stored. For scrapbook CB. Next, the icon M is dragged (P83), and the common data is given to the step editor 3 2 a from the scrapbook C Β. The ladder editor 3 2 a displays a dialog window D 1 about the ladder mark (LD command) assigned to the switch according to the address and nameplate information. Here, when the 0K button is pressed, the step mark L and attribute data on the step window 3 2 a 1 are confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG.

第76頁 541447 五、發明說明(73) 應開關的階梯記號L的命令及屬性資料將會被建立其關聯 性並儲存於階梯檔案3 3 a的命令檔案部3 3 a 1及共通資料檔 案部3 3 a 2 。 這樣的結果,如圖4 9 ( c )所表示的,包含著作為開 關的名稱"S W 1 "的階梯記號L將被繪製於階梯視窗3 2 a 1上。 因此,使用者可免除在階梯視窗3 2 a 1上繪製開關的階 梯記號之作業,和進行輸入必要的屬性資料作業,可相當 容易的製作出使用者程式。又,製作使用者畫面時,重新 輸入關於對應階梯記號的輸出入機器4的名稱和階梯記號 的註解其必要性將消失。 又,作為階梯檔案3 3 a並採用如圖3 9 ( b )所表示的檔 案時,如上方所敘述的,可將銘板情報配置給階梯記號。 該階梯檔案3 3 a是,常被不採用變數的一般階梯編輯器所 使用,並具有儲存對應這些階梯指令、運算值的註解(附 帶情報)的區域。因此,使用該階梯檔案3 3 a時,隨著圖 示Μ的拖良及拖放,從影像資料檔案部3 3 b 1抽出的位址及 銘板情報將各別複製於運算值及註解的區域中。 且,如圖3 9 ( b )所表示的,將登錄於階梯檔案3 3 a的 註解配置給圖示的銘板情報時,運用和上述之情況相反的 程序來進行處理。這時,上述的註解和銘板情報一起被當 作變數名儲存於共通資料檔案部33b2中。 如上述,與本實施型態相關的第1至第3的顯示/控制 系統之構成為,運用複製功能部3 2 g,除了將階梯記號的 屬性資料複製至晝面檔案3 3 b以外,並將圖示的屬性資料Page 76 541447 V. Description of the invention (73) The order and attribute data of the ladder mark L that should be switched will be established and stored in the ladder file 3 3 a 3 3 a 1 and the common data file department 3 3 a 2. Such a result, as shown in Fig. 49 (c), the step symbol L containing the name of the switch "S W 1" will be drawn on the step window 3 2 a 1. Therefore, the user can dispense with the operation of drawing the step marks of the switch on the step window 3 2 a 1 and the operation of inputting the necessary attribute data, and the user program can be made relatively easily. When creating a user screen, it is no longer necessary to re-enter the name of the input / output device 4 corresponding to the step symbol and the step symbol. In addition, when the step file 3 3 a is used as shown in FIG. 3 9 (b), as described above, the nameplate information can be assigned to the step mark. This ladder file 3 3a is an area commonly used by general ladder editors that do not use variables, and has a comment (with information) corresponding to these ladder instructions and operation values. Therefore, when the ladder file 3 3 a is used, the address and nameplate information extracted from the image data file section 3 3 b 1 will be copied to the calculated value and annotation area as the icon M is dragged and dropped. in. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), when the annotation registered in the step file 33a is allocated to the nameplate information shown in the figure, the process is performed using a procedure opposite to that described above. At this time, the above-mentioned annotations are stored together with the nameplate information as variables in the common data file section 33b2. As described above, the configuration of the first to third display / control systems related to this embodiment mode is to use the copy function section 3 2 g, in addition to copying the attribute data of the step marks to the daytime file 3 3 b, and Attribute data

第77頁 541447 五、發明說明(74) 複製至階梯檔 有共通之屬性 性。 又,各顯 包含於被製作 配置給在使用 者晝面的圖示 梯記號所構成 者晝面時,輸 報的必要將消 化,,並可以防 圖示,輸入不 又,上述 輯器的共通資 易的進行附帶 數名當作附帶 理將可更簡單 示的運用了不 中一般的階梯 間附帶情報的 且5本實 者是使用者晝 者程式的範例 。例如,在早 案33a中。因此,兩個才當案33a 、33b可以持 資料,和可容易的建立兩個播案間之關聯 示/控制系統是由運用複製功能3 2g,除了將 而成之使用者程式的階梯記號的附帶情報, 者畫面的圖示,將包含於被製作而成之使用 所附帶的銘板情報,作為附帶情報配置給階 的。因此,在製作使用者程式時及製作使用 入各個階梯記號的附帶情報及圖示的銘板情 失。因為如此,除了可以讓其輸入操作簡單 止在對應相同的輸出入機器4的階梯記號和 同的附帶情報。 的各個顯示/控制系統藉由剪貼薄C B授予編 料中因包含了附帶情報,在該編輯器中可容 情報和階梯記號及圖示的配置。且,因將變 情報來使用,情報因而被共通化,資料的管 化。且,階梯編輯器3 2 a如為圖3 9 ( b )所表 包含變數名的階梯檔案33a的從前普及市場 編輯、日寸,也可以進行和畫面編輯裔3 2 b之 存取。 施型態雖是依據被製作而成的使用者程式或 面,針對製作各別的使用者畫面或者是使用 來進行說明,但並不限定本發明之使用範圍 已製作而成的使用者程式和使用者畫面之間Page 77 541447 V. Description of the invention (74) Copy to ladder file has common attributes. In addition, when each display is included in the daytime surface of the user who is made up of the icon ladder symbol on the daytime surface of the user, the need to lose the report will be digested, and the icon can be prevented from being input. The implementation of Ziyi's additional number as an incidental will make it easier to use the less common step-by-step incidental information, and the 5 real examples are examples of the user's day program. For example, in case 33a. Therefore, the two talented cases 33a, 33b can hold data, and can easily establish the relationship between the two broadcasts. The display / control system is implemented by using the copy function 3 2g, except for the ladder mark of the user program that will be formed. Incidental information, the icon of the user's screen will be included in the information on the nameplate attached to the created application, and will be assigned to the order. Therefore, it is not possible to create a user program and a nameplate with information and icons that use each step mark. Because of this, in addition to making the input operation simple, the ladder symbol corresponding to the same input / output machine 4 and the same incidental information can be used. Each of the display / control systems of the system is provided by the scrapbook C B. The material contains incidental information, and the editor can accommodate information and the arrangement of ladder marks and icons. In addition, because the information is used differently, the information is shared and the data is managed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the ladder editor 3 2a includes variable names of the ladder file 33a, which was previously used for market editing and editing, and can also be accessed by the screen editor 3 2 b. Although the application type is based on the created user program or surface, the description is made for the creation of individual user screens or use, but it does not limit the user program and the user program that have been created. Between user screens

第78頁 541447 五、發明說明(7 5) ,進行拖良和拖放或者是複製和貼上的操作時,只有進行 附帶情報的存取之功能也包含在本發明中。 【實施型態4】 針對本發明的第4的實施型態,如依據圖5 1至圖6 1來 進行說明,其内容如下。 圖5 1所表示的第1的顯示/控制系統和前述的實施型態 1的顯示/控制系統(參照圖1 )相同,包含了可程式顯示 器1及可程式控制器2。 與可程式顯示器1連結的電腦裝置3和圖1所表示的顯 示/控制系統的電腦裝置3相同,具備有中央處理器3 1 、編# 輯部3 2、資料檔案3 3、記憶體部3 4、顯示器3 5、輸入裝置 3 6、外部記憶裝置3 7及界面部3 8。 編輯部3 2部則包含了階梯編輯器3 2 a、晝面編輯器3 2 b 及變數管理部32h。 作為登錄手段的變數管理部32h是將階梯指令及圖示 的代表功能(開關、燈、計時器、計數器等)當作功能屬 性,賦予從階梯編輯器3 2 a及晝面編輯器3 2 b所輸入之變數 ,並以此型態登錄於資料檔案33。 作為登錄變數的方法,可以舉出下列2個方法範例。 第1個方法是從準備於階梯編輯器3 2 a的階梯指令群組ι|| 中選擇所想要的階梯指令時,將會顯示為了登錄變數的畫 面(如,後述的圖52 (b)的對話視窗),將其變數進行 登錄。第2個方法是,首先先將變數進行登錄,在那之後P.78 541447 V. Description of the Invention (7 5) When dragging and dropping, or copying and pasting, only functions with access to information are included in the present invention. [Embodiment Mode 4] The fourth embodiment mode of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 51 to 61, and the contents are as follows. The first display / control system shown in FIG. 51 is the same as the display / control system of the first embodiment (see FIG. 1), and includes a programmable display 1 and a programmable controller 2. The computer device 3 connected to the programmable display 1 and the computer device 3 of the display / control system shown in FIG. 1 are provided with a central processing unit 3 1, an editing unit 3, a data file 3 3, and a memory unit 3. 4. Display 3 5. Input device 3 6. External memory device 37 and interface section 38. The editing section 32 includes a step editor 32 a, a day editor 3 2 b, and a variable management section 32h. The variable management unit 32h, which is a registration means, takes the ladder instructions and the representative functions (switches, lights, timers, counters, etc.) of the diagram as function attributes, and assigns them to the ladder editor 3 2 a and the day and time editor 3 2 b The entered variables are registered in the data file 33 in this form. As a method of registering a variable, the following two method examples can be cited. The first method is to select a desired ladder instruction from the ladder instruction group ι || prepared in the ladder editor 3 2 a, and a screen for registering variables will be displayed (eg, FIG. 52 (b) described later) Dialog window), register its variables. The second method is to register the variables first, and after that,

第79頁 541447 五、發明說明(7 6) 所輸入之階梯指令再與已登錄之變數進行配置。 又,將功能屬性賦予變數之方法,可以舉出下列2個 方法範例。 第]個方法是將預約語包含於其變數中,即可將功能 屬性賦予變數。具體來說,將像nS****n (*字代表 著任意文字和數字)包含S預約語在前方之變數作為開關 變數。相同的,將包含了L、T、C等的預约語在前方之變 數各別當作燈變數、計時器變數、計數器變數。 說 定 型 "S 要 閉 時 型 功 述 第2個方法是讓變數具有該功能屬性之方法。具體來 ,如圖52 (a)所表示的,將針對被輸入的變數之名稱 型、保持、總體(g 1 〇 b a 1 )及功能進行設定。這些的設 ,是在如圖5 2 ( b )所表示的對話視窗上所被執行的。 及功能則是由所準備的數個選項中進行選擇。 所謂名稱則是變數的名稱,針對某個開關設定如 W 1 π 。所謂的型則是代表著變數的型,可順應各項功能 素進行設定。如對於開關和燈的進行開啟(ON )、關 (OFF )動作之功能要素,將其型設定為"位元π ,如計 器和計數器針對數值進行的計數動作之功能要素,將其 設定為η整數π 。又5對於類似碼表計測值的顯示動作之 能要素,將其型設定為π實數π。作為功能則已準備了前 的開關、燈、計時器、計數器等。 所謂的保持是,在斷電時上述的資料是否保持之設定 。如設定為保持時將會至查證箱(c h e c k b ο X )進行查證 動作。總體(g 1 o b a 1 )則是進行了功能屬性登錄的編輯器Page 79 541447 V. Description of the invention (7 6) The ladder instruction input is configured with the registered variables. Examples of the method for assigning a functional attribute to a variable include the following two method examples. The first method is to include the reserved words in its variables, and the functional attributes can be assigned to the variables. Specifically, a variable such as nS **** n (* stands for any character and number) including the S reservation word in front is used as a switch variable. Similarly, the variables in front of the reserved words including L, T, C, etc. are each regarded as a lamp variable, a timer variable, and a counter variable. The second method is to make the variable have the function attribute. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the name, type, hold, total (g 1 0 b a 1) and function of the input variable will be set. These settings are performed on the dialog window shown in Figure 5 2 (b). And functions are selected from several options prepared. The so-called name is the name of the variable, which is set to W 1 π for a certain switch. The so-called type is a type that represents variables and can be set according to various functional elements. For example, for the function elements of the ON and OFF actions of switches and lights, set their types to " bit π, and for the function elements of counting actions of counters and counters for numerical values, set them to η is an integer π. In addition, for a display element similar to a stopwatch measurement value, its type is set to π real number π. As functions, the front switches, lights, timers, and counters are prepared. The so-called hold is the setting of whether the above data is held when the power is off. If set to hold, verification will be performed in the verification box (c h e c k b ο X). The overall (g 1 o b a 1) is an editor that has registered the functional attributes

—is niii HI I1M i v—丨^Ίβ 「 43-: uvtinl=--Is niii HI I1M i v— 丨 ^ Ίβ 「43-: uvtinl =

nj';nj ';

i^iini ^ iin

第80頁 541447 五、發明說明(77) (如階梯編輯器33a)和應用軟體(如晝面編輯器33b)之 間,是否共同享有所登錄之變數的設定。如共同享有時, 同樣也是必須至查證箱(c h e c k b ο X )進行查證動作。如 總體(g丨〇 b a 1 )並未被設定時,變數將無法匯入至其他的 應用軟體中。 且,上述的保持及總體(g 1 〇 b a 1 )是依據其需求才進 行設定。 又,變數管理部3 2 h從階梯指令和元件等來的功能屬 性如規定為一個定義時,惟有運用變數被輸入時進行功能 屬性設定。在這種情況下,依據使用者所進行的功能屬性 登錄將可不要。 上述的變數管理部3 2 h,將登錄於資料檔案3 3的變數 採用每個功能的目錄形式顯示於後述的階梯視窗3 2 a 1及晝 面製作視窗3 2 b 1上。具體來說,如圖5 3所表示的,運用設 置於各個功能的??形型來構成變數目錄。對於該變數目錄 ,如開關的變數中則包含了順應開關的種類如n S W 1M 、 "S W 2 " .....n SWnn數個的變數。 作為變數目錄,上述的變數目錄以外,不拘功能以一 覽表的方式來顯示也可以。這樣的變數目錄,將可掌握之 功能屬性與變數合併的功能屬性資料(功能、變數的型等 )將被顯示。 也就是說,變數目錄只要是選擇其中必要的變數來組 成,其使用任何的型態階可。但是如上述之範例,讓其容 易選擇變數之構成較合乎理想。Page 80 541447 V. Description of the invention (77) (such as the step editor 33a) and application software (such as the day and night editor 33b), whether to share the registered variable settings. If it is shared, it is also necessary to go to the verification box (c h e c k b ο X) for verification. If the total (g 丨 〇 b a 1) is not set, the variables cannot be imported into other application software. In addition, the maintenance and the total (g 1 0 b a 1) described above are set according to their needs. In addition, when the variable management unit 3 2h defines the functional attributes from the step instructions and components as a definition, it only sets the functional attributes when the operating variables are input. In this case, registration based on the function attribute performed by the user is not necessary. The above-mentioned variable management section 3 2 h displays the variables registered in the data file 33 in the form of a catalogue for each function on a step window 3 2 a 1 and a daytime creation window 3 2 b 1 described later. Specifically, as shown in Figure 5-3, what are the application settings for each function? ? Shape to form a variable directory. For this variable directory, for example, the variable of the switch contains several types of compliant switches such as n S W 1M, " S W 2 " ..... n SWnn. As the variable list, other than the above-mentioned variable list, a non-limiting function may be displayed as a list. In such a variable catalog, functional attribute data (function, type of variable, etc.) that combines the graspable functional attributes and variables will be displayed. In other words, as long as the variable list is composed by selecting the necessary variables, it can use any type of order. However, as in the example above, it is more desirable to make it easier to choose the composition of the variables.

541447 五、發明說明(78) 又,作為顯示手段的變數管理部3 2 h,是由上述變數 目錄中,例如運用滑鼠的按鍵操作所選取之變數,將其拖 曳至階梯視窗32al及畫面製作視窗32bl上的輸入可能領域 ,且將其拖放後,階梯編輯器3 2 a及晝面編輯器3 2 b將在階 梯視窗3 2 a 1及畫面視窗3 2 b 1中的拖放位置上,自動產生( 繪製)階梯記號及圖示。 且,上述的變數管理部3 2 h可以是階梯編輯器3 2 a或者 是晝面編輯器3 2 b的其中一方的一個功能或者是作為兩個 編輯器3 2 a、3 2 b所共通的一個功能各別包含於各個編輯器 中 〇 對於資料檔案3 3來說,例如,如圖5 4所表示的使用者Φ 程式儲存於階梯檔案3 3 a中,如圖5 5所表示的使用者畫面 儲存於晝面檔案33b中。 階梯檔案3 3 a是由命令檔案部3 3 a 1及變數資料檔案部 3 3 a 2所構成的。命令檔案部3 3 a 1是儲存對應所輸入的階梯 記號的階梯指令及運算值,變數資料檔案部33a2為了對應 命令檔案部3 3 a 1針對上述的階梯指令,將裝置的變數及位 址進行儲存。又,變數資料檔案部3 3 a 2是將藉由變數管理 部3 2 h所登錄的功能屬性與變數一起保存。 晝面檔案33b是由圖形資料檔案部33bl及變數資料檔 案部3 3b2所構成的。圖形資料檔案部33bl則儲存了各種圖 形(圓、線、四角形等),文字(文字列),關於元件等 的資料。變數資料檔案部33b2是為了對應圖形資料檔案部 3 3 b 1 ,將針對所輸入之圖示進行裝置的變數及位址的儲存541447 V. Description of the invention (78) In addition, the variable management unit 3 2 h as a display means is a variable selected from the above variable list, for example, by using a mouse button operation, and dragged to the ladder window 32al and screen creation Enter the possible fields on window 32bl, and drag and drop them, and the step editor 3 2 a and day editor 3 2 b will be at the drag position in the step window 3 2 a 1 and the screen window 3 2 b 1 , Automatically generate (draw) ladder marks and icons. In addition, the above-mentioned variable management unit 3 2 h may be a function of one of the step editor 3 2 a or the day and day editor 3 2 b, or may be common to the two editors 3 2 a and 3 2 b. A function is included in each editor. For the data file 3 3, for example, the user shown in Figure 5 Φ The program is stored in the ladder file 3 3 a, as shown in Figure 5 5 The picture is stored in the daytime file 33b. The step file 3 3 a is composed of a command file section 3 3 a 1 and a variable data file section 3 3 a 2. The command file section 3 3 a 1 stores the step instructions and calculation values corresponding to the input ladder symbols. The variable data file section 33 a 2 corresponds to the command file section 3 3 a 1 to perform the above-mentioned step instructions on the device variables and addresses. Save. The variable data file section 3 3 a 2 stores the function attributes registered with the variable management section 3 2 h together with the variables. The daytime file 33b is composed of a graphic data file section 33bl and a variable data file section 3 3b2. The graphic data file department 33bl stores data of various graphics (circles, lines, quadrangles, etc.), characters (character columns), and components. The variable data file section 33b2 is to correspond to the graphic data file section 3 3 b 1, and the device's variables and addresses will be stored for the entered icons.

第82頁 541447 五、發明說明(79) 。又,變數資料檔案部33b2是將藉由變數管理部32h所登 錄關於功能屬性的資料與變數一起保存。 對於資料檔案33來說,運用各別形成的階梯檔案33a 及畫面檔案33b時,藉由變數管理部32h將預先登錄於變數 資料檔案部3 3 a 2或者是3 3 b 2的變數及與該功能屬性相關之 資料匯入至如後述的另一個方面。 階梯檔案3 3a及晝面檔案3 3 b因藉由保存於變數資料檔 案部3 3 a 2、3 3 b 2的變數及該功能屬性所相互建立的關聯性 ,所以在第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中的顯示動作及控制 動作是相互關聯的。 或者是,資料檔案3 3如圖5 6所表示的,其構成也可將 前述的階梯檔案3 3 a及晝面檔案3 3 b統合的型態去除,再將 使用者程式及使用者晝面儲存。該資料檔案3 3是由命令檔 案部3 3h、圖形資料檔案部3 3 i及變數資料檔案部3 3 j所構 成的。 運用該資料檔案3 3時,藉由變數管理部3 2 h在階梯檔 案33a及畫面檔案33b之間的變數資料(包含變數及與該功 能屬性相關之資料以及位址)將與使用者程式及使用者畫 面共通並保存。因為如此5與採用前述的階梯檔案3 3 a及 畫面檔案33b的情況相同,在兩個檔案33a、33b間將變數 貪料隆入之必要性將 >肖失。 圖5 7所表示第2的顯示/控制系統,和前述第1的顯示/ 控制系統相同,雖包含了可程式顯示器1及可程式控制器2 ,但是在此的顯可程式顯示器1之構成更具備了可程式控Page 82 541447 V. Description of the Invention (79). Further, the variable data file unit 33b2 stores the data on the functional attributes registered by the variable management unit 32h together with the variables. For the data file 33, when the separately formed step file 33a and screen file 33b are used, the variable management section 32h registers the variables registered in the variable data file section 3 3 a 2 or 3 3 b 2 in advance and the same The data related to the functional attributes are imported into another aspect as described later. The step file 3 3a and the day-surface file 3 3 b are related to each other through the variables and the functional attributes established by the variables 3 3 a 2, 3 3 b 2 stored in the variable data file section, so the first to third The display actions and control actions in the display / control system are interrelated. Alternatively, the data file 3 3 is as shown in FIG. 5 6, and its structure can also remove the aforementioned integrated type of the step file 3 3 a and the day surface file 3 3 b, and then the user program and the user day surface Save. The data file 33 is composed of a command file section 3 3h, a graphic data file section 3 3 i and a variable data file section 3 3 j. When the data file 33 is used, the variable data (including the variable and data related to the function attribute and the address) between the ladder file 33a and the screen file 33b by the variable management unit 3 2h will be related to the user program and The user screen is common and saved. Because 5 is the same as that in the case of using the aforementioned step file 3 3a and picture file 33b, the necessity of changing variables between the two files 33a and 33b will be lost. The second display / control system shown in FIG. 5 is the same as the first display / control system described above, and although the programmable display 1 and the programmable controller 2 are included, the structure of the programmable display 1 here is more Programmable

第83頁 541447 五、發明說明(80) 制器之功能,可程式顯示器1除了在記憶體部1 2中配備靜 態隨機存儲器(SRAM) 12c以外,並具備了輸出入裝置20 及輸入/輸出(I / 0 )控制界面2 1。 圖5 8所表示的第3顯示/控制系統,是以依據作為開放 式控制裔的電腦裝直3為中心所構成’該電腦裝置3具備了 代替界面部3 8的輸出入裝置3 9及輸入/輸出(I / 0 )控制界 面4 0 ,並備有與開放式電腦網路8連結的界面裝置4 1 。 在此,針對在第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中的使用者 程式及使用者晝面的製作程序,更詳細的進行說明。 當製作使用者程式時,依照圖2 8的流程圖所表示之程 序進行。在此’於電腦裝置3中’最基尽也必須起動階梯 編輯器3 2 a ,而在顯示器3 5的顯示部3 5 a (參照圖6 1 ( a ) )上,則顯示開啟的階梯視窗3 2 a 1。 首先,在階梯視窗3 2 a 1上,以各個輸出入機器4為對 象,將對應階梯指令的和功能屬性一起登錄(S 1 2 1 )。這 時,將對應變數的位址,配置於所對應之變數。對於所使 用的階梯指令的變數之登錄如全數結束時(S 1 2 2 ),判斷 是否從變數目錄輸入階梯指令(S123)。 如要從變數目錄輸入階梯指令時,即顯示變數目錄( S124 )。接著,從變數目錄選擇所想要的變數後,將其拖 曳至階梯視窗3 2 a 1並將其拖放(S 1 2 5 )。於是,對應被選 取之變數的階梯指令將自動的被輸入(S126),代表該階 梯指令的階梯記號顯示於階梯視窗3 2 a 1。接著,判斷階梯 指令的輸入是否結束(S1 2 7 ),在此,如果不結束時,其Page 83 541447 V. Description of the invention (80) The function of the controller, the programmable display 1 is equipped with an I / O device 20 and input / output (in addition to the static random access memory (SRAM) 12c in the memory section 12) I / 0) Control interface 2 1. The third display / control system shown in FIG. 5 is composed of a computer device 3 as an open control system. The computer device 3 includes an input / output device 39 and an input instead of the interface portion 38. / Output (I / 0) control interface 40, and an interface device 4 1 connected to the open computer network 8 is provided. Here, the user programs in the first to third display / control systems and the user's day-to-day production procedures will be described in more detail. When creating a user program, it follows the procedure shown in the flowchart in Fig. 28. At this point, in the computer device 3, the step editor 3 2 a must be started, and on the display part 3 5 a of the display 35 (refer to FIG. 6 1 (a)), the opened step window is displayed. 3 2 a 1. First, on the step window 3 2 a 1, the input and input devices 4 are used as objects, and the function attributes corresponding to the step instructions are registered together (S 1 2 1). At this time, the address of the strain number is allocated to the corresponding variable. When the registration of the variables of the used ladder instruction is completed (S 1 2 2), it is judged whether the ladder instruction is input from the variable list (S123). When a ladder instruction is to be input from the variable list, the variable list is displayed (S124). Next, after selecting the desired variable from the variable list, drag it to the ladder window 3 2 a 1 and drag and drop it (S 1 2 5). Then, the step instruction corresponding to the selected variable is automatically input (S126), and the step symbol representing the step instruction is displayed in the step window 3 2 a 1. Next, it is judged whether or not the input of the step instruction is completed (S1 2 7).

第84頁 541447 五、發明說明(81) 處理將返回至S 1 2 3,另一方面,如結束時將被製作而成的 使用者程式登錄於資料檔案3 3中(S 1 2 8 )。 另一方面,在S123步驟中不從變數目錄將階梯指令輸 入時,也就是說,應該輸入的階梯指令並未登錄於變數目 錄中時,運用階梯編輯器3 2 a的普通方法來輸入階梯指令 (S1 29 )。接著,輸入對應該階梯指令的變數(S 1 3 0 )。 這時,除了輸入以外,並進行與S121步驟相同的變數及功 能屬性登錄作業,將對應變數的位址,配置於所對應之變 數。再那之後,將處理移動至S 1 2 7步驟。 且,在上述的的範例中,已針對預先將變數登錄後, 再依據該被登錄之變數,讓階梯指令自動輸入的方法進行 說明。然而,對於變數的登錄,並不僅限此方法,也可一 面輸入階梯指令一面進行變數的登錄。在這種情形下,則 依S 1 2 9、S 1 2 1、S 1 2 2、S 1 2 7及S 1 2 8的順序進行處理作業。 又,運用畫面編輯器3 2 B如後述的將變數及功能屬性 的登錄與使用者晝面的製作同時進行時,利用藉由該登錄 所得到的變數目錄。具體來說,也就是執行刪除了 S121及 S i 2 2步驟的處理。 當製作使用者晝面時,依照圖6 0的流程圖所表示之程 序進行。在此’於電腦裘置3中’最基本也必須起晝面編 輯器32b,而在顯示器35的顯示部35a (參照圖61 (a)) 上,則顯示開啟的晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1 。 先’在階梯視窗3 2 a 1上’以各個輸出入機器4為對 象,將對應圖示的變數和功能屬性一起登錄(S131) ◦這 _醒圓__| ,雜 ___Page 84 541447 V. Description of the invention (81) The process will return to S 1 2 3, on the other hand, if it is finished, the user program will be registered in the data file 3 3 (S 1 2 8). On the other hand, when step instructions are not input from the variable list in step S123, that is, when a step instruction to be input is not registered in the variable list, the ordinary method of the step editor 3 2 a is used to input the step instructions. (S1 29). Next, a variable (S 1 3 0) corresponding to the step instruction is input. At this time, except for the input, the same variable and function attribute registration operation as in step S121 is performed, and the address of the strain number is allocated to the corresponding variable. After that, the process moves to step S 1 2 7. Moreover, in the above example, a method has been described in which a variable is automatically input after a variable is registered in advance and then according to the registered variable. However, the registration of variables is not limited to this method, and the registration of variables can also be performed while entering a ladder instruction. In this case, the processing operations are performed in the order of S 1 2 9, S 1 2 1, S 1 2 2, S 1 2 7 and S 1 2 8. When using the screen editor 3 2B to simultaneously register the variables and functional attributes with the user's day-to-day creation, the variable list obtained by the registration is used. Specifically, the process of deleting steps S121 and S i 2 2 is executed. When creating the user's daytime face, the procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 60 is performed. Here, in the computer 3, it is also necessary to start the daytime editor 32b. On the display portion 35a of the display 35 (see FIG. 61 (a)), an open daytime creation window 3 2b is displayed. 1 . First ‘on the ladder window 3 2 a 1’, take each input / output device 4 as an object, and register the variables and function attributes corresponding to the illustration together (S131) ◦This _ 醒 圆 __ |, miscellaneous ___

第85頁 541447 五、發明說明(82) 時,將對應變數的位址,配置於所對應之變數。對於所使 用的圖示的變數之登錄如全數結束時(S 1 3 2 ),判斷是否 從變數目錄輸入圖示(S1 33)。 如要從變數目錄輸入圖示時,即顯示變數目錄(S134 )。接著,從變數目錄選擇所想要的變數後,將其拖曳至 畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1並將其拖放(S 1 3 5 )。於是,對應被選 取之變數的圖示將自動的被輸入(S 1 3 6 ),該圖示將顯示 於畫面製作視窗32bl 。接著,判斷圖示的輸入是否結束( S 1 3 7 ),在此,如果不結束時,其處理步驟將返回至S 1 3 3 ,另一方面,如結束時將被製作而成的使用者晝面登錄於 資料檔案3 3中(S 1 3 8 )。 . 另一方面,在S 1 3 3步驟中不從變數目錄將圖示輸入時 ,也就是說,應該輸入的圖示並未登錄於變數目錄中時, 運用畫面編輯器3 2b的普通方法來輸入圖示(S 1 3 9 )。接 著,輸入對應該圖示的變數(S 1 4 0 )。這時,除了輸入以 外,並進行與S 1 3 1步驟相同的變數及功能屬性登錄作業, 將對應變數的位址,配置於所對應之變數。在那之後,將 處理移動至S 1 3 7步驟。 且,在上述的的範例中,已針對預先將變數登錄後, 再依據該被登錄之變數,讓圖示自動輸入的方法進行過說 明。然而,對於變數的登錄,並不僅限此方法,也可一面# 輸入圖示一面進行變數的登錄。在這種情形下,則依S 1 3 9 、S ] 3 1 >Si32、S 1 3 7及S 1 3 8的順序進行處理作業。 又,運用階梯編輯器3 2 a如前述的將變數及功能屬性Page 85 541447 5. In the description of the invention (82), the address of the strain number will be allocated to the corresponding variable. When the registration of the used variables of the graphic is completed (S 1 3 2), it is determined whether the graphic is input from the variable list (S1 33). To enter the icon from the variable list, the variable list is displayed (S134). Next, select the desired variable from the variable list and drag it to the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 and drag and drop it (S 1 3 5). Then, the icon corresponding to the selected variable will be automatically input (S 1 3 6), and the icon will be displayed in the screen creation window 32bl. Next, it is judged whether the input of the icon is finished (S 1 3 7). If it is not finished, the processing steps will be returned to S 1 3 3. On the other hand, if it is finished, the user will be created. Day and night are registered in the data file 33 (S 1 38). On the other hand, when the icon is not input from the variable directory in step S 1 3 3, that is, when the icon to be input is not registered in the variable directory, use the ordinary method of the screen editor 3 2b to Enter the icon (S 1 3 9). Next, enter the variable (S 1 4 0) corresponding to the figure. At this time, except for the input, the same variable and function attribute registration operation as in step S 1 31 is performed, and the address of the strain number is allocated to the corresponding variable. After that, the process is moved to step S 1 3 7. Moreover, in the above-mentioned example, the method of automatically inputting the icon according to the registered variable has been explained after registering the variable in advance. However, the registration of variables is not limited to this method, and the registration of variables can be performed while the # input icon is displayed. In this case, the processing operations are performed in the order of S 1 3 9, S] 3 1 > Si32, S 1 3 7 and S 1 3 8. In addition, using the ladder editor 3 2 a, the variables and functional attributes are as described above.

第86頁 541447 五、發明說明(83) 的登錄與使用者程式的製作同時進行時,利用藉由該登錄 所得到的變數目錄。具體來說,也就是執行刪除了 S131及 S ] 3 2步驟的處理。 在此,針對依據圖5 9及圖6 0的流程圖的程序,合併進 行使用者程式及使用者晝面的製作時之具體範例進行說明 在此,如圖6 1 ( a )所表示的,階梯編輯器3 2 a及晝面 編輯器3 2 b已被起動,階梯視窗3 2 a 1及晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1 也已被開啟於顯示器35的顯示部35a上。又,變數及與該 變數有關的功能屬性早已被登錄。 在這個狀態中,如圖6 1 ( b )所表示的將變數目錄顯 示於顯示部3 5 a,包含著開關的的變數中。例如,將變數 n S W 1 π拖曳,且拖放於階梯視窗3 2 a 1及晝面製作視窗中所 想要的位置上。 於是,如圖6 1 ( c )所表示的,於階梯視窗3 2 a 1中, 變數"SW1 π被拖放的位置上將會顯示相當於LD (下載)命 令的階梯記號L。又,變數n S W 1 π將一併顯示在該階梯記號 L的附近◦另一方面,於晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1中,變數n S W 1 π 被拖放的位置上將會顯示與該變數建立關聯性之開關的圖 示Μ。又,變數nSWl"將一併顯示在該圖示Μ上。 藉由上述之處理,使用者從變數目錄選擇預先被登錄 之變數,只要進行拖良和拖放之操作,有與該變數建立關 聯性的階梯記號及圖示,將各別在階梯視窗3 2 a 1及晝面製 作視窗3 2 b 1上自動產生。又,可將階梯記號L及圖示Μ合併P.86 541447 V. When the registration of invention description (83) is performed at the same time as the creation of the user program, the variable directory obtained by the registration is used. Specifically, the process of deleting steps S131 and S] 3 2 is performed. Here, the procedures according to the flowcharts in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 combined with the specific examples of the user program and the creation of the user's daytime surface will be described here, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), The step editor 3 2 a and the day surface editor 3 2 b have been started, and the step window 3 2 a 1 and the day surface creation window 3 2 b 1 have also been opened on the display portion 35 a of the display 35. In addition, variables and functional attributes related to the variables have already been registered. In this state, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the variable list is displayed on the display section 3a, which includes the variables of the switch. For example, drag the variable n S W 1 π and drag it to the desired position in the stepped window 3 2 a 1 and the day surface creation window. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6 1 (c), in the ladder window 3 2 a 1, the variable " SW1 π is dragged and dropped at the position where a ladder symbol L corresponding to the LD (download) command is displayed. In addition, the variable n SW 1 π will be displayed in the vicinity of the step mark L. On the other hand, in the daytime production window 3 2 b 1, the position where the variable n SW 1 π is dragged and dropped will be displayed. Illustration M of a switch that establishes the association of a variable. The variable nSW1 is also displayed on the icon M. Through the above-mentioned processing, the user selects a previously registered variable from the variable list. As long as dragging and dropping operations are performed, there are ladder marks and icons that are associated with the variable, and they will be separated in the ladder window 3 2 a 1 and daytime production window 3 2 b 1 are automatically generated. The step symbol L and the icon M can be combined.

第87頁 541447 五、發明說明(84) 顯示變數,可節省該輸入的時間。 上述之範例,是使用者程式和使用者畫面同時製作的 情況,如前述的,一面輸入階梯記號或者是圖示,一面進 行變數及功能屬性的登錄作業時,該登錄和使用者程式或 者是使用者畫面的製作將同時被進行。因此,在這種情況 下,如前述的,利用那個時候所被登錄的變數及功能屬 性,將可製作使用者晝面或者是使用者程式。 如以上所述,與本實施型態相關的各個顯示/控制系 統是由,備有讓變數持有功能屬性進行登錄之變數管理部 3 2 h,運用被登錄的變數,如前述讓階梯記號及圖示可自 動產生所構成的。 · 因為如此,(1 )使用者程式或者是使用者晝面的其 中一方製作完成後,再製作另外一方之程序,及(2 )使 用者程式及使用者晝面同時製作之程序,任何一個程序都 可以有效率的進行。又,就算是(2 )的程序,並不是只 有將變數及功能屬性的登錄和階梯指令及圖示之輸入逐項 的進行而已5也可以預先將變數及功能屬性的登錄全部執 行後,再進行階梯記號及圖示的輸入。而且,就算登錄後 ,可呼叫出圖5 2 ( b )的對話視窗,很容易的變更其登錄 内容。因此,可對應上述程式多樣的製作型態。 再加上,因為讓變數持有功能屬性,藉由將該變數與φ 階梯記號及圖示一起顯示,為了建立被顯示的階梯記號及 圖示的特徵,另外輸入註解和名稱等將無此必要。又,籍 由功能屬性,變數的管理也變得較容易。 Π 11 πΑη:丨:丨 1— iii ϋ iiP.87 541447 V. Description of the invention (84) Display variables can save the time of input. The above example is the case where the user program and the user screen are created at the same time. As described above, when entering the ladder mark or icon and performing the registration of variables and functional attributes, the registration and the user program may be used. The creation of this screen will be performed at the same time. Therefore, in this case, as mentioned above, using the variables and functional attributes registered at that time, it is possible to create a user's day or user program. As described above, each display / control system related to this embodiment mode is provided with a variable management unit that allows the variable to hold a function attribute for registration, and uses the registered variable, such as the aforementioned step ladder mark and The diagram can be generated automatically. · Because of this, either (1) the user program or one of the user's daytime surface is completed, then the other party's program is made, and (2) the user program and the user's daytime surface program are made at the same time, any one program Can be done efficiently. Moreover, even if it is the program of (2), it is not only to perform the registration of variables and functional attributes and the input of ladder instructions and illustrations. It is also possible to perform all the registration of variables and functional attributes beforehand. Enter the ladder mark and icon. In addition, even after login, the dialog window shown in Figure 5 2 (b) can be called, and the registration content can be easily changed. Therefore, it can correspond to various production types of the above-mentioned programs. In addition, because the variable has a functional attribute, the variable is displayed together with the φ step symbol and icon. In order to establish the characteristics of the displayed step symbol and icon, it is unnecessary to enter a comment and name. . In addition, it is easier to manage variables by function attributes. Π 11 πΑη: 丨: 丨 1— iii ϋ ii

InIn

1—^1- ^

第88頁 541447 五、發明說明(85) 又,在本實施型態當中,雖然是針對變數從變數目錄 中執行拖矣及拖放動作之範例來進行說明,並不限定本發 明之範圍。 【實施型態5】 針對本發明的第5的實施型態,如依據圖5 5、圖5 6、 圖6 2至圖7 1來進行說明,其内容如下。 首先,圖6 2所表示的第1的顯示/控制系統包含了可程 式顯示器1及可程式控制器2。與可程式顯示器1連結的電 腦裝置3和圖1所表示的顯示/控制系統的電腦裝置3相同, 具備有中央處理器3 1、編輯部3 2、資料檔案3 3、記憶體部 3 4、顯示器3 5、輸入裝置3 6、外部記憶裝置3 7及界面部3 8 。上述的編輯部3 2則包含了階梯編輯器3 2 a、畫面編輯器 3 2 b及階梯回路產生部3 2 i。 輸入於階梯編輯器3 2 a的階梯指令,暫時登錄於為了 記憶位址的配置狀態於記憶體部3 4所形成的階梯目錄(程 式目錄)中。運用這種階梯指令的組合所製作而成的使用 者程式,將藉由可程式顯示器1 (或者是直接)轉送至可 程式控制器2,下載至可程式控制器2的記憶體中。 又,畫面編輯器32b對於配置在所製成的畫面上的元 件的各個輸出入機器4,將前記的輸出入號碼(位址)籍 由前記的變數配置。 作為程式產生手段的階梯回路產生部3 2 i ,藉由運用 畫面編輯器32b的使用者的操作,在後述的晝面製作視窗 3 2 b 2 (參照圖6 7 ( a ))上配置所選擇之元件,將順應該P.88 541447 V. Description of the invention (85) In this embodiment, although the description is made of the example of performing dragging and dragging from the variable directory by the variables, it does not limit the scope of the present invention. [Embodiment Mode 5] The fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 5, 5, 6, 6, 62 to 71, and the content is as follows. First, the first display / control system shown in FIG. 62 includes a programmable display 1 and a programmable controller 2. The computer device 3 connected to the programmable display 1 and the computer device 3 of the display / control system shown in FIG. 1 are provided with a central processing unit 3 1. an editing unit 3 2. a data file 3 3. a memory unit 3 4. Display 3 5, input device 36, external memory device 37, and interface section 38. The above-mentioned editing section 3 2 includes a step editor 3 2 a, a screen editor 3 2 b, and a step loop generation section 3 2 i. The ladder instruction input in the ladder editor 3 2 a is temporarily registered in a ladder directory (program directory) formed in the memory section 34 in order to memorize the arrangement state of the address. The user program created by using this combination of ladder instructions will be transferred to the programmable controller 2 via the programmable display 1 (or directly) and downloaded to the memory of the programmable controller 2. In addition, the screen editor 32b arranges the input / output number (address) of the preceding input / output number (address) for each of the input / output devices 4 arranged on the produced screen using the preceding variable. The step loop generation unit 3 2 i as the program generation means is arranged and selected on the daytime surface creation window 3 2 b 2 (refer to FIG. 6 (a)) described later by the operation of the user using the screen editor 32b. Components that will conform

第89頁 541447 五、發明說明(86) 元件的階梯回路於階梯編輯器3 2 a中自動產生。階梯回路 產生部32ι ,具體來說,將在畫面編輯器32b中所被輸入的 上記變數,與在階梯編輯器3 2 a所輸入的階梯指令對應, 除了登錄於前記的階梯目錄以外,預先產生與變數建立關 聯性的階梯指令群組,將該命令群組授予階梯編輯器 3 2 a,讓其顯示在後述的階梯視窗3 2 a 1 (參照圖6 7 ( a ) )。變數與階梯指令之間的關聯建立,可讓使用者自行執 行也可以,或是將編輯部3 2當作軟體提供給使用者預先設 定。 且,上記的階梯回路產生部3 2 i可以是階梯編輯器3 2 a 或者是晝面編輯器3 2 b的其中一方的一個功能或者是作為 兩個編輯器3 2 a、3 2 b所共通的一個功能各別包含於各個編 輯器中。 資料檔案3 3則包含了階梯檔案3 3 a及畫面製作檔案3 3 b 。對於資料標案3 3來說,例如,使用者程式如前述的圖5 4 所表示的儲存在階梯檔案3 3 a中,使用者畫面則如圖5 5所 表示的儲存在畫面檔案3 3 b中。階梯檔案3 3 a及畫面檔案 3 3b是藉由變數資料檔案部33a2、33b2相互建立其關聯 性,因此在第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中的顯示動作及控 制動作是相互關聯的。 階梯檔案3 3 a,特別是針對儲存於晝面檔案3 3 b的複合 元件的資料,將關於對應其一個一個資料的階梯回路的資 料儲存(例如,具有n . w 1 1 π的副檔名)的子檔案每個複合 元件都具有。Page 89 541447 V. Description of the invention (86) The ladder circuit of the component is automatically generated in the ladder editor 3 2 a. The ladder circuit generation unit 32ι specifically generates the above-mentioned variables input in the screen editor 32b corresponding to the ladder instructions input in the ladder editor 3 2a, and generates them in advance except for registering in the ladder directory registered above. A ladder instruction group that is associated with a variable is given to the ladder editor 3 2 a and displayed in a ladder window 3 2 a 1 described later (see FIG. 7 (a)). The association between the variable and the ladder instruction can be established by the user, or the editing department 32 can be provided as software for the user to preset. In addition, the above-mentioned step loop generation unit 3 2 i may be a function of one of the step editor 3 2 a or the day and day editor 3 2 b, or may be common to the two editors 3 2 a, 3 2 b. A feature is included in each editor. The data file 3 3 includes a step file 3 3 a and a screen production file 3 3 b. For the data item 3 3, for example, the user program is stored in the step file 3 3 a as shown in the foregoing FIG. 5 4, and the user screen is stored in the screen file 3 3 b as shown in FIG. 5 5 in. The step file 3 3a and the screen file 3 3b are related to each other by the variable data file sections 33a2 and 33b2. Therefore, the display actions and control actions in the first to third display / control systems are related to each other. The step file 3 3 a, especially for the data of the composite components stored in the day and night file 3 3 b, stores the data on the step circuit corresponding to one of the data (for example, it has the extension of n. W 1 1 π ) The child file has each composite component.

第90頁 541447 五、發明說明(87) 具體來說,如圖6 3 ( a )所表示的,複合元件如為計 數器時,對於關於計數器的使用者畫面的資料DT ],具有 例如π TE S T . w 1 1 π的檔案名的子檔案F 1將會因階梯回路產生 部3 2 1 ,自動產生於階梯檔案3 3 a。 圖6 4所表示第2的顯示/控制系統,和前述第1的顯示/ 控制系統相同,雖包含了可程式顯示器1及可程式控制器2 ,但是在此的顯可程式顯示器1之構成更具備了可程式控 制器之功能,可程式顯示器1除了在記憶體部1 2中配備靜 態隨機存儲器(S R A Μ ) 1 2 c以外,並具備了輸出入裝置2 0 及輸入/輸出(I / 0 )控制界面2 1。P.90 541447 V. Description of the invention (87) Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 3 (a), when the composite component is a counter, the data on the user screen of the counter DT], for example, π TE ST The sub-file F 1 of the file name w 1 1 π will be automatically generated in the step file 3 3 a due to the step loop generation unit 3 2 1. The second display / control system shown in FIG. 6 is the same as the first display / control system described above. Although the programmable display 1 and the programmable controller 2 are included, the structure of the programmable display 1 is more detailed here. It has the function of a programmable controller. In addition to the static random access memory (SRA M) 1 2 c in the memory section 12, the programmable display 1 has an input / output device 2 0 and an input / output (I / 0). ) Control interface 2 1.

圖6 5所表示的第3顯示/控制系統的電腦裝置3 ,為了 H 具備開放式控制器的功能,其備有輸出入裝置3 9、輸入/ 輸出(I / 0 )控制界面4 0及界面裝置4 1 。 在此,於第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中,對應製作使 用者晝面及使用者程式時的複合元件的階梯回路,針對其 自動產生的處理程序將參照圖6 6的流程圖來進行說明。 一面製作使用者晝面一面製作使用者程式時,在此電 腦裝置3中,階梯編輯器3 2 a及晝面編輯器3 2 b已被起動, 顯示器35的顯示部35a (參照圖67 (a))中晝面製作視窗 3 2 b 1及階梯視窗3 2 a 1已被同時開啟。 首先,在晝面製作視窗3 2b 1上,藉由使用者的操作將· 複合元件的目錄顯示(S 1 4 1 ),判斷從該目錄中被使用者 所選擇到的複合元件是否有配置在畫面製作視窗3 2b 1的晝 面製成領域中(S 1 4 2 )。如複合元件有被配置時,則判斷The computer device 3 of the third display / control system shown in FIG. 5 is provided with an input / output device 3 for H to have the function of an open controller. 9. An input / output (I / 0) control interface 40 and an interface. Device 4 1. Here, in the first to third display / control systems, corresponding to the ladder circuit of the composite element when the user's day surface and the user program are created, the processing procedure automatically generated will be referred to the flowchart of FIG. Be explained. When creating a user program while creating a user's day and day, in this computer device 3, the step editor 3 2 a and the day and night editor 3 2 b have been started, and the display portion 35 a of the display 35 (see FIG. )) The mid-day surface making window 3 2 b 1 and step window 3 2 a 1 have been opened at the same time. First, on the daytime production window 3 2b 1, the catalog of the composite component is displayed (S 1 4 1) by the user's operation, and it is determined whether the composite component selected by the user is arranged in the catalog. In the field of screen making window 3 2b 1 (S 1 4 2). If the composite component is configured, judge

第91頁 541447 五、發明說明(88) 對於複合元件的各個功能,藉由變數將位址進行配置之設 定是否結束(S143)。如設定已結束時,將變數登錄於階 梯目錄(S 1 4 4 ) 接下來,因為與被登錄之變數建立其關聯的階梯指令 群組將產生於階梯目錄,所以將對應該階梯指令的階梯回 路配置於階梯視窗3 2 a 1並決定其配置之位置(S 1 4 5 )。之 後,判斷針對該階梯回路所建立對應的子程式是否有被輸 入(S 1 4 6 )。子程式如無被輸入時,將在階梯視窗3 2 a 1中 的上記階梯指令群組和變數展開於階梯回路中(S 1 4 7 ) 接著,判斷處理是否要結束(S 1 4 8 )。在此,如不結束時 其處理將退回至S 1 4 1之步驟,另一方面,如要結束時,將® 產生的階梯回路當作子檔案保存於階梯檔案3 3 a中(S 1 4 9 )° 在此,針對運用圖6 6流程圖的程序進行階梯回路產生 的具體範例進行說明。 首先,如圖6 7 ( a )所表示的,階梯視窗3 2 a 1及晝面 製作視窗3 2 b 1開啟於顯示部3 5 a。在這狀態中,如圖6 7 ( b )所表示的藉由畫面編輯器32b讓複合元件的圖書庫顯示 於晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1。接著,如圖6 7 ( c )所表示的,從 該圖書庫中,例如選擇複合開關的複合元件P 1 ,將其配置 於畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1 ,只要前記的S 1 4 5步驟的處理結束時_ ,藉由前記的S 1 4 4至S 1 4 7的一連貫的處理,階梯視窗3 2 a 1 中,將產生對應複合開關的階梯回路。 複合元件P 1是由控制配置於輸出入機器4的目標系統P.91 541447 V. Description of the invention (88) Whether the setting of the address by variable is completed for each function of the composite element (S143). If the setting has been completed, the variable is registered in the ladder directory (S 1 4 4). Next, the ladder instruction group associated with the registered variable will be generated in the ladder directory, so it will correspond to the ladder circuit of the ladder instruction. It is arranged on the stepped window 3 2 a 1 and determines its position (S 1 4 5). Then, it is judged whether the corresponding subroutine established for the ladder circuit is input (S 1 4 6). If the subroutine is not input, the above ladder instruction group and variables in the ladder window 3 2 a 1 are expanded into the ladder loop (S 1 4 7). Then, it is judged whether the processing is to be ended (S 1 4 8). Here, if it is not finished, its processing will be returned to the step of S 1 4 1; on the other hand, if it is to be ended, the ladder circuit generated by ® will be saved as a sub file in the ladder file 3 3 a (S 1 4 9) ° Here, a specific example of stepped loop generation using the program of the flowchart in FIG. 6 is described. First, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), a stepped window 3 2 a 1 and a daytime window 3 2 b 1 are opened on the display portion 3 5 a. In this state, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the library of the composite component is displayed on the daytime production window 3 2 b 1 by the screen editor 32b. Next, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), from the library, for example, the composite element P1 of the composite switch is selected and arranged in the screen creation window 3 2b1, as long as the above-mentioned steps of S1 4 5 At the end of the process_, through the sequential processing of S 1 4 4 to S 1 4 7 described above, in the step window 3 2 a 1, a step loop corresponding to the composite switch will be generated. The composite element P 1 is a target system arranged in the input / output machine 4 by the control.

第92頁 541447 五、發明說明(89) 的自動操作之開關S1 ,控制目標系統的手動運轉之開關S2 ,讓自動運轉或是手動運轉停止之開關S3及執行自動運轉 或者是手動運轉時其點亮的燈L 1所構成的。開關S 1、S 2、 S 3的上方,各別顯示作為變數的π自動π 、M手動Μ 、π停止π 。該複合開關其構成為,只有開關S 1或者是開關S 2開啟( 〇N )時,燈L1將點亮,而只有開關S 3開啟(〇N )時,燈 L 1將點減。這樣的功能屬性也預先當作複合元件P 1的資料 儲存於圖形資料檔案3 3 b 1中。 從這樣的複合元件P 1產生階梯回路時,上述的變數並 將燈L 1點燈時的變數π自動燈輸出"及π手動燈輸出π ,藉由 階梯回路產生部3 2 i如圖6 8所表示的登錄於階梯目錄L L 1 中。變數π自動π 、π手動π及”停止π是預先與開關建立好關 係,變數π自動燈輸出"及"手動燈輸出π則是是預先與燈建 立好關係。這些變數,實現複合元件Ρ 1的功能,逐次的登 錄於階梯目錄L L 1中。 又,同0夸,配置於各變數的位址(X 0 0 1 0、X 0 0 1 1等 )也登錄於階梯目錄L L 1中。並且,依據與各變數建立關 係之功能(開關、燈等)及複合元件Ρ1全體的功能,對應 各變數的階梯指令(LD、ANDN等)將自動的登錄至階梯 目錄L L 1中。這個結果,由階梯指令和位址的組合可以得 到其指令。 階梯編輯器3 2 a是依據該階梯目錄L L 1 ,在階梯視窗 3 2 a 1中繪製對應複合元件Ρ 1的階梯回路。該階梯回路是作 為子程式所形成的,子程式的開始方面(SUBSTART複合Page 92 541447 V. Description of the invention (89) The automatic operation switch S1, the switch S2 that controls the manual operation of the target system, the switch S3 that stops the automatic operation or the manual operation and the point when the automatic operation or the manual operation is performed Consists of a bright lamp L1. Above the switches S1, S2, and S3, π autoπ, M manual M, and π stop π are displayed as variables. The composite switch is configured so that only the switch S 1 or the switch S 2 is turned on (ON), the lamp L1 will be turned on, and only the switch S 3 is turned on (ON), the lamp L1 will be reduced. Such functional attributes are also stored in advance as data of the composite component P 1 in the graphic data file 3 3 b 1. When a stepped loop is generated from such a composite element P1, the above-mentioned variables and the variable when the lamp L1 is lit π automatic lamp output " and πmanual lamp output π " 8 is registered in the ladder list LL1. The variables π automatic π, π manual π, and "stop π" establish a relationship with the switch in advance, and the variable π automatic lamp output " and " manual lamp output π establishes a relationship with the lamp in advance. These variables realize composite components The function of P 1 is registered in the ladder list LL one by one. In addition, the addresses (X 0 0 1 0, X 0 0 1 1 etc.) allocated to each variable are also registered in the ladder list LL 1 And, according to the function (switch, lamp, etc.) that establishes a relationship with each variable and the function of the overall component P1, the ladder instructions (LD, ANDN, etc.) corresponding to each variable will be automatically registered in the ladder directory LL 1. This result The instruction can be obtained by the combination of the ladder instruction and the address. The ladder editor 3 2 a draws the ladder circuit corresponding to the composite component P 1 in the ladder window 3 2 a 1 according to the ladder directory LL 1. The ladder circuit is Formed as a subroutine, the starting aspect of the subroutine (SUBSTART compound

第93頁 541447 五、發明說明(90) 開關)為自動運轉部和,子程式的結束方面(S U B E N D複 合開關)的手動運轉部所構成的。就算任何的階梯回路, 只要LD及ANDN的整組(se t )條件成立燈將會被開啟( ON ),就算LD的開關關閉(OFF )燈還是推持開啟狀態 ,運用或(0 R )的自我保持回路所形成。又,停止( ANDN )開啟(0 N )後,其清除(R e s e t )條件如成立時 ,燈將關閉(OFF )。 如圖6 9 ( a )所表示的,計數器的複合元件P 2被配置 於畫面製作視窗3 2 b時,如圖6 9 ( b )所表示的將產生階梯 回路。上述的複合元件P2是由顯示設定值用的數值顯示器 N 1 、顯示計數值用的數值顯示器N 2、到數計時時將亮燈 的燈L 2及重新計數用的附有燈的開關S 4所構成。該計數器 ,當數值顯示器N 2上逐次顯示的計數值(C N T . C V )達到 設定於數值顯示器N 1上的設定值(C N T · P V )時,進行到 數計時,將其燈L 2點亮。又,這個計數器,當附有燈的開 關S4被開啟時(ON),計數值將被清除,並將附有燈的 開關S 4亮燈表示。又,對於該複合元件P 2中顯示了 ,作 為計數1¾'為了將設定值設定之變數n S Ε Τ π ’為了重新輸入 之變數"RESET”及為了輸出到數計時之變數n CNT. UPn 。 從這樣的複合元件P2產生階梯回路時,上述的變數並 將為了動新輸的變數"CNT. Rn及為了檢查到數計時(設定 值和計數值的一致檢查)的變數nCNT.EQn ,藉由階梯回 路產生部3 2 i如圖7 0所表示的登錄於階梯目錄L L 2中。變 數"SETn將預先與計數器建立關係,變數n RESETn將預先與P.93 541447 V. Description of the Invention (90) Switch) is composed of an automatic operation part and a manual operation part for the end of a subroutine (S U B E N D composite switch). Even if any ladder circuit, as long as the entire set of conditions of LD and ANDN (se t) is satisfied, the lamp will be turned on (ON), even if the switch of LD is turned off (OFF), the lamp is still pushed on, using or (0 R) A self-sustaining loop is formed. In addition, after the stop (ANDN) is turned on (0 N), if the clear (R e s e t) condition is satisfied, the lamp will be turned off (OFF). As shown in FIG. 6 (a), when the composite element P2 of the counter is arranged in the screen creation window 32b, a step loop will be generated as shown in FIG. 6 (b). The above-mentioned composite element P2 is a numerical display N 1 for displaying a set value, a numerical display N for displaying a count value 2, a lamp L 2 which is turned on at the time of counting and a switch S 4 with a lamp for re-counting. Made up. This counter, when the count value (C N T. C V) successively displayed on the numerical display N 2 reaches the set value (C N T · P V) set on the numerical display N 1, it counts up and lights its lamp L 2. In addition, when this switch S4 with a lamp is turned on (ON), the counter value is cleared, and the switch S 4 with a lamp is lit. In addition, for this composite element P 2, a variable 1 ¾ 'is a variable for setting a set value n S Ε Τ π' a variable for re-entering " RESET "and a variable n for outputting to a timer n CNT. UPn When a stepped loop is generated from such a composite element P2, the above-mentioned variables will be used to move the newly lost variable " CNT. Rn and the variable nCNT.EQn to check the counting time (the consistency check of the set value and the count value), The step loop generation unit 3 2 i is registered in the step directory LL 2 as shown in FIG. 70. The variable " SETn will establish a relationship with the counter in advance, and the variable n RESETn will correspond with the counter in advance.

第94頁 541447 五、發明說明(91) 開關建立關係,n CNT. Rn及"CNT. UP"則是預先與燈建立好 關係。這些變數,實現複合元件P2的功能,逐次的登錄於 階梯目錄L L 2中。 又,同時,配置於各變數的位址(X0100 、X0101等 )也登錄於階梯目錄L L 2中。並且,依據與各變數建立關 係之功能(開關、燈等)及複合元件P 2全體的功能,對應 各變數的階梯指令(CTU、LD等)將自動的登錄至階梯 目錄L L 2中。這個結果,由階梯指令和位址的組合可以得 到其指令。 階梯編輯器3 2a是依據該階梯目錄LL2,在階梯視窗 3 2 a 1中繪製對應複合元件P 2的階梯回路。該階梯回路是作春 為子程式所形成的,子程式的開始方面(SUB START計數 器)的計數器部和中間的清除(RESET )部和子程式的結 束方面(SUBEND計數器)的到數計時部所構成的。 S U B E N D計數器,依據比較指令,設定值和計數值如一致 時將Q輸出開啟,到數計時的輸出也開啟。 而且,上述的計數部的計數輸入C E則是,通常是配 置於計數鐘供給用的a接點。 對應上述的複合開關及計數器的階梯回路,如圖71 ( a )及圖7 1 ( b )所表示的,每個複合元件儲存於子檔案中 ,因此和子程式或者是主程式作為獨立的區塊所形成。階 · 梯回路作為子程式所形成時,如圖6 8及圖7 0所表示的,最 後一定要記述返回(R E T )指令。又,跳越至這樣的階梯 回路如圖7 1 ( a )及圖7 1 ( b )所表示的子程式的名稱周"Page 94 541447 V. Description of the invention (91) The switch establishes a relationship, n CNT. Rn and " CNT. UP " establish a relationship with the lamp in advance. These variables realize the function of the composite element P2, and are sequentially registered in the ladder list L L2. At the same time, addresses (X0100, X0101, etc.) arranged in each variable are also registered in the ladder directory L L2. In addition, according to the functions (switches, lights, etc.) that are related to each variable and the functions of the composite element P 2 as a whole, the ladder instructions (CTU, LD, etc.) corresponding to each variable are automatically registered in the ladder directory L L 2. As a result, the instruction can be obtained by the combination of the ladder instruction and the address. The ladder editor 3 2a draws a ladder circuit corresponding to the composite element P 2 in the ladder window 3 2 a 1 according to the ladder catalog LL2. This ladder loop is formed as a subprogram. The start section of the subprogram (SUB START counter), the middle clear section (RESET) section, and the subprogram end section (SUBEND counter) of the counting section. of. S U B E N D counter, according to the comparison instruction, if the set value and the count value are consistent, the Q output is turned on, and the output at the counting time is also turned on. The counting input C E of the above-mentioned counting section is usually arranged at the a contact for supplying a counting clock. The ladder circuit corresponding to the above-mentioned composite switch and counter, as shown in Figure 71 (a) and Figure 71 (b), each composite component is stored in a sub-file, so it is a separate block from the sub-program or the main program Formed. When a step loop is formed as a subroutine, as shown in Fig. 68 and Fig. 70, the return (R E T) instruction must be described last. In addition, to jump to such a ladder circuit, the name of the subroutine as shown in Fig. 7 1 (a) and Fig. 7 1 (b)

第95頁 541447 五、發明說明(92) 複合開關π及π計數器π的回路無條件跳越指令(CALL指令 )編入主程式中。又,上述的階梯回路作為子程式而不形 成時,雖不用圖來表示,無條件的跳越至被指定的步驟之 指令(J Μ P指令)編入主程式中。 如以上所述的,與本實施型態相關的第1至第3的顯示 /控制系統,藉由具備了階梯回路部3 2 i ,如圖6 7所表示的 ,只要將複合元件配置於晝面製作視窗3 2 b 1上,對應複合 元件的階梯回路將於階梯視窗3 2 a 1上自動產。所以,為了 製作對應複合元件的數個階梯指令所組合而成的階梯回路 ,以往所須要的使用者的輸入操作實質上已變成不須要。 因此,包含那樣的階梯回路的使用者程式的製作效率可大 幅提昇。又,藉由複合元件的配置可產生階梯回路,因此 ,提供視覺上容易理解的操作環境,操作性也相對的提高 又,因對應複合元件的階梯回路採用和前述儲存於個 別的子檔案的檔案構造,和將實執時間控制(實行控制) 用的使用者程式用一個檔案進行管理的舊型的編輯器不同 ,除了可以分散處理以外,在控制區分的檔案管理可更容 易。且,因為採用了這樣的檔案構造,複合元件和階梯回 路之間可容易的建立關聯性,因此,可提高階梯編輯器 3 2 a和晝面編輯器3 2 b之間的親和性。 又,藉由將階梯回路當作子程式來產生,可以進行主 程式的階梯回路的製作和獨立將複合元件的階梯回路製作 。於是,除了可提昇程式設的自由度以外,對應複合元件Page 95 541447 V. Description of the invention (92) The loop unconditional skip instruction (CALL instruction) of the compound switch π and π counter π is programmed into the main program. When the above-mentioned step loop is not formed as a subroutine, although it is not shown in the figure, an instruction (JMP instruction) that jumps unconditionally to a designated step is incorporated in the main program. As described above, the first to third display / control systems related to this embodiment mode are provided with a step loop section 3 2 i, as shown in FIG. 6, as long as the composite element is arranged in the day On the surface manufacturing window 3 2 b 1, the stepped circuit corresponding to the composite component will be automatically produced on the stepped window 3 2 a 1. Therefore, in order to create a ladder circuit composed of a plurality of ladder instructions corresponding to a composite component, the input operation required by the user in the past has essentially become unnecessary. Therefore, the production efficiency of a user program including such a ladder circuit can be greatly improved. In addition, a stepped circuit can be generated by the arrangement of the composite element. Therefore, a visually easy-to-understand operating environment is provided, and the operability is relatively improved. Because the stepped circuit corresponding to the composite element adopts the files stored in the individual sub-files, The structure is different from the old editor which manages a user program for actual time control (implementation control) with a single file. In addition to the decentralized processing, the file management in the control division can be easier. Moreover, since such a file structure is adopted, the correlation between the composite element and the ladder circuit can be easily established, and therefore, the affinity between the ladder editor 3 2 a and the day and day editor 3 2 b can be improved. In addition, by generating the ladder circuit as a subroutine, it is possible to produce the ladder circuit of the main program and the ladder circuit of the composite component independently. Therefore, in addition to increasing the freedom of programming, corresponding composite components

第96頁 541447 五、發明說明(93) 的階梯回路的詳細設計所花費的工數將可大幅刪減。 且,本實施型態,主要是針對藉由將複合元件配置於 畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1 ,而讓階梯回路自動的產生之具體範例 來進行說明。但是,也可以藉由將單一的元件配置於畫面 製作視窗3 2 b 1 ,即可產生對應該元件的階梯記號。在這種 情況下,所產生的階梯記號和上述的階梯回路不同,並不 保存在附檔案中,而是保存在主程式所登錄的檔案中。 【實施型態6】 針對本發明的第6的實施型態,如依據圖5 4、圖5 5、 圖72至圖83來進行說明,其内容如下。 首先,圖5 1所表示的第1的顯示/控制系統和前述的實 施型態1的顯示/控制系統(參照圖1 )相同,包含了可程 式顯示器1及可程式控制器2。與可程式顯示器1連結的電 月I裝置3和圖1所表示的顯示/控制系統的電腦裝置3相同, 具備有中央處理器3 1、編輯部3 2、資料檔案3 3、記憶體部 3 4、顯示器3 5、輸入裝置3 6、外部記憶裝置3 7及界面部3 8 。編輯部3 2部則包含了階梯編輯器3 2 a、畫面編輯器3 2 b及 階梯解析部3 2 j。 階梯編輯器3 2 a,普通時雖可以將一個的程序控制的 階梯程式連續製作而成,但也可以運用使用者晝面的一個 晝面單位提供製作階梯程式的頁面模式所構成。 運用該頁面模式來製作階梯程式時,一頁份的階梯程 式於每次製作完成後保存於各別的檔案。因為如此,階梯 編輯器3 2 a將會準備,為了將每一頁的階梯程式進行保存P.96 541447 V. The detailed design of the stepped loop of the description of the invention (93) can be greatly reduced. In addition, this embodiment mainly describes a specific example of automatically generating a ladder circuit by arranging a composite element in the screen production window 3 2 b 1. However, it is also possible to arrange a single component in the screen making window 3 2 b 1 to generate a step mark corresponding to the component. In this case, the generated ladder symbol is different from the above ladder circuit and is not stored in the attached file, but in the file registered in the main program. [Embodiment Mode 6] A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 5, 4, 5, 5, and 72 to 83, and the contents are as follows. First, the first display / control system shown in FIG. 51 is the same as the display / control system of the first embodiment (see FIG. 1), and includes a programmable display 1 and a programmable controller 2. The electric month I device 3 connected to the programmable display 1 and the computer device 3 of the display / control system shown in FIG. 1 are equipped with a central processing unit 3 1. an editing unit 3 2. a data file 3 3. a memory unit 3. 4. Display 3 5. Input device 3 6. External memory device 37 and interface section 38. The editing section 32 includes a step editor 3 2 a, a screen editor 3 2 b, and a step analysis section 3 2 j. The ladder editor 3 2 a can normally be made by one program-controlled ladder program continuously, but it can also be constructed by using a day-time unit of the user to provide a page mode for creating a ladder program. When using this page mode to make a ladder program, one page of the ladder program is saved in a separate file after each creation. Because of this, the step editor 3 2 a will be prepared in order to save the ladder program for each page

第97頁 541447 五、發明說明(94) 的使用者界面(例如,對話視窗)。 作為抽出手段的階梯解析部3 2 j是將包含於藉由運用 階梯編輯器3 2 a的使用者操作所製成的階梯程式中的階梯 指令,一個個的進行解析,將與各個階梯指令建立對應的 畫面編輯器3 2 b的元件,針對一個階梯程式將其總括後抽 出,運用使用者晝面單位登錄於後述的元件檔案3 3 e (參 照圖8 0 )中。階梯指令所對應的元件大致都已決定,而階 梯解析部3 2 j,是將那樣的對應當作資料持有。具體來說 ,圖7 3所表示的,針對代表a接點之階梯指令的L D指令 及AND指令,與開關、感應器(開/閉型)等的元件建立 其對應關係,針對代表b接點之階梯指令的L D N指令及 A N D N指令也同樣的與開關、感應器等的元件建立對應關 係。又,針對代表線圈輸出之階梯指令的OUT指令,與燈 、L E D等的元件建立其對應關係。 階梯解析部3 2 j所進行的階梯指令解析,是運用設置 於階梯解析部3 2 j如圖8 0所表示的關鍵字檢出部3 2 j 1及元 件抽出部3 2 j 2所執行的。關鍵字檢出部3 2 j 1,將與階梯指 令建立關聯的關鍵字,從階梯圖中的輸入母線方面至輸出 母線方面,並且依據步驟順序逐次的從階梯程式中檢出。 另一方面,元件抽出部3 2 j 2是將對應被檢出之關鍵字的元 件從基本元件資料庫3 2b2抽出。又,該元件抽出部32 j2, 為了將被抽出之元件和基本晝面建立對應,將包含在每個 基本晝面中所被實行的事件的情報之前述的處理指令W當 作標籤,於被抽出之元件上將標籤寫入。上述的基本元件P.97 541447 V. User interface of the description (94) (for example, dialog window). The step analysis unit 3 2 j as the extraction means is a step command included in a step program created by a user operation using the step editor 3 2 a, and is analyzed one by one, and is established with each step command. The corresponding components of the screen editor 3 2 b are extracted and summarized for one step program, and are registered in a component file 3 3 e (refer to FIG. 8) described later using a user's day-to-day unit. The components corresponding to the ladder instruction are almost determined, and the ladder analysis unit 3 2 j holds such correspondence as data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the LD instruction and the AND instruction for the ladder instruction representing the a contact are established in correspondence with components such as switches, sensors (open / closed type), and the representative b contact. The LDN instruction and ANDN instruction of the ladder instruction also establish corresponding relationships with components such as switches and sensors. In addition, for the OUT instruction representing the step instruction of the coil output, the corresponding relationship is established with the elements such as the lamp and the LED. The ladder instruction analysis performed by the ladder analysis unit 3 2 j is performed using the keyword detection unit 3 2 j 1 and the component extraction unit 3 2 j 2 provided in the ladder analysis unit 3 2 j as shown in FIG. 8 0. . The keyword detection unit 3 2 j 1 detects keywords related to the ladder instruction from the input bus to the output bus in the ladder diagram, and sequentially detects the keywords from the ladder program according to the sequence of steps. On the other hand, the component extraction unit 3 2 j 2 extracts components corresponding to the detected keywords from the basic component database 3 2b2. In addition, in order to associate the extracted components with the basic day planes, the component extraction unit 32 j2 uses the aforementioned processing instructions W including information on events performed in each basic day plane as labels, Write the label on the extracted component. The basic elements mentioned above

第98頁 541447 五、發明說明(95) 資料庫3 2 b 2是儲存開關、燈、計數器等基本元件的影像資 料之資料庫,並設置於畫面編輯器32b。 作為關鍵字的設定方法’有例如圖7 4 ( a )所表示的 ,將階梯指令直接作為關鍵字的方法和如圖7 4 ( b )所表 示的讓關鍵字附屬在配置於階梯指令的變數上等之方法。 圖74 (a)的方法是將LD指令、AND指令及OUT指令各 別配置於變數n START" 、n SW1 π及” LAMP1 π上,並將各個指 令當作關鍵字來進行設定。依據這個方法,關鍵字的另外 設定將沒有必要。另一方面,圖74 (b)的方法是先在上 述的變數n S T A R Τπ及n S W 1π上附屬具有開關含意的關鍵字 n SWn ,各別將變成"SW : START” 及” SW : SW1 ",在 n LAMP 1 π 上附屬具有燈含意的關鍵字” lamp",因此將變成 n LAMP : LAMP 1π 。依據這個方法,可讓關鍵字具有作為元 件的功能屬性。 可是,階梯解析部3 2 j是,將類似開關的位元資料之 階梯指令和元件建立關聯性的連結情報和藉由使用者所賦· 予一個個階梯指令的註解等的附帶情報,和元件一併抽出 登錄於元件檔案3 3 e中。 上述的處理功能並不是只有具備可程式控制器2而已 ,還有具有可程式控制器的功能,在後述的第2的顯示/控 制系統中的可程式顯示器1及在第3的顯示/控制系統中的 電腦裝置3。又,上述的附帶情報也可以設定為兼具變數 〇 且,上述的階梯解析部3 2 j可以是階梯編輯器3 2 a或者Page 98 541447 V. Description of the invention (95) Library 3 2 b 2 is a database for storing image data of basic components such as switches, lamps, and counters, and is set in the screen editor 32b. As the keyword setting method, there are, for example, a method shown in FIG. 7 (a), where a ladder instruction is directly used as a keyword, and a keyword shown in FIG. 7 (b), where the keyword is attached to a variable arranged in the ladder instruction. The best way. The method in Fig. 74 (a) is to arrange the LD instruction, the AND instruction, and the OUT instruction on the variables n START ", n SW1 π, and "LAMP1 π" respectively, and set each instruction as a keyword. According to this method It is not necessary to set additional keywords. On the other hand, the method of Fig. 74 (b) is to attach the keyword n SWn with a switch meaning to the above variables n STAR τπ and n SW 1π, and each will become " SW: START "and" SW: SW1 " are attached to the keyword "lamp " which has a lamp meaning to n LAMP 1 π, so it will become n LAMP: LAMP 1π. According to this method, keywords can be given functional properties as components. However, the ladder analysis unit 3 2 j is link information that associates ladder instructions and elements of switch-like bit data with associated information, and additional information such as annotations given by the user to each ladder instruction, and components. It is extracted and registered in the component file 3 3 e. The above-mentioned processing function is not only provided with the programmable controller 2, but also has the function of the programmable controller. The programmable display 1 in the second display / control system described later and the third display / control system The computer device 3. In addition, the above-mentioned incidental information may be set to have both variables. Moreover, the step analysis unit 3 2 j may be a step editor 3 2 a or

第99頁 541447 五、發明說明(96) 是晝面編輯器32b的任何一方的一個功能或者是兩個編輯 器33a、33b所共通的一個功能包含於各個編輯器中。 對於資料檔案3 3,例如,使用者程式如前述的圖5 4所 表示的儲存於階梯檔案3 3 a,使用者晝面則如圖5 5所表示 儲存於畫面檔案3 3 b中。又,元件檔案3 3 e如圖7 5 ( a )所 表示的,將藉由前述的階梯解析部3 2 j所抽出的元件之資 料在使用者晝面(一個晝面單位)上進行儲存,因而形成 元件資料庫。又,元件檔案3 3 e,將前述的連結情報、附 帶情報及變數情報當作關連情報(屬性情報)儲存於各元 件的各個資料中。 圖7 6所表示第2的顯示/控制系統,和前述第1的顯示/ 控制系統相同,雖包含了可程式顯示器1及可程式控制器2 ,但是在此的顯可程式顯示器1為了具備可程式控制器之 功能,除了在記憶體部1 2中配備靜態隨機存儲器( SRAM12)(:以外,並具備了輸出入裝置20及輸入/輸出( I / 0 )控制界面2 1。 圖7 0所表示的第3顯示/控制系統的電腦裝置3是具有 開放式控製器之功能,並備有代替前述之界面部3 8的輸出 入裝置3 9、輸入/輸出(I / 0 )控制界面4 0及界面裝置4 1 。 在此,針對在第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中,從製作 階梯程式至製作使用者晝面的處理程序,參照圖7 8的流程 圖進行說明。 製作階梯程式時,在此電腦裝置3中,階梯編輯器3 2 a 已被起動,顯示器3 5的顯示部3 5 a (參照圖8 1 ( a ))中階Page 99 541447 V. Description of the invention (96) is a function of either one of the daytime editors 32b or a function common to the two editors 33a, 33b is included in each editor. As for the data file 3 3, for example, the user program is stored in the step file 3 3 a as shown in the aforementioned FIG. 5 4, and the user ’s day is stored in the screen file 3 3 b as shown in FIG. 5. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 7 5 (a), the component file 3 3 e stores the component data extracted by the aforementioned step analysis unit 3 2 j on the user's day surface (one day surface unit). Thus, a component library is formed. The component file 3 3e stores the above-mentioned link information, accompanying information, and variable information as related information (attribute information) in each piece of data of each component. The second display / control system shown in FIG. 7 is the same as the first display / control system described above. Although the programmable display 1 and the programmable controller 2 are included, the programmable display 1 here is provided with a programmable display 1. The function of the program controller, in addition to the static random access memory (SRAM12) (:) in the memory section 12, is equipped with an input / output device 20 and an input / output (I / 0) control interface 21. Figure 7 The computer device 3 of the third display / control system shown has the function of an open controller, and is provided with an input / output device 3 instead of the aforementioned interface section 38. 9. Input / output (I / 0) control interface 4 0 And interface device 41. Here, in the first to third display / control systems, the processing procedure from the creation of the step program to the creation of the user's daytime surface will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. Creating the step program At this time, in this computer device 3, the step editor 3 2 a has been started, and the display portion 3 5 a of the display 3 5 (refer to FIG. 8 1 (a))

第100頁 541447 五、發明說明(97) 梯視窗3 2 a 1已被開啟。又,製作使用者畫面時,畫面編輯 器3 2 b已被起動,畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1也被開啟。 首先,於階梯視窗3 2 a 1上,藉由使用者的操作製作階 梯程式(S 1 5 1 )。而該階梯程式於製成後登錄於階梯檔案 3 3 a中。接著,藉由階梯解析部3 2 ],一面參照階梯檔案 3 3 a —面在階梯程式中將階梯指令逐次的解析,製作對應 階梯指令的元件資料庫(S 1 5 2 )。又,藉由畫面編輯器 3 2 b,運用該元件資料庫製作使用者晝面(S 1 5 3 ),將製 作而成的使用者晝面登錄於晝面檔案3 3 b ( S 1 5 4 ),處理 將結束。 繼續,針對上述的元件資料庫製作處理的具體範例的 程序,參照圖7 9的流程圖及圖8 0的組織圖來進行說明。 首先,從儲存在階梯檔案3 3 a中數個階梯程式中,將 應該製作成元件資料庫的階梯程式A的檔案開啟(S 1 6 1 ) 。判斷在關鍵字檢出部3 2 j中該檔案是否有可能執行關鍵 字檢出作業(S 1 6 2 )。如有可能時,就執行關鍵字檢出作 業(S 1 6 3 )。階梯程式中並未設定關鍵字等的理由而沒有 可能執行關鍵字檢出作業時,將處理移轉至S 1 6 8步驟。 接著,藉由元件抽出部3 2 j ,進入基本元件資料庫3 2 b 中(S 1 6 4 ) ’將對應階梯指令的元件’依據被檢出的關鍵 字從基本元件資料庫3 2 b 2中抽出,並將標籤寫入所被抽出 之元件(S 1 6 5 )。將依據這樣子被抽出的元件登錄於階梯 檔案3 3 a,並藉由標籤來製作在每一個晝面被區分的元件 資料庫(S 1 6 6 )。Page 100 541447 V. Description of the invention (97) The ladder window 3 2 a 1 has been opened. When creating a user screen, the screen editor 3 2 b is started, and the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 is also opened. First, on the step window 3 2 a 1, a step program is created by the user's operation (S 1 5 1). The ladder program is registered in the ladder file 3 3 a after it is created. Next, the ladder analysis unit 3 2] is used to sequentially analyze the ladder instructions in the ladder program while referring to the ladder file 3 3 a-to create a component database corresponding to the ladder instructions (S 1 5 2). In addition, the screen editor 3 2 b uses the component database to create the user's day surface (S 1 5 3), and registers the created user's day surface to the day surface file 3 3 b (S 1 5 4 ), Processing will end. Continuing, a procedure of a specific example of the component library creation process described above will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 79 and an organization chart of FIG. 80. First, from the several ladder programs stored in the ladder file 3 3 a, the file of the ladder program A that should be made into a component database is opened (S 1 6 1). It is determined whether it is possible to perform a keyword detection operation on the file in the keyword detection section 3 2 j (S 1 6 2). If possible, a keyword checkout job is performed (S 1 6 3). If there is no reason for setting keywords in the ladder program and it is not possible to perform a keyword detection operation, the process is shifted to step S 1 6 8. Next, the component extraction unit 3 2 j is used to enter the basic component database 3 2 b (S 1 6 4) 'The component corresponding to the step instruction' is retrieved from the basic component database 3 2 b 2 according to the detected keywords. And extract the tag into the extracted component (S 1 6 5). The components extracted in this way are registered in the ladder file 3 3 a, and a component database (S 1 6) that is distinguished on each day and day is created by a label.

第101頁 541447 五、發明說明(98) 接著,除了製作關聯情報外並登錄於元件檔案3 3 e ( S 1 6 7 )。又,判斷針對下一個檔案S 1 6 1至S 1 6 7的處理是否 進行(S ] 6 8 )。針對下一個檔案上述的S 1 6 1至S 1 6 7的處理 如不進行時,元件資料庫的製作將結束。 運用該元件資料庫來製作使用者畫面時,畫面編輯器 3 2 b的編輯本體3 2 b 3將一面參照元件資料庫,一面在基本 晝面上配置對應階梯指令的元件。將製作而成的使用者晝 面儲存於晝面檔案3 3 b。 在此,針對上述的具體範例進行說明。 首先,如圖8 1 ( a )所表示的在階梯視窗3 2 a 1上製作 階梯程式。該階梯程式則包含了 ,分派到開關(S W1 )及鲁 燈(LAMP1 )的步驟1 ,分派到開關(SW2 )及計數器( COUNTER )的步驟2,分派到按鍵式開關(PB1 )及LED (LED1 )的步驟3及分派到按鍵式開關(PB2 )及LED ( L E D 2 )的步驟4。 在這個狀態中,階梯解析部32j上述的S161至S168的 處理的進行結果,針對一個包含步驟1至4的階梯程式的元 件資料庫將被製成。 接著,如果藉由晝面編輯器3 2 b來製作使用者晝面時 ,則參照上述的元件資料庫。具體來說,如圖8 1所表示的 ,於畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1上顯示下拉式選項Μ。例如,從該 · 下拉式選項Μ中選取代表開關的n S W π時,如圖8 1 ( c )所 表示的將會顯示包含各別對應"SW1 "及"SW2"開關的元件 Ρ 3、Ρ 4的對話視窗D。P.101 541447 V. Description of the Invention (98) Next, in addition to creating related information, it is registered in the component file 3 3e (S 1 6 7). In addition, it is determined whether or not the processing for the next files S 1 61 to S 1 6 7 is performed (S) 6 8). The processing of S 1 61 to S 1 6 7 for the next file will be completed if it is not performed. When using this component database to create user screens, the editing body 3 2 b 3 of the screen editor 3 2 b refers to the component database while arranging components corresponding to the step instructions on the basic day surface. Store the created user day and day files in the day and night file 3 3 b. Here, the specific examples described above will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 8 1 (a), a step program is made on a step window 3 2 a 1. The ladder program includes step 1 assigned to the switch (SW1) and the lamp (LAMP1), step 2 assigned to the switch (SW2) and the counter (COUNTER), assigned to the push-button switch (PB1) and LED ( Step 3 of LED1) and Step 4 of assigning to the push-button switch (PB2) and LED (LED2). In this state, as a result of the processing of steps S161 to S168 described above by the step analysis section 32j, a component database containing step programs of steps 1 to 4 will be created. Next, if the user's daytime surface is created by the daytime surface editor 3 2 b, the above-mentioned component database is referred to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, a pull-down option M is displayed on the screen creation window 3 2 b 1. For example, when n SW π representing a switch is selected from the pull-down option M, as shown in FIG. 8 1 (c), a component P including respective switches " SW1 " and " SW2 " 3. Dialogue window D of P4.

第102頁 541447 五、發明說明(99) 從該對話視窗D中選取S W1的元件P 3時,如圖8 1 ( d ) 所表示的,元件P 3將會被配置於畫面視窗3 2 b 1上,選取 S W 2的元件P 4時,元件P 4也同樣的會被配置。將這樣的操 作針對從下拉式選項Μ中所選取之M LAMP π及"COUNTER" 執行時,如圖8 1 ( e )所表示各別對應n L A Μ Ρ π及 π COUNTER”的元件Ρ3、Ρ4將會被配置於晝面製作視窗 3 2 b 1上。這個結果,針對步驟1或者是2的階梯程式的一 個晝面份的元件配置將結束。雖沒有用圖表示,但是針對 步驟3及4的階梯程式,也同樣的會進行一個畫面份的元 件配置。 又,如圖81 (e)所表示的,與元件P3〜P6 —起顯示在 階梯記號的附近的nSWln 、nSW2n、nLAMPn&n COUNTER11 ,當作前述的附帶情報被抓取至元件資料庫中,配置元件 P 3〜P 6時,在各別的使用者晝面中順應情況當作銘板與元 件P 3〜P 6 —併顯示。又,該附帶情報可兼具有變數功能。 因此,在階梯編輯器3 2 a所輸入之情報數將可刪減。 如以上所述的,與本實施型態相關的第1至第3的顯 示/控制系統,藉由具備了階梯解析部3 2 j ,對應一個的階 梯程式的元件資料庫可全數預先製作。因為如此,使用者 依據該元件資料庫,藉由在畫面製作視窗3 2 b 1上配置元件 ,即可製作使用者畫面。像這樣,運用藉由階梯解析部 3 2 j全數製作的元件資料庫來製作使用者晝面時,可以有 效率的進行處理作業。而且,將對應階梯指令的元件運用 在使用者晝面的製作,因此不會發生雖是對應階梯指令的P.102 541447 V. Description of the invention (99) When the component P 3 of SW1 is selected from the dialog window D, as shown in Fig. 8 1 (d), the component P 3 will be arranged in the screen window 3 2 b On 1, when the component P 4 of SW 2 is selected, the component P 4 is also configured. When such an operation is performed on M LAMP π and " COUNTER " selected from the pull-down option M, as shown in Fig. 8 1 (e), each component corresponding to n LA MP π and π COUNTER "is P3, P4 will be placed on the daytime production window 3 2 b 1. This result will end the daytime component arrangement for the step program of step 1 or 2. Although not shown in the figure, for step 3 and In the 4 step program, the components of one screen are similarly arranged. As shown in Fig. 81 (e), nSWln, nSW2n, nLAMPn & n are displayed near the step mark together with the components P3 to P6. COUNTER11 is captured into the component database as the aforementioned incidental information, and when components P 3 to P 6 are arranged, it is used as a nameplate and components P 3 to P 6 in accordance with the situation of each user in the day and time — and displayed The additional information can also have a variable function. Therefore, the number of information input in the step editor 3 2 a can be deleted. As described above, the first to third related to this embodiment type Display / control system with step resolution 3 2 j, the component database corresponding to a ladder program can be fully made in advance. Because of this, the user can create a user screen based on the component database by arranging components on the screen creation window 3 2 b 1 In this way, when the user's day surface is created using the component database created by the step analysis unit 3 2 j, the processing operation can be efficiently performed. In addition, the components corresponding to the step instruction are used in the user's day surface. Production, so it does not happen although it corresponds to the ladder instruction

第103頁 541447 五、發明說明(100) 元件,但不會 的情形。 又,因為 畫面份,使用 於使用者晝面 提昇使用者畫 又,階梯 ,將階梯指令 報也是從階梯 此,只有關聯 時間可以省掉 接著,運 其元件資料庫 流程圖進行說 首先,從 應該製作成元 者晝面的 個 圖8 0中白勺階梯 面單位分割製 開啟。判斷該 關鍵字(S 1 7 2 業(S173 )。 接著,藉 中(S174 ), 反映在已製作完成的使用者晝面上之不合宜 元件資料庫將被製作成使用者晝面的每一個 者可以不用意識到階梯程式的那個部份相當 的一個晝面份就可以進行操作。於是,可以 面的製作效率。 解析部3 2 j並不只是藉由元件資料庫的製作 的情報提供給晝面編輯器3 2 b而已,關聯情 程式中抽出提供給晝面編輯器3 2 b。因為如 情報在晝面編輯器3 2 b中重新輸入的勞力和 〇 用前述的頁面模式製作了階梯程式時,針對 的製作程序,參照圖8 0的組織圖及圖8 2的 明。 儲存在階梯檔案3 3 a中數個階梯程式中,從 件資料庫的階梯程式中以每一頁相當於使用 晝面之模式開啟檔案(S 1 7 1 )。這時,代替 程式A,例如圖8 3 ( a )所表示的用一個頁 作的部份階梯程式(頁面程式)的檔案將被 檔案是否有可能藉由關鍵字檢出部3 2 j檢出 )。在此如有可能時,就執行關鍵字檢出作 如為不可能時,則將處理移轉至S 1 7 8步驟。 由元件抽出部3 2 j ,進入基本元件資料庫3 2 b 將對應階梯指令的元件,依據被檢出的關鍵P.103 541447 V. Description of the invention (100) Components, but not the case. In addition, because of the screen copy, it is used to enhance the user ’s drawing on the day and the ladder. The ladder instruction report is also from the ladder. Only the associated time can be saved. Then, run the component database flowchart to start with. The step-by-step unit division system in Figure 80 for the production of the day face of the adult is turned on. Determine the keyword (S 1 7 2 industry (S173). Then, borrow (S174), and the unsuitable component database reflected on the daytime surface of the completed user will be made into each of the daytime surface of the user The user can operate without realizing that a part of the step program is equivalent to a daytime face. Therefore, the production efficiency of the face can be obtained. The analysis section 3 2 j does not provide the daytime information only through the production information of the component database. Only the face editor 3 2 b is extracted from the related information program and provided to the day face editor 3 2 b. For example, the labor re-entered by the day face editor 3 2 b and the 〇 created a ladder program using the previous page mode. At this time, for the production procedure, refer to the organization chart in Fig. 80 and the description in Fig. 8 2. Stored in several ladder programs in the ladder file 3 3a, each page of the ladder program in the database is equivalent to use Open the file in the daytime mode (S 1 7 1). At this time, instead of program A, for example, the part of the ladder program (page program) made by one page shown in Figure 8 3 (a) will be the file whether it is possible With the key Detecting detection portion 3 2 j). If possible, perform a keyword checkout if this is not possible, and move the process to step S 1 7 8. The component extraction unit 3 2 j enters the basic component database 3 2 b. The components corresponding to the ladder instruction will be based on the detected keys.

第104頁 541447 五、發明說明(1 〇 1) 字從基本元件資料庫3 2 b 2中抽出(S 1 7 5 )。將依據這樣子 被抽出的元件登錄於階梯檔案3 3 a,並製作元件資料庫( S1 76 )。 接著,除了製作關聯情報外並登錄於元件檔案3 3 e ( S 1 7 7 )。又,判斷針對下一個頁面S 1 7 1至S 1 7 7的處理是否 進行(S 1 7 8 )。針對下一個檔案上述的S 1 7 1至S 1 7 7的處理 如不進行時,元件資料庫的製作將結束。 依據運用頁面模式所製作的階梯程式,所製作而成的 元件資料庫,如圖7 5 ( b )所表示的於每個晝面都獨立當 作螢幕資料所構成。運用該元件資料庫製作使用者晝面時 ,晝面編輯器32b的編輯本體32b3將一面參照元件資料庫 · ,一面在基本晝面上配置對應階梯指令的元件。接著,對 應階梯程式的每一頁所製作的使用者晝面(圖8 3 ( a )及 圖83 (b)中所表示的螢幕(Screenl)及2等)是儲存於 晝面檔案33b。 又,運用這樣的頁面模式來製作階梯程式時,也可以 讓從藉由階梯解析部3 2 j來進行階梯指令的解析到藉由晝 面編輯器3 2來配置元件的處理步驟自動化。該處理的具體 執行方法如下述。 首先,在登錄於元件資料庫的各個頁面的元件的基本 畫面上預先設定其配置位置,在階梯解析部32j和畫面編 _ 輯器3 2 b起動的狀態下,開始進行階梯解析處理。作為階 梯解析的結果在元件資料庫被製作的狀態下,在晝面編輯 器3 2 b中由使用者輸入自動元件配置的指示時,在預先被Page 104 541447 V. Description of the invention (1 0 1) The words are extracted from the basic component database 3 2 b 2 (S 1 7 5). The components extracted in this way are registered in the ladder file 3 3 a and a component database is created (S1 76). Next, in addition to creating related information, it is registered in the component file 3 3 e (S 1 7 7). In addition, it is determined whether or not the processing for the next pages S 1 7 1 to S 1 7 7 is performed (S 1 7 8). The processing of S 1 7 1 to S 1 7 for the next file will be completed if the component database is not processed. According to the ladder program created by using the page mode, the component database created as shown in Figure 7 5 (b) is composed of screen data on each day independently. When the user's day surface is created using this component database, the editing body 32b3 of the day surface editor 32b will refer to the component database while arranging components corresponding to the step instructions on the basic day surface. Next, the user's day screen (Screens 1 and 2 shown in Fig. 83 (a) and Fig. 83 (b)) corresponding to each page of the ladder program is stored in the day screen file 33b. When creating a ladder program using such a page mode, it is also possible to automate the process from the analysis of the ladder instruction by the ladder analysis unit 3 2 j to the arrangement of the components by the day editor 32. The specific execution method of this process is as follows. First, the arrangement positions of the components are registered in advance on the basic screens of the components registered on each page of the component library, and the step analysis processing is started with the step analysis unit 32j and the screen editor 3 2 b activated. As a result of the ladder analysis, in the state where the component database is created, when the user inputs an instruction for automatic component placement in the daytime editor 3 2 b,

第105頁 541447 五、發明說明(102) 指定於基本晝面上的位置將進行配置元件資料庫中之元件 。又,順應其必要,藉由編輯器本體3 2 b 3的操作,可進行 調整元件的位置、基本元件以外的特殊元件的配置、圖形 繪製、文字輸入等的操作,完成製作使用者所希望的畫面 〇 像這樣進行元件的自動配置,使用者可依據其需求只 要進行變更上述的元件配置位置之操作即可達目的。於是 ,可大幅降低使用者的作業負擔。又,從運用頁面模式所 製成之階梯程式來製作元件資料庫時,階梯程式將對應使 用者畫面的一個晝面而被製作,所以,元件將會變成從每 一個晝面中被抽出。因此,如前述的由普通的階梯程式將® 全數的元件資料庫製作時,標籤的寫入處理(參照圖7 9的 S165)將可不要。 又,為了執行本發明的最佳型態的項目,所構成的具 體實施方式或者是實施範例,也都只是為了讓本發明的技 術内容更加明顯,所舉出之具體範例並非用以限定本發明 之範圍,只要是符合本發明之精神和以下所記載的專利申 請範圍内,都可變化成各式各樣來執行。 【利用於產業上的可能性】 本發明的編輯設備是包含,在任何一方的第1或者是 第2編輯畫面上進行輸入資料後,選擇顯示於該編輯畫面 · 上所出現的影像區塊,且順應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之 操作,將顯示内容程式和控制程序程式之間所共通的資料 ,在將上述顯示内容程式儲存的顯示内容程式播案和將上Page 105 541447 V. Description of the Invention (102) The positions specified on the basic day surface will be used to configure the components in the component database. In accordance with the necessity, the operation of the editor body 3 2 b 3 can be used to adjust the position of the element, the arrangement of special elements other than the basic element, graphics drawing, text input, etc., and complete the production of the user's desired Screen 0: Automatic component placement is performed in this way, and the user can achieve the purpose by performing the operation of changing the above-mentioned component placement position according to his needs. Therefore, the workload of the user can be greatly reduced. In addition, when a component database is created from a ladder program created using the page mode, the ladder program is created corresponding to one day surface of the user screen, so the components will be extracted from each day surface. Therefore, when the entire component database is created by the ordinary ladder program as described above, the writing process of the label (refer to S165 in FIG. 7 and 9) is unnecessary. In addition, in order to execute the project of the best form of the present invention, the specific implementation manners or implementation examples are constituted only to make the technical content of the present invention more obvious. The specific examples are not intended to limit the present invention. As long as the scope is within the spirit of the present invention and the scope of the patent application described below, it can be implemented in various ways. [Possibility of industrial use] The editing device of the present invention includes, after inputting data on the first or second editing screen of any one, and selecting an image block appearing on the editing screen, And in accordance with the operation of copying it to other editors, it will display the data common between the content program and the control program program.

第106頁 541447 五、發明說明(103) 述控制程序程式儲存的控制程序程式檔案之間,進行複製 作業的資料複製手段。 藉此,儲存於一方檔案的資料可以複製另一方的檔案 ,因此,可以製作兩個檔案間所共通的資料庫。那樣的結 果,製作兩個編輯手段間所共通的資料庫將無此必要。且 ,也可以避開兩個編輯手段之間的資料重覆輸入。因此, 輸入操作簡單化的不斷追求,將可有效的利用資料庫。 本發明的編輯設備是包含,在任何一方的第1或者是 第2編輯畫面上進行輸入資料後,選擇顯示於該編輯畫面 上所出現的影像區塊,且順應其複製至其他編輯畫面上之 操作,依據顯示内容程式和上述控制程序程式之間所共通® 的共通資料,在第1或者是第2編輯手段中讓上述顯示内容 程式或者是上述控制程序程式產生固有的固有資料之資料 產生手段,和資料及將上述固有資料儲存為單檔案的資料 統合手段。 藉此,伴隨著影像區塊的選擇及複製的操作,將自動 產生的固有資料和共通資料運用單一標案來進行管理,因 此可以製作兩個程式所共通的單一資料庫。那樣的結果, 將兩個程式儲存於專用之檔案時,把共通資料各別的複製 到檔案之操作將可不要。又,因為資料可以單一管理,資 料的管理不只可以更容易,更可將兩個程式匯整下載至所jp 要的地方。因此,輸入操作簡單化的不斷追求,將可有效 的利用資料庫。 本發明的編輯設備是包含,在任何一方的第1或者是Page 106 541447 V. Description of the invention (103) The data copying means for copying control program program files stored in the control program program. In this way, the data stored in one file can be copied to the other file, so a common database between the two files can be created. As a result, it would not be necessary to create a database that is common between the two editing methods. And, you can avoid repeated input of data between the two editing methods. Therefore, the continuous pursuit of simplification of input operations will effectively use the database. The editing device of the present invention includes, after inputting data on any one of the first or second editing screens, selecting an image block appearing on the editing screen and copying it to other editing screens The operation is based on the common data common between the display content program and the control program program. In the first or second editing means, the data display means for the display content program or the control program program to generate inherent inherent data. , And the data and means of integrating the above-mentioned inherent data into a single file. With this, with the selection and duplication of image blocks, the inherent data and common data that are automatically generated are managed with a single project, so a single database common to both programs can be made. As a result, when the two programs are stored in a dedicated file, the operation of copying the common data to the file separately is not necessary. In addition, because the data can be managed singly, the management of the data is not only easier, but the two programs can be downloaded together to the desired place. Therefore, the continuous pursuit of simplification of the input operation will effectively use the database. The editing device of the present invention includes the first or

第107頁 541447 五、發明說明(104) 第2編輯晝面上進行輸入資料後,選擇顯示於該編輯畫面 上所出現的影像區塊,且順應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之 操作,將針對上述影像區塊的附帶情報提供給對應該編輯 晝面的編輯手段之附帶情報供給手段。 藉此,將早已被輸入在一方的編輯手段的附帶情報提 供給另外一方的編輯手段,而可以避開兩個編輯手段之間 的貢料重覆輸入。因此’將附帶情報的輸入簡早化’顯不 内容程式及控制程序程式的製作將可更有效率的進行。 本發明的編輯設備是包含,將配置於控制對象機器的 位址之變數,為了將其顯示於第1及第2編輯晝面上,對應 上述控制對象機器,在上述第1及第2編輯手段中各別被準 備的影像區塊之中,運用具有關聯性的相同功能伙伴和和 建立關聯的狀態來進行登錄的登錄手段,和除了顯示被登 錄的上述變數以外,選擇被顯示的變數,且伴隨著在上述 第1或者是第2編輯晝面上的指示操作,將與該變數建立關 聯性的影像區塊顯示於該變數所被指示的編輯晝面之顯示 手段。 藉此,依據被登錄的變數讓其顯示影像區塊,所以, 只要變數有被登錄,不管程式的製作型態,都可以執行影 像區塊的自動產生。因此,可對應程式的多樣化的製作型 態,並且可以實現程式的簡易製作。 本發明的編輯設備是包含,具有複數功能的影像區塊 是藉由第1編輯手段配置於第1編輯畫面上,除了預先將 上述控制對象機器的位址進行分配以外,將與上述影像區Page 107 541447 V. Description of the invention (104) After inputting data on the second editing day, select the image block that appears on the editing screen, and follow the operation of copying it to other editing day surfaces. The incidental information for the video block is provided to the incidental information supply means corresponding to the editing means for editing the daytime surface. Thereby, the incidental information already input in one editing means is provided to the other editing means, and the input between the two editing means can be avoided to be repeatedly input. Therefore, the “simplification and early input of information with display” display can be made more efficiently by creating content programs and control program programs. The editing device of the present invention includes a variable disposed at an address of a control target device, and in order to display it on the first and second editing daytimes, the first and second editing means correspond to the control target device. In each of the prepared image blocks, the registration means that uses the same functional partners that are related and the status that is associated with the registration, and selects the displayed variables in addition to the registered variables, and With the instruction operation on the first or second editing day, the image block associated with the variable is displayed on the editing day display means indicated by the variable. Thereby, the image block is displayed according to the registered variable. Therefore, as long as the variable is registered, the automatic generation of the image block can be performed regardless of the production type of the program. Therefore, it can cope with various production types of programs, and can realize simple production of programs. The editing device of the present invention includes: an image block having a plurality of functions is arranged on a first editing screen by a first editing means, and in addition to allocating the address of the control target device in advance, the editing block

第108頁 541447 五、發明說明(105) 塊的各個功能建立 序程式的指令依執 應上述影像區塊的 藉此,在操作 ,部份程式就會被 式的工時將會大幅 效率將可向上提昇 本發明的編輯 的指令,除了預先 立對應以外,將對 的上述控制程序程 令進行抽出作業之 藉此,影像區 效率可向上以外, 在顯示内容程式中 顯示内容程式 關聯的變數,登錄於將構成上述控制程 行順序儲存的程式目錄中,因而,將對 部份程式進行產生之程式產生手段。 上只要將影像區塊配置於第1編輯畫面 產生,所以,由使用者所設計的部份程 的被刪減◦因此,控制程序程式的製作 〇 設備是包含,將為了構成控制程序程式 與為了構成顯示内容程式的影像區塊建 應包含於藉由第2編輯手段所製作而成 式中之指令的影像區塊,針對複數的指 抽出手段。 塊將針對複數的指令被抽出,除了處理 對應指令的影像區塊也一個不漏的反映 ,因此,可以有效率、且又正確的製作 _Page 108 541447 V. Description of the invention (105) The instructions of each function to create a sequence program are in accordance with the above image block. During operation, part of the program will be substantially more efficient. In order to upgrade the editing instructions of the present invention, in addition to pre-establishing correspondence, the above control program program will be extracted, thereby improving the efficiency of the image area, and displaying the variables related to the content program in the display content program, and registering In the program directory which will sequentially store the above control programs, a program generating means will be generated for some programs. As long as the image block is placed on the first editing screen, the part of the program designed by the user is deleted. Therefore, the production of the control program is included. The equipment will be included to constitute the control program and to The construction of the image block constituting the display content program should be included in the image block of the instruction in the formula made by the second editing means, and a plurality of finger extraction means is used. Blocks will be extracted for plural instructions. In addition to processing the image blocks corresponding to the instructions, there will be no leaks, so it can be produced efficiently and correctly _

第109頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 圖1為關於本發明的第1實施型態的第1的顯示/控制系統 的構成組織圖。 圖2為關於上述第1的顯示/控制系統儲存於可程式顯示器 的電子式可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體(E E P R Ο Μ )的程式 的說明圖。 圖3為顯示於上述可程式顯示器等的包含於使用者晝面中 處理指令的基不格式的說明圖。 圖4為上述可程式顯示器的顯示動作的處理程序流程圖。 圖5 ( a )關於從第1至第3的顯示/控制系統,利用電腦裝 置所實行的複製屬性資料所運用的資料構造。 圖5 ( b )為關於上述資料構造的物件型態說明圖。 圖5 ( c )為關於上述資料構造的位址情報說明圖。 圖6 ( a )為上述關於電腦裝置所形成之階梯檔案說明圖。 圖6 ( b )為上述關於電腦裝置所形成之晝面檔案說明圖。 圖7為關於本發明的一種實施型的第2的顯示/控制系統的 構成組織圖。 圖8為關於儲存在可程式化顯示器的快閃式可抹除可程式 化唯讀記憶體(EEPROM )中,第2及第3的顯示/控制系 統的程式說明圖。 圖9為關於本發明實施行態的一種,第2的顯示/控制系統 的構成組織圖。 圖1 0為關於運用電腦裝置執行上述第1至第3的顯示/控 制糸統的編輯處理的程序流程圖。 圖1 1為上述編輯處理中所先被執行的程式設計處理的流P.109 541447 Brief Description of Drawings Figure 1 is a structural diagram of a first display / control system according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a program of the electronic erasable and programmable read-only memory (E E P R OM) stored in the programmable display by the first display / control system. Fig. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a basic format of a processing instruction included in a user's day displayed on the programmable display or the like. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a processing procedure of the display operation of the programmable display. Fig. 5 (a) Regarding the display / control systems from the first to the third, the data structure used for copying the attribute data by the computer device is used. FIG. 5 (b) is an explanatory diagram of the object type regarding the above data structure. Figure 5 (c) is an explanatory diagram of the address information on the above data structure. FIG. 6 (a) is an explanatory diagram of the step file formed by the computer device described above. FIG. 6 (b) is an explanatory diagram of the daytime file formed by the computer device described above. Fig. 7 is a configuration diagram of a second display / control system according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8 is a program explanatory diagram of the second and third display / control systems stored in the flashable erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) of the programmable display. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing the structure of a second display / control system, which is one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a program for executing the editing processing of the first to third display / control systems using a computer device. Figure 11 is the flow of the programming process executed first in the above editing process

第110頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 程圖。 圖1 2為圖1 1的程式設計處理之後所被執行的畫面製作處 理的程序流程圖。 圖1 3為上述編輯處理中先被執行的晝面製作處理的程序流 程圖。 圖1 4為圖1 3的晝面製作處理之後所被執行的程式設計處 理的程序流程圖。 圖1 5 ( a )到圖1 5 ( d )為圖1 2的程序的具體範例之說明 圖。 圖1 6為依據圖1 5 ( a )到圖1 5 ( d )的程序所被執行的屬 性資料複製的具體型態之說明圖。 圖1 7 ( a )到圖1 7 ( c )為圖1 4的程序的具體範例說明圖。 圖1 8為依據圖1 7 ( a )到圖1 7 ( c )的程序所執行屬性資 料的複製的具體型態之說明圖。 圖1 9 ( a )為運用電腦輔助設計(電腦輔助設計(C A D ))軟 體的資料讓階梯編輯器自動產生階梯記號的範列說明圖。 圖1 9 ( b )為連用電腦輔助設計(電腦輔助設計(C A D ))軟 體的資料讓晝面製作編輯器自動產生圖示的範例說明圖。 圖2 0為保存上述電腦輔助設計(電腦輔助設計(C A D ))軟 體的資料之電腦輔助設計(電腦輔助設計(C AD))資料庫 的構成說明圖。 圖2 1 ( a )為經由其它系統和外部網路所連結到第1至第 3的顯示/控制系統的組織圖。 圖2 1 ( b )為關於與外部網路連結之電腦裝置,運用不同Page 110 541447 Schematic description of the process diagram. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a screen creation process executed after the programming process of FIG. 11. Fig. 13 is a flow chart of the program of the daytime surface creation process executed first in the above editing process. Fig. 14 is a flow chart of a programming process executed after the daytime surface creation process of Fig. 13. 15 (a) to 15 (d) are explanatory diagrams of a specific example of the procedure of FIG. 12. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram of a specific type of copying of attribute data performed according to the procedures of FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (d). FIG. 17 (a) to FIG. 17 (c) are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the program of FIG. 14. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram of a specific type of copying of the attribute data executed according to the procedures of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c). Figure 19 (a) is an explanatory diagram of a series of examples using computer-aided design (Computer Aided Design (CAD)) software to allow the ladder editor to automatically generate ladder marks. Figure 19 (b) is an example explanatory diagram of the use of computer-aided design (Computer Aided Design (C A D)) software data to let the daytime production editor automatically generate icons. Fig. 20 is an explanatory diagram of the structure of a computer-aided design (computer-aided design (C AD)) database that stores data of the above computer-aided design (computer-aided design (C A D)) software. Fig. 21 (a) is an organization diagram of display / control systems connected to the first to third display / control systems via other systems and external networks. Figure 2 1 (b) is a computer device connected to an external network.

第111頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 系統的資料庫自動進行產生階梯記號及圖示的範例說明。 圖2 2為與本發明的第2的實施型態相關之第1的顯示/控 制系統的構成組織圖。 圖2 3為與本發明的第2的實施型態相關之第1至第3的顯 示/控制系統於電腦裝置的專門檔案中所形成資料庫的型 態之說明圖。 圖2 4為於上述電腦裝置的專門檔案中所形成之其他的資料 庫的型態之說明圖。 圖2 5為於上述電腦裝置的專門檔案中所形成之其他的資料 庫的型態之說明圖。 圖2 6為與本發明的第2的實施的型態相關的第2的顯示/ 控制糸統的構成組織圖。 圖2 7為與本發明的第2的實施的型態相關的第3的顯示/ 控制糸統的構成組織圖。 圖2 8為於上述第1至第3的顯示/控制系統的電腦裝置所 執行的編輯處理中,先被執行的程式設計程序的流程圖。 圖2 9為圖2 8的程式設計處理後,執行的畫面製作處理的 程序流程圖。 圖3 0為上述編輯處理中,先被執行的晝面製作處理的程序 流程圖。 圖3 1為圖3 0的晝面製作處理之後所實行的程式設計的程 序流程圖。 圖3 2 ( a )至圖3 2 ( d )為圖2 9的程序的具體範例說明圖。 圖3 3為依據圖3 2 ( a )至圖3 2 ( d )的程序所實行的處理P.111 541447 Schematic description of the system The database of the system automatically generates an example description of step marks and icons. Fig. 22 is a structural diagram of a first display / control system related to a second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 23 is an explanatory diagram of the types of databases formed by the first to third display / control systems related to the second embodiment of the present invention in a special file of a computer device. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram of the types of other databases formed in the special file of the computer device. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram of the types of other databases formed in the special file of the computer device. FIG. 26 is a structural organization diagram of a second display / control system related to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27 is a structural organization diagram of a third display / control system related to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a programming program executed first in the editing process performed by the computer device of the first to third display / control systems. Fig. 29 is a flowchart of a screen creation process executed after the programming process of Fig. 28. Fig. 30 is a flowchart of a day-to-day creation process executed first in the editing process. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a program executed after the daytime surface creation process in FIG. 30. FIG. 32 (a) to FIG. 32 (d) are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the program of FIG. Fig. 33 is a process executed according to the procedures of Fig. 32 (a) to Fig. 32 (d)

541447 圖式簡單說明 〇^白 ΚΓ 圖的 的 明理 著 說處 隨 例行 伴 範實 所 體所 及 具序 料。 的程 資圖 序的 性明 程} 屬說 的(C的之 ^rnj. 3 4 輋伤 圖3 複範 圖 為至所示 。} 上顯 圖(ca)貼的 明4 C 。和示 說3U圖製圖 圖3 能?,圖明複是 至 型據說據者 的a)依態根或 能5 {為型為號 具3435體36記 其圖圖具圖梯 制 控 / 示 頁 的 IX 第 的 0¾ 目 才 態 型 實 3 第。 的圖 明織 發組 本成 與構 為的 7 充 3系 圖&小 圖 電 型.明 Λ在 施可說 實α造 其卜 的、構 3疒'口斗 第了彳 述Ί 上,之 為系i 彳所 } ♦ a空 c/i製 38示複 圖顯料 第 勺 白 3良 αβ 目 才 態 的 資 性 3屬 第的 至行 執 上 置 裝 腦 8 9 3 3 圖圖 料 資 的 置 裝 腦 電 個 各 述 上 於 含 包 造$ 構、- 料b) 資C £ 9 I 3 上圖 為及 圖 明 說 之 案 A1AW 才 /£wl 榜 階 \ly 勺 白a 中C 案ο 4 檔圖 明 說 之 案 檔 面 書一 的 成 形 所 上 置 裝 腦 電 述 上 於 為 ο ο 4 圖圖 圖 明 說 之 細 詳 料 資 份 β— 立口 的 案 檔 面 書一 述 上 將 為 。面 圖書一 明者 說用 的使 庫及 料式 資程 通者 共用 之使。 中將圖 案,明 檔中說 料置之 資裝案 述腦檔 上電料 於述資 含上的 包於存 為為儲 1 2 并 4 4/1 圖圖入口 示 貝 的 3 第 的 aw —y 目 才 態 型 & 實 的 Ο 3 第圖 的織 明組 發成 本構 與之 為統 3系 4 圖制 示 員 鼻 的 2 第 的 關 相 態 型 施 實 的 〇 3 圖 的織 明組 發成 本構 與之 為統 4系 4 圖制 控 控 鑛龜— ^ii n 第113頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 圖45為在上述第1至第3的顯示/控制系統中運用電腦裝 置所執行的編輯處理中,先執行程式設計處理後再執行晝 面製作處理的程序流程圖。 圖4 6為在上述編輯處理中先執行晝面製作處理後執行程 式設計處理的程序流程圖。 圖4 7 ( a )至圖4 7 ( d )為圖4 5的程序的具體範例之說明 圖。 圖4 8為依據圖4 7 ( a )至圖4 7 ( d )的程序所執行處理的 具體型態說明圖。 圖4 9 ( a )至圖4 9 ( c )為圖4 6的程序的具體範例說明圖541447 Schematic illustration 〇 ^ 白 ΚΓ diagram's rationale and commentary are routinely accompanied by Fan Shisuo and ordered materials. The nature of the process sequence diagram is clear. It belongs to the (C's ^ rnj. 3 4 stabbing Figure 3. The complex diagram is shown to the top.} Ming 4 C posted on the top (ca). 3U diagram drawing diagram 3 can ?, Tu Mingfu is said to be the type of a) according to the state root or energy 5 {for the model is the number 3435 body 36 to record the figure and the ladder control / display page number IX The 0¾ head of the state is actually 3rd. The figure of the Weaving Hair Group is composed of the 7-charge and 3-series diagrams & small diagrams of electric patterns.为 所 i 彳 所} ♦ a empty c / i system 38 display compound display material No. 3 Liang αβ Project nature 3 is the first to execute the installation of the brain 8 9 3 3 Figure material The installation of the EEG is described in the package including the $ structure, and the material b) C C $ 9 I 3 The picture above is the case of A1AW / £ wl. ο 4 files are described in the case of Facebook, and the EEG is installed on the forming house. ο 4 files are described in detail in the document. β— The file of the case is listed as . The library said that the ambassadors and materials used by the authors shared the ambassadors. The lieutenant pattern, the file in the Ming file, the case file, the brain file, the electricity package, the material package, and the save package are stored as storage 1 2 and 4 4/1. y Project Status Type & Reality 0 3 The structure of the structure shown in the figure is a system of 3 series 4 graphics showing the nose 2 The structure of the structure shown in the figure 3 The cost structure is the same as that of the 4 series and 4 graph control and control mining turtles. ^ Ii n p. 113 541447 Brief description of the drawing Figure 45 is implemented by using a computer device in the above-mentioned first to third display / control systems. In the editing process, a program flowchart is executed after the programming process is executed and then the day-and-day production process is executed. Fig. 46 is a flow chart of a program that executes day-to-day production processing and then program design processing in the editing process. Fig. 47 (a) to Fig. 47 (d) are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the program of Fig. 45. Fig. 48 is a diagram illustrating a specific type of processing executed according to the procedures of Figs. 47 (a) to 47 (d). Figure 4 9 (a) to Figure 4 9 (c) are specific examples of the program of Figure 4 6

〇 圖5 0為依據圖4 9 ( a )至圖4 9 ( c )的程序所執行處理的 具體型態說明圖。 圖5 1為與本發明的第4的實施的型態相關之第1的顯示/ 控制系統的構成組織圖。 圖5 2 ( a )為讓變數具有功能屬性的第2方法的具體範例 之說明圖。 圖5 2 ( b )為為了設定上述功能屬性的對話視窗(d i a 1 og box) 之說明圖。〇 FIG. 50 is a specific type explanatory diagram of the processing executed according to the programs of FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c). FIG. 51 is a structural organization diagram of a first display / control system related to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 5 2 (a) is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the second method for making variables have functional attributes. FIG. 5 2 (b) is an explanatory diagram of a dialog window (d i a 1 og box) for setting the above-mentioned functional attributes.

圖5 3為顯示上述變數的·變數目錄之說明圖。 圖5 4為與第4的實施型態相關,在各個顯示/控制系統中 被電腦裝置所設置形成資料檔案的階梯檔案的構成說明圖Fig. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a variable list of the above-mentioned variables. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating the structure of a step file formed by a computer device in each display / control system in accordance with the fourth embodiment.

第114頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 圖5 5為在上述的各個顯示/控制系統中被電腦裝置所設置 形成資料檔案的晝面檔案的構成說明圖。 圖5 6為在上述的各個顯示/控制系統中被電腦裝置所設置 形成資料檔案的其他的構成說明圖。 圖5 7為與本發明的第4的實施的型態相關第2的顯示/控 制系統的構成組織圖。 圖5 8為與本發明的第4的實施的型態相關第3的顯示/控 制系統的構成組織圖。 圖5 9為製作於上述的各個顯示/控制系統中所被執行的使 用者程式的程序流程圖。 圖6 0為製作於上述的各個顯示/控制系統中所被執行的使 · 用者畫面的程序流程圖。 圖61 (a)至圖61 (c)為將使用者程式及使用者晝面同時 進行製作時的階梯編輯器及晝面編輯器的動作具體範例之 說明圖。 圖6 2為與本發明的第5的實施型態相關第1的顯示/控制 糸統的構成組織圖。 圖6 3 ( a )及圖6 3 ( b )為與第5的實施型態相關,於各個 顯示/控制系統中被電腦裝置所設置的畫面編輯器上被輸 入的複合元件的貢料和儲存根據這個貢料運用階梯編輯裔 所產生的階梯回路的子檔(sub f i 1 e )間的關聯建立之說· 明圖。 圖6 4為與本發明的第5的實施型態相關的第2的顯示/控 制糸統的構成組織圖。P.114 541447 Brief Description of Drawings Figures 5 and 5 are explanatory diagrams of the structure of daytime files that are set by computer devices to form data files in each of the above display / control systems. Fig. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing another structure of a data file provided by a computer device in each of the above display / control systems. Fig. 57 is a diagram showing the structure of a second display / control system related to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 58 is a configuration diagram of a third display / control system related to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 59 is a program flowchart of a user program produced in each of the above display / control systems. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a program of a user screen created in each of the above display / control systems. Fig. 61 (a) to Fig. 61 (c) are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the operation of the step editor and the day editor when the user program and the user's day editor are produced simultaneously. Fig. 62 is a structural organization diagram of a first display / control system related to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 63 (a) and Fig. 63 (b) are related to the fifth embodiment, and the materials and storage of the composite components input on the screen editor set by the computer device in each display / control system According to this tribute, the explanation and establishment of the association between the sub-files (sub fi 1 e) of the staircase circuit generated by the staircase editing family. Fig. 64 is a configuration diagram of a second display / control system related to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.

第115頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 圖6 5為為 制系統的 圖6 6為於 將複合元 序之流程 圖67 (a ) 6 6的處理 圖6 8為從 利用之階 圖 69 ( a ) 之說明圖 圖69 (b ) 所產生的 圖7 0為從 用之階梯 圖71 (a ) 圖71 (b ) 圖72為與 制糸統的 圖73為在 電腦裝置 的對應建 圖 74 ( a ) 建立的具 本發明的第5的實施型態相關的第3的顯示/控 構成組織圖。 上述的各個顯示/控制系統中所被執行,伴隨著 件配置於使用者晝面中所產生階梯回路的處理程 圖。 至圖6 7 ( c )為配置複合開關的複合元件時,圖 程序的具體範例之說明圖。 上述複合開關的複合元件中產生階梯回路時所被 梯目錄之說明圖。 為配置於晝面製作視窗上的計數器的複合元件 〇 為因配置計數器的複合元件,而於階梯視窗上 階梯回路之回路圖。 上述計數器的複合元件中產生階梯回路時所被利 目錄之說明圖。 為將對應上述複合開關的階梯回路 為將對應上述計數器的階梯回路 本發明的第6的執行型態相關之第1的顯示/控 構成組織圖。 與第6的實施型態相關的各個顯示/控制系統的 中的階梯解析部,將持有資料階梯指令和元件間 立之說明圖。 及圖7 4 ( b )為的階梯指令和關鍵字之間之關聯 體範例說明圖。Page 115 541447 Brief description of the diagrams Figure 6 5 is a system diagram Figure 6 6 is a flowchart of the complex element sequence 67 (a) 6 6 Figure 6 8 is from the use of the step diagram 69 (a) Figure 70 (b) is an explanatory diagram. Figure 70 is a slave ladder diagram 71 (a). Figure 71 (b). Figure 72 is a system diagram. Figure 73 is a corresponding diagram of the computer device. 74 (a). An organization chart of the third display / control structure related to the fifth embodiment of the present invention is established. The execution of each display / control system described above is accompanied by a processing flowchart of a step loop generated in a user's daytime surface. Fig. 7 to (c) are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the program when the composite element of the composite switch is configured. An explanatory diagram of a ladder catalog when a ladder circuit is generated in a composite element of the above-mentioned composite switch. The composite component of the counter placed on the daylight window is created. ○ It is the circuit diagram of the ladder circuit on the stepped window due to the composite component of the counter. An explanatory diagram of a catalogue which is generated when a ladder circuit is generated in the composite element of the above counter. The first display / control structure related to the sixth execution pattern of the present invention is a structural diagram of a ladder circuit corresponding to the above-mentioned composite switch. The step analysis unit in each display / control system related to the sixth embodiment will hold a data ladder instruction and an elementary explanatory diagram of components. And Fig. 74 (b) is an explanatory diagram of an example of the relationship between the ladder instruction and the keywords.

第116頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 圖75 (a ) 裝置所設 圖76為與 制系統的 圖7 7為與 制系統的 圖78為於 從階梯程 製作的處 圖79為圖 圖。 圖8 0為將 ,對應建 圖 8 1 ( a ) 圖81 (b ) 元件資料 圖8 2為依 資料庫的 圖 83 ( a ) 明圖。 圖 83 (b ) 面之說明 圖 84 ( a ) 情報說明 5 7 圖 及 腦 電 被 中 統 系 制 控 / 示 顯 述 上 在 為 之 案 ΓΓν 檔第 件的 元明 的發 置本 圖 明 說 成 空 τί / 示 頁 勺 白 2 勺 白 α-Ά οβ 目 才 態 型 & 實 勺 白 示 顯 勺 白 3 第 勺 白 目 才 態 型 & 實 勺 白 ο 6 圖第 織的 組明 成發 構本 /資 &件 。顯元 圖個至 織各作 組的製 成述的 構上式 由 控 經 將 行 執 被 所 中 統 系 制 控 作 製 的 庫 料 的 面 書一 者 用 使 程 流 之 序 程 作 製 的 」srg- 料 資 件 。元 |111~ ’ 程中 流當 之理 序處 程的 理78 個 各 的 案 檔。 料圖 資織 和組 部之 個理 各處 的的 部78 輯圖 編立 上} 窗e) 視C 梯1 才 8 階圖 為至 β— J&口 幺Ρ 關 的 間 之 圖 明 說 之 式 程 榜 階 的 成 製 被 所 的 得 所 序 程 g11 理 處 的 9 7 圖 用 ¾ 為 件 元 作 製 Ο > 圖式 明程 說梯 程階 過之 之而 面作 晝製 者所 用式 使模 作面 製頁 來用 庫據 圖 程 流 之 序 程 說 之 式 程 梯 階 的 份 頁 2 作 製 所 式 模 面 頁 用 運 為 食田一 者 用 使 的 份 頁 2 式 程 梯 階 的 a /IV 3 8 圖 應 對 為 圖 帶 附 之 圖 梯 階 予 賦 所 器 輯 編 梯 皆 Π— 之 前 從 據 依 為 圖Page 116 541447 Brief description of the drawings Figure 75 (a) Device setup Figure 76 is the system of the control system Figure 7 7 is the system of the control system Figure 78 is a place made from the ladder process Figure 79 is a map Fig. 80 is the corresponding figure of Fig. 81 (a), Fig. 81 (b), and the component data. Fig. 8 2 is a detailed diagram of Fig. 83 (a) according to the database. Figure 83 (b) on the side Figure 84 (a) Information on the side 5 7 The picture and the EEG are controlled by the Central Department of the system / show clearly the case ΓΓν file of the Yuan Ming issued this picture clearly stated Empty τί / Display page 2 Display white α-Ά οβ Head form & Real appearance 3 Display head form & Real appearance ο 6 Figure composition of the composition / Owned & The above-mentioned structural formula of the production group of the Yuanyuan group is made by the face-to-face book of the control system, the control system, the control system, and the control system. The srg- material Documents. Yuan | 111 ~ ’The premise of the process in the process The preparatory process of the process manages 78 individual case files. Department of Material Mapping and Organization of the Department of the 78 Department of Editing and Editing} Window e) View the C ladder 1 to 8 as the diagram to the β-J & 口 幺 Ρ 关 的 之 明明 式Cheng Bangjie's Cheng Zhiwei obtained the sequence of the sequence g11 9 7 Figures made with ¾ for the element 0 > Schema Ming Cheng said that the steps passed by the day and used by the day to make the model for the system The page is based on the sequence of the step of the library according to the sequence of the flow. The sheet of the step 2 is made by the manufacturer. The sheet of the sheet is used by one of the food field. The a / IV 3 of the step of the pattern 2 should be attached to the chart. The steps of the map are assigned to the editor. All the previous steps are based on the figure.

第117頁 541447 圖式簡單說明 圖8 4 ( b )為依據從前之晝面編輯器所賦予畫面之附帶情 報說明圖。 圖符簡單說明】 可程式顯示器 可程式控制器 電腦裝置 輸出入機器 記錄媒介 開放式電腦網路P.117 541447 Brief description of the diagrams Figure 8 4 (b) is an explanatory diagram of the attached information according to the screen provided by the previous day editor. Simple explanation of icon] Programmable display Programmable controller Computer device Input / output device Recording medium Open computer network

32a 階 梯 編 輯 器 32al 階 梯 視 窗 32b 晝 面 編 輯 器 32bl 畫 面 製 作 視 32c 應 用 程 式 32cl 電 腦 輔 助 -i-rc 5又 計(C A D )視窗 32d 複 製 功 能 部 32e 複 製 功 能 部 32f 檔 案 管 理 部 3 2g 複 製 功 能 部 32h 變 數 管 理 部 32 i 階 梯 回 路 產 生部 32 j 階 梯 解 析 部 32 jl 關 鍵 字 檢 出 部 第118頁 54144732a Ladder editor 32al Ladder window 32b Daytime editor 32bl Screen production video 32c Application 32cl Computer-aided-i-rc 5 (CAD) window 32d Copy function section 32e Copy function section 32f File management section 3 2g Copy function section 32h variable management section 32 i step loop generation section 32 j step analysis section 32 jl keyword detection section page 118 541447

第119頁Chapter 119

Claims (1)

541447 _案號 89117483 六、申請專利範圍541447 _Case No. 89117483 VI. Scope of patent application 1 . 一種編輯設備,其所包含的内容有:具有顯示控制對象 機器之狀態顯示功能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作 的控制功能部的顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述 顯示功能部所執行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1 編輯晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了 制定上述控制功能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程 式是在第2編輯晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯手 段,和關於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上 所輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯晝面上的影像區塊, 且順應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之操作,將顯示内容程 式和控制程序程式之間所共通的資料,在將上述顯示内 容程式儲存的顯示内容程式檔案和將上述控制程序程式 儲存的控制程序程式檔案之間,進行複製作業的資料複 製手段。 2. 如申請專利範圍第1項記載的編輯設備;其中,資料複 製手段是,關於在應用軟體的操作輸入晝面上所輸入之 資料,選擇顯示於該操作晝面上的影像區塊,且順應複 製到上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上之操作,將上述顯示 内容程式或者是上述控制程序程式和上述應用軟體程式 的資料之間共通資料,複製到上述顯示内容程式檔案或 者是上述控制程序程式檔案。1. An editing device comprising: a display / control system having a status display function section for displaying a control target device and a control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device, in order to formulate the display function section The display content program of the executed display content is a first editing means created in response to an input operation on the first editing day and a control program program for formulating a control program executed by the control function section is performed on the second editing day. The second editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the surface, and the data input on the first or second editing day on either side, select the image block displayed on the editing day, and conform to The operation of copying it to other editors on the daytime will display the data common between the display content program and the control program program, the display content program file stored in the display content program and the control program program file stored in the control program program. Means of copying data between copying operations. 2. The editing device as described in item 1 of the scope of patent application; wherein the data copying means is to select the image block displayed on the daytime surface of the operation input data on the daytime input surface of the application software, and In accordance with the operation of copying to the first or second editing day, copy the common data between the display content program or the control program program and the data of the application software program to the display content program file or the above Control program file. 3. 如申請專利範圍第1項所記載的編輯設備;其中,第1編 輯手段是在上述第1編輯晝面上將上述控制對象機器及 將那些狀態當作影像區塊進行繪製時,對各個控制對象3. The editing device described in item 1 of the scope of patent application; wherein, the first editing means is to draw the above-mentioned control target machine and the states as image blocks on the first editing day, and to draw each controlled object 第117頁Chapter 117 第118頁 541447 919. 13 案號 89117483 年 月 曰 修正 々、申請專利範圍 將上述顯示内容程式或者是上述控制程序程式和上述應 用軟體程式的資料之間的共通資料,複製到上述顯示内 容程式檔案或者是上述控制程序程式檔案。 7.如申請專利範圍第1 、2、3、4、5或第6項所記載的編輯 設備;其中,藉由電腦網路與上述顯示/控制系統不同 的系統連結,上述資料複製手段在上述檔案和上述系統 之間進行複製作業。 8 .如申請專利範圍第1項所記載的編輯設備;其中,在任 何一方的第1或者是第2編輯晝面上進行輸入資料後,選 擇顯示於該編輯晝面上所出現的影像區塊,且順應其複 製至其他編輯晝面上之操作,將針對上述影像區塊的附 帶情報供給對應編輯晝面的編輯手段的附帶情報供給手 段。 9.如申請專利範圍第8項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上述 第1編輯手段,在上述第1編輯畫面上,除了將上述對象 機器及代表其狀態的複數的顯示符號作為上述影像區塊 進行繪製以外,並將包含對應各控制對象機器所設定的 變數,和上述顯示内容程式及上述控制程序程式所共通 的共通資料和上述附帶情報一併輸入; 上述第2編輯手段,在上述第2編輯晝面上,除了將象徵 對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號當作 上述影像區塊進行繪製以外,並將上述共通資料和上述 附帶情報一併輸入; 上述附帶情報供給手段,在上述第1或者是第2編輯手段Page 118 541447 919. 13 Case No. 89117483 Amendment 々, patent application scope Copy the above-mentioned display content program or the common data between the above control program program and the above application software program data to the above-mentioned display content program file Or the above control program file. 7. The editing device as described in claims 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 in the scope of patent application; wherein the computer network is connected to a different system from the above display / control system, and the above-mentioned data copying means are in the above Copy files between the files and the above system. 8. The editing device as described in item 1 of the scope of patent application; wherein, after inputting data on the first or second editing day surface of any party, selecting an image block appearing on the editing day surface In accordance with the operation of copying it to other editing daytime, the additional information for the above-mentioned image blocks is provided with the additional information supply means corresponding to the editing means of the editing daytime. 9. The editing device described in item 8 of the scope of patent application; wherein, in the first editing means, on the first editing screen, the target device and a plurality of display symbols representing the state are used as the image block. In addition to drawing, input the variables corresponding to each control target device, and the common data and the supplementary information common to the display content program and the control program program; the second editing means is in the second On the editing day, in addition to drawing several control symbols that symbolize the control actions of the control target device as the image blocks, and inputting the common data and the incidental information together; the incidental information supply means, In the above first or second editing means 第119頁 ▼Page 119 ▼ 541447 ▼ _案號89117483_%: ~ ^ 曰 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 中,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所被選擇 ,且被複製到另一方編輯晝面的上述影像區塊,藉由參 照其隨附在該影像區塊的共通資料,將對應被選擇的影 像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制對象機器的 影像區塊和上述附帶情報將一併自動的繪製。 1 0.如申請專利範圍第9項所記載編輯設備;其中,附帶情 報包含於上述共通資料中。 1 1 .如申請專利範圍第1 0項記載的編輯設備;其中,附帶 情報為上述變數。541447 ▼ _Case No. 89117483_%: ~ ^ Revision_ VI. In the scope of patent application, any one of the above first or second editing day on the day is selected and copied to the other editing day image on the day By referring to the common data attached to the image block, the control target device corresponding to the selected image block and the image block that targets the same control target device and the incidental information will be automatically integrated together. Drawing. 10. The editing equipment as described in item 9 of the scope of patent application; wherein the incidental information is included in the above-mentioned common materials. 1 1. The editing device described in item 10 of the scope of patent application; wherein the incidental information is the above-mentioned variables. 1 2 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:其中具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示 功能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯畫面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理;1 2. — A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer, which includes: a status display function section for displaying the control target device and a control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. The display / control system is the first editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing screen in order to formulate the display content program executed by the display function section and the control executed by the control function section. The control program of the program is the second editing process created in accordance with the input operation on the second editing screen; 和關於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所輸 入之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯晝面上的影像區塊,且順 應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之操作,上述顯示内容程式 和上述控制程序程式之間所共通的資料,在將上述顯示 内容程式儲存的顯示内容程式檔案和將上述控制程序程 式儲存的控制程序程式檔案之間,進行複製作業的資料 複製處理。With regard to the data entered on the first or second editing day on either side, select the image block displayed on the editing day, and copy it to the other editing day. The above display The data shared between the content program and the control program is copied and copied between the display content program file stored in the display content program and the control program program file stored in the control program. 第120頁 541447 m " ▼ _案號89117483_单 月 曰 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 1 3 .如申請專利範圍第1 2項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,第1 編輯處理是在上述第1編輯畫面上將上述控制對象機器 及將那些的狀態當作影像區塊進行繪製時,對各個控 制對象機器輸入特定的屬性資料; 上述第2編輯處理,在上述第2編輯晝面上對應上述控 制對象機器代表控制動作的複數的符號當作影像區塊 進行繪製時,將上述屬性資料輸入; 上述資料複製處理,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編 輯晝面上,將隨附於所被選擇的上述影像區塊的屬性 資料,在上述兩個檔案間進行複製,對應屬性資料被 複製的任何一方的上述檔案的上述第1或者是第2編輯 手段,藉由參照被複製的屬性資料,對應被選擇的影 像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制對象機器 的影像區塊自動的讓其繪製。 1 4.如申請專利範圍第1 2項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,上 述資料複製處理,將上述屬性資料在影像區塊的選擇 及進行複製的操作之前先進行複製。Page 120 541447 m " ▼ _Case No. 89117483_Single Month Amendment_ VI. Patent Application Range 1 3. The recording medium as described in Item 12 of the Patent Application Range; where the first editing process is in the 1 When editing the control target device and the states of those control objects as image blocks on the editing screen, input specific attribute data for each control target device; the second editing process corresponds to the above on the second editing day When the plural symbols representing the control actions of the control target machine are drawn as image blocks, the above-mentioned attribute data is input; the above-mentioned data is copied and processed, and the first or second editing day of either party will be attached to the The attribute data of the selected image block is copied between the two files, and the first or second editing means of the file corresponding to any one of the attribute data is copied by referring to the copied attribute data. , The control target machine corresponding to the selected image block and the image block for the same control target machine will be automatically made System. 14. The recording medium as described in Item 12 of the scope of patent application; wherein, in the above-mentioned data copying process, the above-mentioned attribute data is copied before the selection of the image block and the copy operation. 1 5 ·如申請專利範圍第1 2、1 3或第1 4項所記載的記錄媒介; 其中,上述資料複製處理是,關於在應用軟體程式的 操作輸入畫面上所輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該操作晝 面上的影像區塊,且順應複製到上述第1或者是第2編 輯晝面上之操作,將上述顯示内容程式或者是上述控 制程序程式和上述應用軟體程式的資料之間的共通資 料,複製到上述顯示内容程式檔案或者是上述控制程1 5 · The recording medium as described in Items 1, 2, 13 or 14 in the scope of patent application; where the above-mentioned data copying process is about the data input on the operation input screen of the application software program, and it is selected to be displayed on This operation is to copy the image blocks on the daytime surface to the first or second editing daytime operation, and to share the data between the display content program or the control program program and the application software program. Data, copied to the above display content program file or the above control program 第121頁 Of,,' 年月日 修正 541447 案號 89Π7483 六、申請專利範圍 序程式檔案。 1 6 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:以具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示 功能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部 的顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所 執行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯晝面上順 應輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制 功能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編 輯晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理的任何一 方;Page 121 Of ,, 'Year Month Day Amendment 541447 Case No. 89Π7483 VI. Scope of Patent Application Sequence file. 16. A computer-readable recording medium for storing editing programs. The recording medium includes a display function section for displaying the status of the control target device and a control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. The display / control system is the first editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing day in order to formulate the display content program executed by the display function section and executed by the control function section. The control program of the control program is any one of the second editing processes created in accordance with the input operation on the second editing day; 和關於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所 輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯畫面上的影像區塊, 且順應其複製至其他編輯畫面上之操作,將顯示内容 程式和控制程序程式之間所共通的貢料’在將上述顯 示内容程式儲存的顯示内容程式檔案和將上述控制程 序程式儲存的控制程序程式檔案之間,進行複製作業 的資料複製處理。 1 7 .如申請專利範圍第1 6項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,第1 編輯處理是在上述第1編輯晝面上將上述控制對象機器 及將那些的狀態當作影像區塊進行繪製時,對各個控 制對象機器輸入特定的屬性資料;With regard to the data entered on the first or second editing day on either side, select the image block displayed on the editing screen and copy it to other editing screens to display the content program. The data shared between the control program and the control program are used to copy data between the display program file stored in the display program and the control program program file stored in the control program. 17. The recording medium described in item 16 of the scope of patent application; wherein the first editing process is to draw the control target devices and the states of those as image blocks on the first editing day. Enter specific attribute data for each control target machine; 上述第2編輯手段,在上述第2編輯晝面上對應上述控 制對象機器代表控制動作的複數的符號當作影像區塊 進行繪製時,將上述屬性資料輸入;In the second editing means, when the plurality of symbols corresponding to the control target machine representative control action on the second editing day are drawn as image blocks, the attribute data is input; 第122頁 541447 _案號89117483_年月曰 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 上述資料複製手段,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編 輯畫面上,將隨附於所被選擇的上述影像區塊的屬性 資料,在上述兩個檔案間進行複製,對應屬性資料被 複製的任何一方的上述檔案的上述第1或者是第2編輯 手段,藉由參照被複製的屬性資料,對應被選擇的影 像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制對象機器 的影像區塊自動的讓其繪製。 1 8 .如申請專利範圍第1 7項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,上 述資料複製處理,將上述屬性資料在影像區塊的選擇 及進行複製的操作之前先進行複製。Page 122 541447 _Case No. 89117483_Amendment of the month of the year_ Sixth, the scope of patent application of the above-mentioned data copying means, any one of the above first or second editing screen will be attached to the selected image block The attribute data is copied between the two files, corresponding to the first or second editing means of any one of the above-mentioned files in which the attribute data is copied, and by referring to the copied attribute data, corresponding to the selected image area The control target machine of the block and the image block for the same control target machine are automatically drawn. 18. The recording medium described in item 17 of the scope of patent application; wherein, in the above-mentioned data copy processing, the above-mentioned attribute data is copied before the selection of the image block and the copy operation. 1 9 .如申請專利範圍第1 6、1 7或第1 8項所記載的記錄媒介; 其中,上述資料複製處理是,關於在應用軟體程式的 操作輸入晝面上所輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該操作畫 面上的影像區塊,且順應複製到上述第1或者是第2編 輯晝面上之操作,將上述顯示内容程式或者是上述控 制程序程式和上述應用軟體程式的資料之間的共通資 料,複製到上述顯示内容程式檔案或者是上述控制程 序程式檔案。 2 (K如申請專利範圍第1 2項或第1 6項所記載的記錄媒介; 其中,關於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯畫面 上所輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯晝面上的影像區19. The recording medium described in item 16, 16, or 18 of the scope of patent application; wherein the above-mentioned data copying process is to select and display the data input on the daytime input surface of the operation input of the application software program. The image blocks on the operation screen are copied to the first or second editing day, and the display content program or the control program program and the data of the application software program are shared. The data is copied to the display program file or the control program file. 2 (K is the recording medium described in item 12 or item 16 of the scope of patent application; where the information entered on the first or second editing screen of either party is selected to be displayed on the editing day Image area on surface 塊,且順應其複製至其他編輯畫面上之操作,將關於 上述影像區塊的附帶情報提供給對應該編輯晝面的編 輯處理之附帶情報供給處理。Block, and in accordance with the operation of copying it to other editing screens, the incidental information about the above-mentioned image block is provided to the incidental information supply process corresponding to the editing process of the editing day and time. 第123頁 541447 案號 89117483 年 月 修正 t、申請專利範圍 2 1 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項所記載的記錄媒介;上述第1編 輯手段,在上述第1編輯晝面上,除了將上述對象機器 及代表其狀態的複數的顯示符號作為上述影像區塊進 行繪製以外,並將包含對應各控制對象機器所設定的 變數,和上述顯示内容程式及上述控制程序程式所共 通的共通資料和上述附帶情報一併輸入; 上述第2編輯手段,在上述第2編輯畫面上,除了將象 徵對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號 當作上述影像區塊進行繪製以外,並將上述共通資料 和上述附帶情報一併輸入;P.123 541447 Case No. 89117483 Amended t. Patent application scope 2 1. Recording medium as described in item 20 of the patent application scope; the first editing means on the first editing day, in addition to the above The target device and a plurality of display symbols representing its state are drawn as the image block, and will include variables set corresponding to each control target device, common data common to the display content program and the control program program, and the above. The information is inputted together. In the second editing means, on the second editing screen, in addition to drawing a plurality of control symbols that symbolize the control operations corresponding to the control target device as the image blocks, the common information is used. Enter the information together with the above incidental information; 上述附帶情報供給手段,在上述第1或者是第2編輯手 段中,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所被 選擇,且被複製到另一方編輯畫面的上述影像區塊, 猎由參照其隨附在該影像區塊的共通貢料’將對應被 選擇的影像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制 對象機器的影像區塊和上述附帶情報將一併自動的繪 製。 2 2 .如申請專利範圍第2 1項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,附 帶情報是包含於上述共通資料中。 2 3 .如申請專利範圍第2 2項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,附 帶情報是上述變數。In the above-mentioned additional information supply means, in the first or second editing means, any one of the first or second editing day is selected on the day and is copied to the video block of the other editing screen, By referring to the common materials attached to the image block, the control target machine corresponding to the selected image block and the image block and the incidental information for the same control target machine will be automatically drawn together. . 2 2. The recording medium described in item 21 of the scope of patent application; wherein additional information is included in the above-mentioned common materials. 2 3. The recording medium described in item 22 of the scope of patent application; wherein the accompanying information is the above-mentioned variable. 2 4. —種編輯設備,其所包含的内容有:具有顯示控制對 象機器之狀態顯示功能部和,控制該控制對象機器之 動作的控制功能部的顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定2 4. An editing device including: a display / control system including a status display function section for displaying a control target device and a control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. 第124頁 541447 案號 89117483 年 月 曰 修正 六、申請專利範圍 上述顯示功能部所執行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是 在第1編輯畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段 及為了制定上述控制功能部所執行的控制的程序的控 制程序程式是在第2編輯晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的 第2編輯手段和,關於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2 編輯晝面上所輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯畫面上 的影像區塊,且順應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之操作Page 124 541447 Case No. 89117483 Amendment VI. Scope of patent application The display content program executed by the display function unit described above is the first editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing screen and for the purpose of formulating the above The control program program of the control program executed by the control function section is a second editing means created in response to an input operation on the second editing day and the above-mentioned first or second editing day on either side Enter the data, select the image block displayed on the editing screen, and copy it to other editing operations. ,依據顯示内容程式和控制程序程式之間所共通的資 料,在上述第1或者是第2編輯手段上的上述顯示内容 程式和上述控制程序程式中產生固有的固有資料的資 料產生手段和,將上述共通資料及上述固有資料儲存 於單一槽案的資料統合手段。 2 5 .如申請專利範圍第2 4項所記載的編輯設備;其中,第1 編輯手段,在上述第1編輯晝面上,將上述對象機器及 代表其狀態的複數的顯示符號作為上述影像區塊進行 繪製,並一併將上述共通資料輸入; 上述第2編輯手段,在上述第2編輯晝面上,除了將象 徵對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號 當作上述影像區塊進行繪製以外,並一併將上述共通 貢料輸入,, According to the data common between the display content program and the control program program, the data generating means and the inherent inherent data generated in the display content program and the control program program in the first or second editing means, and A data integration method in which the above-mentioned common data and the above-mentioned inherent data are stored in a single slot case. 25. The editing device as described in item 24 of the scope of patent application; wherein, the first editing means uses the target device and a plurality of display symbols representing the status on the first editing day as the image area. The second editing means, on the second editing day, except that several control symbols that symbolize the control actions corresponding to the control target device are used as the image blocks. In addition to drawing, and input the common materials mentioned above, 上述資料產生手段,在上述第1或者是第2編輯手段中 ,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯畫面上所被選擇 ,且被複製到另一方編輯晝面的上述影像區塊,藉由 參照其隨附在該影像區塊的共通資料,對應被選擇的In the above-mentioned data generating means, in the above-mentioned first or second editing means, any one of the above-mentioned first or second editing screens is selected, and is copied to the other party to edit the above-mentioned image block on the daytime surface. Corresponding to the common data attached to the image block, corresponding to the selected 第125頁 541447 _案號 89117483_日__ 六、申請專利範圍 影像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制對象機 器的影像區塊將自動的繪製。 2 6 .如申請專利範圍第2 5項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述資料統合手段,將作為包含上述控制對象機器的位 址及被設定對應該位址的變數的上述共通資料的變數 資料和,作為包含上述控制符號及對應該符號的上述 變數名的上述固有資料的控制符號資料和,作為包含 上述顯示符號及對應該符號的上述變數名的上述固有 資料的顯示符號資料,運用可以結合的型態將其儲存 於上述檔案。P.125 541447 _Case No. 89117483_Day__ VI. Scope of patent application The control target machine of the image block and the image block that will be directed to the same control target machine will be automatically drawn. 2 6. The editing device described in item 25 of the scope of patent application; wherein the data integration means will be the variable data including the common data of the address of the control target device and the variable set corresponding to the address. And, as the control symbol data including the control symbol and the inherent data of the variable name corresponding to the symbol, and as the display symbol data including the display symbol and the inherent data of the variable name corresponding to the symbol, the operation can be combined with Save it in the above file. 2 7 .如申請專利範圍第2 4項所記載的編輯設備;其中,關 於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所輸入 之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯晝面上的影像區塊,且順 應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之操作,將關於上述影像 區塊的附帶情報提供給對應該編輯畫面的編輯處理之 附帶情報供給處理。27. The editing device as described in item 24 of the scope of patent application; wherein, regarding the data input on the first or second editing day on either side, the image displayed on the editing day is selected. Block, and in accordance with the operation of copying it to other editing surfaces, the incidental information about the image block is provided to the incidental information supply process corresponding to the editing process of the editing screen. 2 8 .如申請專利範圍第2 7項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述編輯手段,在上述第1編輯晝面上,除了將代表上述 對象機器之狀態的複數的顯示符號作為上述影像區塊 進行繪製以外,包含對應各個控制對象機器所被設定 之變數的上述顯示内容程式及上述控制程序程式所共 通的共通資料和,上述附帶情報進行輸入作業; 上述第2編輯手段,在上述第2編輯晝面上,除了將象 徵對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號2 8. The editing device described in item 27 of the scope of patent application; wherein, in the editing means, on the first editing day, a plurality of display symbols representing the state of the target device are used as the image block. In addition to drawing, the display content program and common data common to the control program program corresponding to the variables set for each control target device are included, and the incidental information is used for input operations; the second editing means is edited in the second In the daytime, in addition to several control symbols that symbolize the control actions corresponding to the above-mentioned control target equipment 第126頁 541447 案號 89117483 曰 修正 六、申請專利範圍 當作上述影像區塊進行繪製以外,一併將上述共通資 料及上述附帶情報進行輸入; 上述附帶情報供給手段,在上述第1或者是第2編輯處 理中,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所被 選擇,且被複製到另一方編輯晝面的上述影像區塊, 藉由參照其隨附在該影像區塊的共通資料,對應被選 擇的影像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制對 象機器的影像區塊將與上述附帶情報一起自動的繪製 〇P.126 541447 Case No. 89117483 Amendment VI. In addition to drawing the scope of the patent application as the above-mentioned image block, the common information and the incidental information are input; the incidental information supply means is described in the first or the first 2 In the editing process, any one of the above-mentioned first or second editing day surface is selected and copied to the above-mentioned image block of the other editing day surface, by referring to the image block attached to the image block Common data, the control target device corresponding to the selected image block and the image block that will target the same control target device will be automatically drawn together with the above-mentioned incidental information. 2 9 .如申請專利範圍第2 8項所記載的編輯設備;其中,附 帶情報包含於上述共通資料中。 3 〇 .如申請專利範圍第2 9項所記載的編輯設備;其中,附 帶情報為上述變數。29. The editing equipment as described in item 28 of the scope of patent application; wherein the accompanying information is included in the above-mentioned common materials. 30. The editing device described in item 29 of the scope of patent application; wherein the accompanying information is the above-mentioned variables. 3 1 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯晝面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理和,關於在 任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所輸入之資 料,選擇顯示於該編輯晝面上的影像區塊,且順應其 複製至其他編輯畫面上之操作,依據顯示内容程式和3 1. — A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer. The recording medium includes a display unit for displaying the status of the control target device and a display of the control function for controlling the operation of the control target device. The control content system is the first editing means created in response to the input operation on the first editing day surface in order to formulate the display content program executed by the display function unit and the control executed by the control function unit. The control program of the program is the second editing process created in accordance with the input operation on the second editing day and the data input on the first or second editing day on either side is selected and displayed on the The editing of the image blocks on the day, and in accordance with the operation of copying it to other editing screens, according to the display content program and 第127頁 541447 αι 案號 89117483 年 月 修正 六、申請專利範圍 控制程序程式之間所共通的資料,在上述第1或者是第 2編輯手段上的上述顯示内容程式和上述控制程序程式 中產生固有的固有貧料的貢料產生處理和’將上述共 通資料及上述固有資料儲存於單一檔案的資料統合處 理。 3 2 .如申請專利範圍第3 1項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,第1 編輯處理,在上述第1編輯晝面上,除了將上述對象機 器及代表其狀態的複數的顯示符號作為上述影像區塊 進行繪製以外,並一併將上述共通資料輸入; 上述第2編輯處理,在上述第2編輯畫面上,除了將象 徵對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號 當作上述影像區塊進行繪製以外,並一併將上述共通 資料輸入; 上述資料產生處理,在上述第1或者是第2編輯手段中 ,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所被選擇 ,且被複製到另一方編輯晝面的上述影像區塊,藉由 參照其隨附在該影像區塊的共通資料,對應被選擇的 影像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制對象機 器的影像區塊將自動的繪製。 3 3 .如申請專利範圍第3 2項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,資 料統合處理,將作為包含上述控制對象機器的位址及 被設定對應該位址的變數的上述共通資料的變數資料 和,作為包含上述控制符號及對應該符號的上述變數 名的上述固有資料的控制程序資料和,作為包含上述Page 541 541447 αι Case No. 89117483 Amended in June 6. The data common to the patent application range control program is inherent in the display content program and the control program program on the first or second editing means. The processing of the trivial material generation of the inherently poor material and the data of the above-mentioned common data and the above-mentioned inherent data stored in a single file are integrated. 3 2. The recording medium described in item 31 of the scope of patent application; wherein, in the first editing process, on the first editing day, the target device and a plurality of display symbols representing the status are used as the image. In addition to drawing blocks, and inputting the above-mentioned common data together; in the second editing process, on the second editing screen, a plurality of control symbols that symbolize the control actions corresponding to the control target device are used as the image area. In addition to drawing blocks, and inputting the above-mentioned common data at the same time; the above-mentioned data generation processing is selected from the above-mentioned first or second editing means in any one of the first or second editing day, and The above-mentioned image block copied to the other party's editing daytime surface, by referring to the common data attached to the image block, corresponds to the control target device of the selected image block and the image to be directed to the same control target device The blocks will be drawn automatically. 3 3. The recording medium as described in Item 32 of the scope of patent application; among them, the data integration process will take the variable data and the common data of the above-mentioned common data including the address of the control target device and the variable set to the address. As control program data including the control data and the above-mentioned inherent data of the variable names corresponding to the symbols, and as including the above 第128頁 541447 91 0 厂 _案號89117483_年…月 日 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 顯示符號及對應該符號的上述變數名的上述固有資料 的顯示内容資料,運用上述兩個符號資料各別藉由上 述變數名可以和上述變數資料結合的型態將其儲存於 上述檔案。Page 128 541447 91 0 Factory_Case No. 89117483_ Year ... Month / Day Amendment_ VI. The scope of patent application shows the display contents of the symbols and the above-mentioned inherent information corresponding to the above-mentioned variable names corresponding to the symbols. The above two symbols are used to separate the contents. The variable name can be combined with the variable data and stored in the file. 3 4 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯晝面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理的任何一方 ,和關於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上 所輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯晝面上的影像區塊 ,且順應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之操作,依據顯示 内容程式和控制程序程式之間所共通的資料,在上述 第1或者是第2編輯手段上的上述顯示内容程式和上述 控制程序程式中產生固有的固有資料的資料產生處理 ,和將上述共通資料及上述固有資料儲存於單一檔案 的貧料統合處理。3 4. —A recording medium for storing editing programs and readable by a computer, which includes: a display unit for displaying the status of the control target device and a display for the control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. The control content system is the first editing means created in response to the input operation on the first editing day surface in order to formulate the display content program executed by the display function unit and the control executed by the control function unit. The control program of the program is any one of the second editing processes created in accordance with the input operation on the second editing day, and the data entered on the first or second editing day on either side, Select the image block displayed on the editing day and follow the operation of copying it to other editing day. According to the data common between the display content program and the control program, in the first or second editing above Means for generating data inherent in the display content program and the control program program that are inherent in the means, and The above-lean common system information and the inherent data stored in a single file bonding process. 3 5 .如申請專利範圍第3 4項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,第1 編輯處理,在上述第1編輯畫面上,除了將上述對象機 器及代表其狀態的複數的顯示符號作為上述影像區塊 進行繪製以外,並一併將上述共通資料輸入;35. The recording medium described in item 34 of the scope of patent application; wherein, in the first editing process, on the first editing screen, the target device and a plurality of display symbols representing its status are used as the image area. In addition to drawing blocks, and input the above common data; 第129頁 541447 修正 案號 89117483 六、申請專利範圍 上述第2編輯處理,在上述第2編輯晝面上,除了將象 徵對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號 當作上述影像區塊進行繪製以外,並一併將上述共通 資料輸入; 上述資料產生處理,在上述第1或者是第2編輯手段中 ,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上所被選擇 ,且被複製到另一方編輯畫面的上述影像區塊,藉由 參照其隨附在該影像區塊的共通資料,對應被選擇的 影像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制對象機 器的影像區塊將自動的繪製。 3 6 .如申請專利範圍第3 5項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,資 料統合處理,將作為包含上述控制對象機器的位址及 被設定對應該位址的變數的上述共通資料的變數資料 和,作為包含上述控制符號及對應該符號的上述變數 名的上述固有資料的控制程序資料和,作為包含上述 顯示符號及對應該符號的上述變數名的上述固有資料 的顯示内容資料,運用上述兩個符號資料各別藉由上 述變數名可以和上述變數資料結合的型態將其儲存於 上述檔案。 3 7.如申請專利範圍第3 1項或第3 4項所記載的記錄媒介; 其中,關於在任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯畫面 上所輸入之資料,選擇顯示於該編輯晝面上的影像區 塊,且順應其複製至其他編輯晝面上之操作,將關於 上述影像區塊的附帶情報提供給對應該編輯晝面的編P.129 541447 Amendment No. 89117483 VI. Patent application scope The above-mentioned second editing process, on the second editing day, except for the several control symbols that symbolize the control actions corresponding to the control target machine as the image block In addition to drawing, and inputting the above-mentioned common data at the same time; the above-mentioned data generation processing, in the above-mentioned first or second editing means, any one of the above-mentioned first or second editing day is selected and is The above-mentioned image block copied to the editing screen of the other party corresponds to the control target device of the selected image block and the image block that will be directed to the same control target device by referring to the common data attached to the image block. Will be drawn automatically. 36. The recording medium described in item 35 of the scope of the patent application; wherein the data integration process will be the variable data and the common data including the address of the control target device and the variable set to the address, and As the control program data including the control symbol and the inherent data of the variable name corresponding to the symbol, and as the display content data including the display symbol and the inherent data of the variable name corresponding to the symbol, use the two The symbol data is stored in the above-mentioned file by the type that the variable name can be combined with the variable data. 3 7. The recording medium described in item 31 or item 34 of the scope of the patent application; wherein the data entered on the first or second editing screen of any one of the parties is selected to be displayed on the editing day The image blocks on the surface are copied to other editors on the daytime surface, and the additional information about the above image blocks is provided to the editors who correspond to the daylight surface. 第130頁 541447 m _案號89117483_年月曰 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 輯處理之附帶情報供給處理。 3 8 .如申請專利範圍第3 7項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,上 述第1編輯處理,在上述第1編輯晝面上,除了將上述 對象機器及代表其狀態的複數的顯示符號作為上述影 像區塊進行繪製以外,並將包含對應各控制對象機器 所設定的變數,和上述顯示内容程式及上述控制程序 程式所共通的共通資料和上述附帶情報一併輸入; 上述第2編輯處理,在上述第2編輯晝面上,除了將象 徵對應上述控制對象機器的控制動作的數個控制符號 當作上述影像區塊進行繪製以外,並將上述共通資料 和上述附帶情報一併輸入; 上述附帶情報供給處理,在上述第1或者是第2編輯處 理中,任何一方的上述第1或者是第2編輯畫面上所被 選擇,且被複製到另一方編輯晝面的上述影像區塊, 藉由參照其隨附在該影像區塊的共通資料,將對應被 選擇的影像區塊的控制對象機器和將針對同一個控制 對象機器的影像區塊和上述附帶情報將一併自動的繪 製。 3 9 .如申請專利範圍第3 8項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,附 帶情報包含於上述共通資料中。P.130 541447 m _Case No. 89117483_ Year Month Amendment _ VI. Processing of Patent Information Supplementary Information Supply Processing. 38. The recording medium described in item 37 of the scope of patent application; wherein, in the first editing process, on the first editing day, the target device and a plurality of display symbols representing the status are used as the above. In addition to drawing the image block, it will include the variables set for each control target device, the common data common to the display content program and the control program program, and the incidental information. Enter the second editing process. On the second editing day, in addition to drawing a plurality of control symbols that symbolize the control operations corresponding to the control target device as the image blocks, the common data and the incidental information are input together; the incidental information In the supply process, in the first or second editing process, any one of the first or second editing screens is selected and copied to the above-mentioned image block on the other side of the editing day, with reference to The common data attached to this image block will correspond to the control target device and the target of the selected image block. With a control object machine image block and said additional information will also be automatically plotted. 39. The recording medium as described in item 38 of the scope of patent application; wherein additional information is included in the above-mentioned common materials. 4 0 .如申請專利範圍第3 9項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,附 帶情報為上述變數。 4 1 . 一種編輯設備,其所包含的内容有:具有顯示控制對 象機器之狀態顯示功能部和,控制該控制對象機器之40. The recording medium described in item 39 of the scope of patent application; wherein the accompanying information is the above-mentioned variables. 4 1. An editing device, which includes: a status display function section for displaying a control target device, and a means for controlling the control target device. 第131頁 541447 9! 9 13 案號 89117483_年·为· 日__ 六、申請專利範圍 動作的控制功能部的顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定 上述顯示功能部所執行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是 在第1編輯畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段 及為了制定上述控制功能部所執行的控制的程序的控 制程序程式是在第2編輯畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的 第2編輯手段,和將分派於控制對象機器的位址之變數 ,為了將其顯示於第1及第2編輯晝面上,對應上述控 制對象機器,在上述第1及第2編輯手段中各別被準備 的影像區塊之中,運用具有關聯性的相同功能伙伴和 和建立關聯的狀態來進行登錄的登錄手段,和除了顯 示被登錄的上述變數以外,選擇被顯示的變數,且伴 隨著在上述第1或者是第2編輯晝面上的指示操作,將 與該變數建立關聯性的影像區塊顯示於該變數所被指 示的編輯畫面之顯示手段。 4 2 .如申請專利範圍第4 1項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述登錄手段是藉由,功能關聯的上述影像區塊和與上 述變數的關聯建立,因而將功能屬性賦予變數而可執 行的。 4 3 .如申請專利範圍第4 2項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述顯示手段是讓上述變數與上述影像區塊一併顯示。 4 4. 一種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執P.131 541447 9! 9 13 Case No. 89117483_year · for · day__ VI. The display / control system of the control function section of the patent application operation is targeted for the purpose of formulating the display of the display content performed by the display function section. The content program is the first editing means created in response to the input operation on the first editing screen and the control program program for formulating the control program executed by the control function section is the first created in accordance with the input operation on the second editing screen. 2 editing means and variables assigned to the addresses of the control target devices, in order to display them on the first and second editing day, corresponding to the control target devices, the first and second editing methods are respectively Among the prepared image blocks, the registration means that uses the same functional partners that are related and the status of the association to register, and selects the variables to be displayed in addition to the above-mentioned variables that are registered, is accompanied by the The above first or second editing instruction on the day of the day displays the image block associated with the variable to the referenced point of the variable The editing screen display means. 4 2. The editing device as described in item 41 of the scope of patent application; wherein the registration means is established by the function-associated image block and the association with the variable, so the function attribute is assigned to the variable and can be executed. of. 43. The editing device as described in item 42 of the scope of patent application; wherein the above-mentioned display means is to display the above variables together with the above-mentioned image blocks. 4 4. A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer. The recording medium includes a display function section for displaying the status of the control target device and a display function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. The control system is targeted for the implementation of the above display function 541447 αη · _案號89117483_年月日_ifi_ 六、申請專利範圍 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯晝面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理,和將分派 於控制對象機器的位址之變數,為了將其顯示於第1及 第2編輯晝面上,對應上述控制對象機器,在上述第1 及第2編輯手段中各別被準備的影像區塊之中,運用具 有關聯性的相同功能伙伴和和建立關聯的狀態來進行 登錄的登錄處理,和除了顯示被登錄的上述變數以外 ,選擇被顯示的變數,且伴隨著在上述第1或者是第2 編輯晝面上的指示操作,將與該變數建立關聯性的影 像區塊顯示於該變數所被指示的編輯晝面之顯示處理 〇 4 5 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯晝面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理的任何一方 ,和將分派於控制對象機器的位址之變數,為了將其 顯示於第1及第2編輯晝面上,對應上述控制對象機器 ,在上述第1及第2編輯手段中各別被準備的影像區塊541447 αη · _ Case No. 89117483_ Year Month Day _ifi_ Sixth, the display content program of the patent application line display content program is the first editing method created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing day and the above control function The control program is a second editing process created in response to an input operation on the second editing day and a variable that assigns an address assigned to the control target device in order to display it on the first editing program. On the second editing day, corresponding to the control target device, among the image blocks prepared separately in the first and second editing means, the same functional partners having the correlation and the status of the association are used to Perform registration process of the registration, and select the displayed variable in addition to the registered variable, and follow the instruction operation on the first or second editing day above, and associate the image with the variable The block is displayed on the editing day indicated by the variable. 5 5 — A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer It includes a display / control system including a status display function section for displaying the control target device and a control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. The display is designed to formulate the display of the display content executed by the display function section. The content program is created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing day and the control program in order to formulate the control program executed by the control function unit is created in response to the input operation on the second editing screen. Either of the second editing process and the variable to be assigned to the address of the control target device, in order to display it on the first and second editing day, corresponding to the control target device, the first and second edits Individually prepared image blocks in the method 第133頁 541447 m. ο. if? 案號89117483_年月曰 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 之中,運用具有關聯性的相同功能伙伴和建立關聯的 狀態來進行登錄的登錄處理,和除了顯示被登錄的上 述變數以外,選擇被顯示的變數,且伴隨著在上述第1 或者是第2編輯晝面上的指示操作,將與該變數建立關 聯性的影像區塊顯示於該變數所被指示的編輯晝面之 顯示處理。 4 6 .如申請專利範圍第4 4項或第4 5項所記載的記錄媒介; 其中,上述登錄處理是藉由功能關聯的上述影像區塊 和與上述變數的關聯建立,因而將功能屬性賦予變數 而可執行的。 4 7 .如申請專利範圍第4 6項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,上 述顯示處理是讓上述變數與上述影像區塊一併顯示。 4 8 . —種編輯設備,其所包含的内容有:具有顯示控制對 象機器之狀態顯示功能部和,控制該控制對象機器之 動作的控制功能部的顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定 上述顯示功能部所執行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是 在第1編輯畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段 及為了制定上述控制功能部所執行的控制的程序的控 制程序程式是在第2編輯晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的 第2編輯手段,和具有複數功能的影像區塊是藉由第1 編輯手段配置於第1編輯畫面上,除了預先將上述控制 對象機器的位址進行分派以外,將與上述影像區塊的 各個功能建立關聯的變數,登錄於將構成上述控制程 序程式的指令依執行順序儲存的程式目錄中,因而,P.133 541447 m. Ο. If? Case No. 89117483_Year Month and Amendment_ VI. In the scope of patent application, use the same functional partners that have relevance and the status of establishment of association to perform the login registration process, and except for the display In addition to the registered variables, the displayed variables are selected, and along with the instruction operation on the first or second editing day, an image block associated with the variable is displayed on the variable. Edit the day and night display processing. 46. The recording medium described in item 44 or item 45 of the scope of patent application; wherein the above-mentioned registration process is established by the above-mentioned image block associated with the function and the association with the above-mentioned variable, so the functional attribute is given Variable and executable. 47. The recording medium described in item 46 of the scope of patent application; wherein the display processing is to display the above variables together with the above-mentioned image blocks. 4 8. An editing device including: a display / control system having a status display function section for displaying the control target device and a control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. In order to formulate the above display, The display content program of the display content executed by the function section is the first editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing screen and the control program program for formulating the control program executed by the control function section is edited in the second The second editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the daytime and the image block with plural functions are arranged on the first editing screen by the first editing means. In addition to assigning the addresses of the control target devices in advance The variables associated with each function of the image block are registered in the program directory where the instructions constituting the control program program are stored in the execution order. 第134頁 541447 案號 89117483 年 月 曰 修正 六、申請專利範圍 將對應上述影像區塊的部份程式進行產生之程式產生 手段。 4 9 .如申請專利範圍第4 8項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述程式產生手段,讓上述第2編輯手段,將構成上述部 份程式的指令群組在上述第2編輯畫面上產生視覺化。 5 0 .如申請專利範圍第4 8項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述程式產生手段,將被產生的上述部份程式保存於個 別的檔案中。Page 134 541447 Case No. 89117483 Month, Amendment VI. Scope of Patent Application Program generation means that will generate and generate part of the programs corresponding to the above image blocks. 4 9. The editing device described in item 48 of the scope of patent application; wherein the program generating means allows the second editing means to generate a visual group on the second editing screen of the instruction group constituting the partial program. Into. 50. The editing device as described in item 48 of the scope of patent application; wherein, the above program generating means saves the generated partial program in a separate file. 5 1 .如申請專利範圍第5 0項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述程式產生手段,將產生的上述部份程式作為上述控 制程序程式的子程式,分割成該子程式後將其保存。51. An editing device as described in item 50 of the scope of patent application; wherein, the program generating means described above uses the generated partial program as a subprogram of the control program program, divides it into the subprogram, and saves it. 5 2 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯晝面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理,和具有複 數功能的影像區塊是藉由第1編輯手段配置於第1編輯 晝面上,除了預先將上述控制對象機器的位址進行分 派以外,將與上述影像區塊的各個功能建立關聯的變 數,登錄於將構成上述控制程序程式的指令依執行順 序儲存的程式目錄中,因而,將對應上述影像區塊的5 2. — A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer. The recording medium includes a display unit for displaying the status of the control target device and a display for the control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. The control content system is the first editing means created in response to the input operation on the first editing day surface in order to formulate the display content program executed by the display function unit and the control executed by the control function unit. The control program of the program is the second editing process created in accordance with the input operation on the second editing screen, and the image block with plural functions is arranged on the first editing day surface by the first editing means. In addition to assigning the address of the control target machine, variables associated with each function of the image block are registered in a program directory in which the instructions constituting the control program program are stored in the execution order. Image block 第135頁 9!U 年月日 修正 541447 案號 89117483 六、申請專利範圍 部份程式進行產生之程式產生處理。 5 3 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯畫面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理的任何一方 ,和具有複數功能的影像區塊是藉由第1編輯手段配置 於第1編輯晝面上,除了預先將上述控制對象機器的位 址進行分派以外,將與上述影像區塊的各個功能建立 關聯的變數,登錄於將構成上述控制程序程式的指令 依執行順序儲存的程式目錄中,因而,將對應上述影 像區塊的部份程式進行產生之程式產生處理。 5 4 .如申請專利範圍第5 2項或5 3項所記載的記錄媒介;其 中,上述程式產生處理,讓上述第2編輯處理,將構成 上述部份程式的指令群組在上述第2編輯晝面上產生視 覺化。 5 5 .如申請專利範圍第5 2項或5 3項所記載的記錄媒介;其 中,上述程式產生處理,將被產生的上述部份程式保 存於個別的檔案中。 5 6 .如申請專利範圍第5 5項所記載記錄媒介;其中,上述 程式產生處理,將產生的上述部份程式作為上述控制Page 135 9! U Date Modified 541447 Case No. 89117483 VI. Patent Application Scope Some programs generate and generate programs. 5 3. —A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer, which includes a display unit for displaying the status of the control target device and a display for the control function section that controls the operation of the control target device. / Control system is the first editing means created in response to the input operation on the first editing screen in order to formulate the display content program executed by the display function section and the control executed by the control function section. The control program of the program is any one of the second editing process created according to the input operation on the second editing screen, and the image block having a plurality of functions is arranged on the first editing day surface by the first editing means. In addition to assigning the addresses of the control target machines in advance, the variables associated with each function of the image block are registered in the program directory where the instructions constituting the control program are stored in the execution order. Program generation processing corresponding to the partial program of the above image block. 5 4. The recording medium described in Item 52 or Item 53 of the scope of the patent application; wherein the above-mentioned program generates processing, and the second editing processing is performed, and the instruction group constituting the above partial program is edited in the second editing Visualization occurs on the day. 5 5. The recording medium described in item 52 or 53 of the scope of patent application; where the above-mentioned program is generated and processed, and the generated part of the above-mentioned program is stored in a separate file. 56. The recording medium as described in Item 55 of the scope of patent application; wherein, the above-mentioned program is generated and processed, and the above-mentioned part of the generated program is used as the above-mentioned control. 第136頁 541447 ί|! _案號89117483_^ ^ k 曰 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 程序程式的子程式,分割成該子程式後將其保存。 5 7 . —種編輯設備,其所包含的内容有:具有顯示控制對 象機器之狀態顯示功能部和,控制該控制對象機器之 動作的控制功能部的顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定 上述顯示功能部所執行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是 在第1編輯晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段 及為了制定上述控制功能部所執行的控制的程序的控 制程序程式是在第2編輯晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的 第2編輯手段,和將為了構成上述控制程序程式的指令 與為了構成上述顯示内容程式的影像區塊預先建立其 對應關係,並將對應包含於藉由上述第2編輯手段所製 作的上述控制程序程式的指令影像區塊,針對複數的 指令進行抽出作業的抽出手段。 5 8 .如申請專利範圍第5 7項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述抽出手段,將所抽出的影像區塊用上述顯示内容程 式的一個畫面單位進行登錄。 5 9 .如申請專利範圍第5 8項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述抽出手段,針對單一的上述控制程序程式,總括後 再將影像區塊抽出。 6 0 .如申請專利範圍第5 7項所記載的編輯設備;其中,上 述抽出手段,將針對上述指令的屬性情報和影像區塊 一併抽出。 6 1 . —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功Page 136 541447 ί |! _Case No. 89117483_ ^ ^ k said Amendment_ VI. Patent Application Scope The subprogram of the program program is divided into this subprogram and saved. 5 7. — An editing device, which includes: a display / control system having a status display function section for displaying the control target device and a control function section for controlling the operation of the control target device. The display content program of the display content executed by the function section is the first editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing day and the control program program for formulating the control program executed by the control function section is described in the second section. The second editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the editing day, and establishes a correspondence relationship between the instruction for constituting the control program program and the image block for constituting the display content program in advance, and the correspondence is included in the The instruction image block of the control program program created by the second editing means is an extraction means for extracting a plurality of instructions. 58. The editing device as described in item 57 of the scope of patent application; wherein the above-mentioned extraction means registers the extracted image block with one screen unit of the above display content program. 59. The editing device as described in item 58 of the scope of patent application; wherein the above-mentioned extraction means is directed to a single above-mentioned control program, and then the image blocks are extracted. 60. The editing device as described in item 57 of the scope of patent application; wherein, the above-mentioned extraction means extracts the attribute information and image blocks for the above instructions together. 6 1. — A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer, which includes: a status display function for displaying the control target machine 第137頁 541447 _案號 89117483_料:丨‘月"日__ 六、申請專利範圍 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯畫面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 畫面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理,和將為了 構成上述控制程序程式的指令與為了構成上述顯示内 容程式的影像區塊預先建立其對應關係,並將對應包 含於藉由上述第2編輯手段所製作的上述控制程序程式 的指令影像區塊,針對複數的指令進行抽出作業的抽 出處理。 6 2. —種用於儲存編輯程式且可由電腦讀取之記錄媒介, 其所包含的有:具有顯示控制對象機器之狀態顯示功 能部和,控制該控制對象機器之動作的控制功能部的 顯示/控制系統為對象,為了制定上述顯示功能部所執 行的顯示内容的顯示内容程式是在第1編輯晝面上順應 輸入操作而製作的第1編輯手段及為了制定上述控制功 能部所執行的控制的程序的控制程序程式是在第2編輯 晝面上順應輸入操作而製作的第2編輯處理的任何一方 ’和將為了構成上述控制程序程式的指令與為了構成 上述顯示内容程式的影像區塊預先建立其對應關係, 並將對應包含於藉由上述第2編輯手段所製作的上述控 制程序程式的指令影像區塊,針對複數的指令進行抽 出作業的抽出處理。Page 137 541447 _Case No. 89117483_ Material: 丨 'Month " Day__ VI. The scope of the patent application and the display / control system of the control function part that controls the operation of the control target machine are targeted. The display content program of the display content executed by the display function section is the first editing means created in accordance with the input operation on the first editing screen and the control program program for formulating the control program executed by the control function section is the second The second editing process created in accordance with the input operation on the editing screen, and establishes a correspondence relationship between the instructions for constituting the control program program and the image blocks for constituting the display content program in advance, and the correspondence is included in 2 The instruction image block of the control program program produced by the editing means performs extraction processing for a plurality of instructions. 6 2. —A recording medium that can be used to store editing programs and can be read by a computer, which includes: a display unit that displays the status of the control target device and a display of the control function that controls the operation of the control target device The control content system is the first editing means created in response to the input operation on the first editing day surface in order to formulate the display content program executed by the display function unit and the control executed by the control function unit. The control program of the program is any one of the second editing process created in accordance with the input operation on the second editing day surface, and the instructions for constituting the control program program and the image block for constituting the display content program are previously The corresponding relationship is established, and corresponding to the instruction image block of the control program program produced by the second editing means, extraction processing is performed for a plurality of instructions. 第138頁 541447 91 Q 11 _案號89117483_年·"月’曰 修正_ 六、申請專利範圍 6 3 .如申請專利範圍第6 1項或第6 2項所記載的記錄媒介; 其中,上述抽出處理,將所抽出的影像區塊用上述顯 示内容程式的一個畫面單位進行登錄。 6 4 .如申請專利範圍第6 3項所記載的記錄媒介;其中,上 述抽出處理,針對單一的上述控制程序程式,總括後 再將影像區塊抽出。 6 5 .如申請專利範圍第6 1項或第6 2項所記載的記錄媒介; 其中,上述抽出處理,將針對上述指令的屬性情報和 影像區塊一併抽出。Page 138 541447 91 Q 11 _Case No. 89117483_ Year " Month's Amendment_ VI. Patent Application Scope 63 3. The recording medium as described in Item 61 or Item 62 of the Patent Application Scope; Among them, In the extraction process, the extracted image block is registered in one screen unit of the display content program. 64. The recording medium described in item 63 of the scope of patent application; wherein, the above extraction processing is directed to a single above-mentioned control program, and then the image blocks are extracted. 65. The recording medium described in item 61 or item 62 of the scope of the patent application; wherein, in the above extraction process, the attribute information and image block for the above instruction are extracted together. 第139頁Chapter 139
TW89117483A 1999-08-31 2000-08-29 Editor device and recording medium for storing an editor program TW541447B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP24644599A JP3913414B2 (en) 1999-08-31 1999-08-31 Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP24641799A JP2001075616A (en) 1999-08-31 1999-08-31 Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP24640299A JP2001075614A (en) 1999-08-31 1999-08-31 Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP24640799A JP2001075615A (en) 1999-08-31 1999-08-31 Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP24922799A JP2001075791A (en) 1999-09-02 1999-09-02 Editor device and recording medium recording editor program

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW541447B true TW541447B (en) 2003-07-11

Family

ID=29716326

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89117483A TW541447B (en) 1999-08-31 2000-08-29 Editor device and recording medium for storing an editor program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW541447B (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI512416B (en) * 2012-11-22 2015-12-11 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Apparatus for supporting the preparation of a program, method thereof, and a recording medium
TWI571713B (en) * 2014-06-12 2017-02-21 三菱電機股份有限公司 Screen generating software
CN110546605A (en) * 2017-05-31 2019-12-06 欧姆龙株式会社 Program development support device, program development support method, and program development support program

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI512416B (en) * 2012-11-22 2015-12-11 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Apparatus for supporting the preparation of a program, method thereof, and a recording medium
TWI571713B (en) * 2014-06-12 2017-02-21 三菱電機股份有限公司 Screen generating software
CN110546605A (en) * 2017-05-31 2019-12-06 欧姆龙株式会社 Program development support device, program development support method, and program development support program
CN110546605B (en) * 2017-05-31 2022-11-11 欧姆龙株式会社 Program development support device, program development support method, and storage medium

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10114349B2 (en) Multiple applications utilized in an industrial automation system displayed as a single application
CN100368987C (en) Editing device and storage medium for storage editor program
US7945937B2 (en) Programmable display device
JP3839468B2 (en) International data processing system
JP4612069B2 (en) How to represent and manipulate data
CN105512395A (en) Production method of three-dimensional interactive electronic manual
JP4302146B2 (en) Program creation support device
US9812170B2 (en) Method for automated television production
TW541447B (en) Editor device and recording medium for storing an editor program
CN106066635A (en) Trapezoid figure program creates device and trapezoid figure program creation method
JP3847585B2 (en) Editor registration device, registration program, and recording medium recording the same
CN106415416B (en) Drawing practice
JP7466319B2 (en) Programmable display and programmable logic controller system equipped with the same
JP3939518B2 (en) Input / output address setting device, input / output address setting program and recording medium recording the same
JP2008021154A (en) Operation screen editing method for control indicator
JPH10320463A (en) Network system for distribution of maintenance related document, document processing system and the method thereby
JP2001075614A (en) Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP2002062910A (en) Editor device and storage medium recording editor program
JP4335109B2 (en) Screen creation device, screen creation program, and recording medium recording the same
JP2001075616A (en) Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP3712640B2 (en) Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP4563255B2 (en) Programmable display, control program, and recording medium recording the program
JP3710731B2 (en) Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JP3712641B2 (en) Editor device and recording medium recording editor program
JPH10333896A (en) Table reference method and device therefor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees